1|Madhya 20: Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu Instructs
>|Sanatana Gosvami in the Science of the Absolute Truth
2|Chapter 20:
3|Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu Instructs Sanatana Gosvami in
>|the Science of the Absolute Truth
4|The following summary of this chapter is given by
>|Bhaktivinoda Thakura in his Amrta-pravaha-bhasya. When
>|Srila Sanatana Gosvami was imprisoned by Nawab Hussain Shah,
>| he received news from Rupa Gosvami that Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu had gone to Mathura. Sanatana Gosvami thereafter
>|satisfied the superintendent of the jail by sweet
>|solicitations and bribery. After giving the jailer seven
>|thousand gold coins, Sanatana Gosvami was released. He then
>|crossed the Ganges and fled. One of his servants, Isana,
>|followed him, carrying eight gold coins. Sanatana Gosvami
>|and his servant then spent the night in a small hotel on
>|the way to Benares. The hotel owner knew that Sanatana
>|Gosvami and his servant had eight gold coins, and he
>|decided to kill them and take the money. Making plans in
>|this way, the hotel owner received them as honorable guests.
>| Sanatana Gosvami, however, asked his servant how much
>|money he had, and taking seven of the gold coins,
>|Sanatana offered them to the hotel owner. Thus the owner
>|helped them cross the hilly tract and proceed toward
>|Varanasi. On the way, Sanatana Gosvami met his brother-in-
>|law, Srikanta, at Hajipura, and Srikanta helped him after
>|he had heard about all Sanatana's troubles. Thus Sanatana
>|Gosvami finally arrived at Varanasi and stood before the
>|door of Candrasekhara. Caitanya Mahaprabhu called him in
>|and ordered him to change his dress so that he would look
>|like a gentleman. For his garment, he used an old cloth of
>|Tapana Misra's. Later, he exchanged his valuable blanket
>|for a torn quilt. At this time Caitanya Mahaprabhu was very
>|pleased with him, and thus Sri Sanatana Gosvami received
>|knowledge of the Absolute Truth from the Lord Himself.
5|First they discussed the constitutional position of the
>|living entities, and Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu explained to
>|Sanatana Gosvami how the living entity is one of Lord Krsna'
>|s energies. After this, the Lord explained the way of
>|devotional service. While discussing the Absolute Truth,
>|Sri Krsna, the Lord analyzed Brahman, Paramatma and
>|Bhagavan, as well as the expansions of the Lord called
>|svayam-rupa, tad-ekatma and avesa, which are divided into
>|various branches known as vaibhava and prabhava. Thus the
>|Lord described the many forms of the Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead. He also described the incarnations of God within
>|the material world, incarnations such as the purusa-
>|avataras, manvantara-avataras, guna-avataras and saktyavesa-
>|avataras. The Lord also discussed the divisions of Krsna's
>|different ages, such as balya and pauganda, and the
>|different pastimes of the different ages. He explained how
>|Krsna attained His permanent form when He reached youth. In
>|this way Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu explained and described
>|everything to Sanatana Gosvami.
6|Madhya 20.1
7|TEXT 1
8|TEXT
9|õNµ•ÃÃd(tm)L±3/4³ÃÍî«lSS MÍaÂîdI÷ýÃñ›¶tRÂ÷A h
10|dNNa±•Ãÿó lR›¶u±ðñR uI±ðÃAt¿MÃú±¦a›¶õîSÂLÁÐ N 1 N
11|vande 'nantadbhutaisvaryam
12| sri-caitanya-mahaprabhum
13|nico 'pi yat-prasadat syad
14| bhakti-sastra-pravartakah
15|SYNONYMS
16|vande-I offer my respectful obeisances; ananta-unlimited;
>|adbhuta-wonderful; aisvaryam-possessing opulences; sri-
>|caitanya-mahaprabhum-unto Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; nicah
>|api-even a person in the lowest status of life; yat-
>|prasadat-by whose mercy; syat-may become; bhakti-sastra-of
>|the science of devotional service; pravartakah-an
>|inaugurator.
17|TRANSLATION
18|Let me offer my respectful obeisances unto Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu, who has unlimited, wonderful opulences. By His
>|mercy, even a person born as the lowest of men can spread
>|the science of devotional service.
19|Madhya 20.2
20|TEXT 2
21|TEXT
22|æÃlþ æÃlþ MÍaÂîdI æÃlþ ¿dîÂI±dµ h
23|æÃlþ±ÍZîÂaÂf æÃlþ ÎáNõþtÂMõÔµ N 2 N
24|jaya jaya sri-caitanya jaya nityananda
25|jayadvaita-candra jaya gaura-bhakta-vrnda
26|SYNONYMS
27|jaya jaya-all glories; sri-caitanya-to Lord Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu; jaya-all glories; nityananda-to Nityananda;
>|jaya-all glories; advaita-candra-to Advaita Acarya; jaya-
>|all glories; gaura-bhakta-vrnda-to all devotees of Lord Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu.
28|TRANSLATION
29|All glories to Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu! All glories to
>|Nityananda Prabhu! All glories to Advaita Acarya! And all
>|glories to all the devotees of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu!
30|Madhya 20.3
31|TEXT 3
32|TEXT
33|Ûn± ÎáNNnÂl ud±îd Õ±Nrà õ¿µú±Nh h
34|Mõþ+ó-Îá±u±¿Ûžõþ óSN Õ±ý×ÃÃh ÎýÃÃdLÁ±Nh N 3 N
35|etha gaude sanatana ache bandi-sale
36|sri-rupa-gosanira patri aila hena-kale
37|SYNONYMS
38|etha-here; gaude-in Bengal; sanatana-Sanatana Gosvami; ache-
>|was; bandi-sale-in prison; sri-rupa-gosanira-of Srila Rupa
>|Gosvami; patri-the letter; aila-came; hena-kale-at that
>|time.
39|TRANSLATION
40|While Sanatana Gosvami was imprisoned in Bengal, a letter
>|arrived from Srila Rupa Gosvami.
41|PURPORT
42|Srila Bhaktivinoda Thakura informs us that this letter from
>|Rupa Gosvami to Sanatana Gosvami is mentioned by the
>|annotator of the Udbhata-candrika. Srila Rupa Gosvami wrote
>|a note to Sanatana Gosvami from Bakla. This note indicated
>|that Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu was coming to Mathura, and it
>|stated:
43|yadu-pateh kva gata mathura-puri
44| raghu-pateh kva gatottara-kosala
45|iti vicintya kurusva manah sthiram
46| na sad idam jagad ity avadharaya
47|"Where has the Mathura-puri of Yadupati gone? Where has the
>|Northern Kosala of Raghupati gone? By reflection, make the
>|mind steady, thinking, 'This universe is not eternal.' "
48|Madhya 20.4
49|TEXT 4
50|TEXT
51|óSN ó±Ûž± ud±îd Õ±d¿µî ÆýÃÃh± h
52|lõd-õþŽÂLÁ-ó±ú LÁ¿ýÃÃNî h±¿áh± N 4 N
53|patri pana sanatana anandita haila
54|yavana-raksaka-pasa kahite lagila
55|SYNONYMS
56|patri pana-receiving the note; sanatana-Sanatana Gosvami;
>|anandita haila-became very pleased; yavana-meat-eater;
>|raksaka-the superintendent of the jail; pasa-before; kahite
>|lagila-began to say.
57|TRANSLATION
58|When Sanatana Gosvami received this note from Rupa Gosvami,
>|he became very pleased. He immediately went to the jail
>|superintendent, who was a meat-eater, and spoke as follows.
59|Madhya 20.5
60|TEXT 5
61|TEXT
62|"îR¿÷ ÛLÁ ¿æõ±óNõþ ÷ýÃñt±áIõ±dA h
63|ÎLÁî±õ-ÎLÁ±õþ±í-ú±N¦a Õ±Nrà Îî±÷±õþ :±d N 5 N
64|"tumi eka jinda-pira maha-bhagyavan
65|ketaba-korana-sastre ache tomara jnana
66|SYNONYMS
67|tumi-you; eka jinda-pira-a living saint; maha-bhagyavan-
>|very fortunate; ketaba-books; korana-the Koran; sastre-in
>|the scripture; ache-there is; tomara-your; jnana-knowledge.
68|TRANSLATION
69|Sanatana Gosvami told the Muslim jailkeeper, "Dear sir,
>|you are a saintly person and are very fortunate. You have
>|full knowledge of the revealed scriptures such as the Koran
>|and similar books.
70|Madhya 20.6
71|TEXT 6
72|TEXT
73|ÛLÁ õµN rñNnÂl l¿ðà ¿dæÃ-s÷S Îðÿmlþ± h
74|uSu±õþ ýÃÃý×ÃÃNî î±Nõþ ÷RMà LÁNõþd Îá±u±Ûž± N 6 N
75|eka bandi chade yadi nija-dharma dekhiya
76|samsara ha-ite tare mukta karena gosana
77|SYNONYMS
78|eka bandi-one imprisoned person; chade-one releases; yadi-
>|if; nija-dharma-one's own religion; dekhiya-consulting;
>|samsara ha-ite-from material bondage; tare-him; mukta
>|karena-releases; gosana-the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
79|TRANSLATION
80|"If one releases a conditioned soul or imprisoned person
>|according to religious principles, he himself is also
>|released from material bondage by the Supreme Personality
>|of Godhead."
81|PURPORT
82|It appears from this statement that Sanatana Gosvami, who
>|was formerly a minister of the Nawab, was trying to cheat
>|the Muslim superintendent. A jail superintendent had
>|only an ordinary education, or practically no education,
>|and he was certainly not supposed to be very advanced in
>|spiritual knowledge. But just to satisfy him,
>|Sanatana Gosvami praised him as a very learned scholar of
>|the scriptures. The jailkeeper could not deny that he was a
>|learned scholar , because when one is elevated to an
>|exalted position, one thinks oneself fit for that position.
>|Sanatana Gosvami was correctly explaining the effects of
>|spiritual activity, and the jailkeeper connected his
>|statement with his release from jail
>|
>|
>|
>|
>|.
83|There are innumerable conditioned souls rotting in the
>|material world, imprisoned by maya under the spell of sense
>|gratification. The living entity is so entranced by the
>|spell of maya that in conditioned life even a pig feels
>|satisfied. There are two kinds of covering powers exhibited
>|by maya. One is called praksepatmika, and the other is
>|called avaranatmika. When one is determined to get out of
>|material bondage, the praksepatmika-sakti, the spell of
>|diversion, impels one to remain in conditioned life fully
>|satisfied by sense gratification. Due to the other power (
>|avaranatmika), a conditioned soul feels satisfied even if
>|he is rotting in the body of a pig or a worm in stool. To
>|release a conditioned soul from material bondage is very
>|difficult because the spell of maya is so strong. Even when
>|the Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself descends to
>|deliver conditioned souls, asking them to surrender unto
>|Him, the conditioned souls do not agree to the Lord's
>|proposal. Therefore Sri Sanatana Gosvami said, "Somehow or
>|other, if one helps another gain release from the bondage
>|of maya, he is certainly recognized immediately by the
>|Supreme Personality of Godhead." As Lord Krsna states in
>| the Bhagavad-gita (18.69):
84|na ca tasman manusyesu kascin me priya-krttamah
85|bhavita na ca me tasmad anyah priyataro bhuvi
86|The greatest service one can render to the Lord is
>|to try to infuse devotional service into the heart of the
>|conditioned soul so that the conditioned soul may be
>|released from conditioned life. Srila Bhaktivinoda Thakura
>|has said that a Vaisnava is recognized by his preaching
>|work-that is, by convincing the conditioned soul about his
>|eternal position, which is explained here as nija-dharma.
>|It is the living entity's eternal position to serve the
>|Lord; therefore to help one get release from material
>|bondage is to awaken one to the dormant understanding that
>|he is the eternal servant of Krsna. Jivera 'svarupa' haya-
>|krsnera 'nitya-dasa' [Cc. Madhya 20.108]. This will be
>|further explained by the Lord Himself to Sanatana Gosvami.
87|Madhya 20.7
88|TEXT 7
89|TEXT
90|óÓNõS Õ±¿÷ Îî±÷±õþ LÁ¿õþlþ±¿rà nÂ×óLÁ±õþ h
91|îR¿÷ Õ±÷± rñ¿nÂl' LÁõþ ›¶îRÂIóLÁ±õþ N 7 N
92|purve ami tomara kariyachi upakara
93|tumi ama chadi' kara pratyupakara
94|SYNONYMS
95|purve-formerly; ami-I; tomara-your; kariyachi-have done;
>|upakara-welfare; tumi-you; ama-me; chadi'-releasing; kara-
>|do; prati-upakara-return welfare.
96|TRANSLATION
97|Sanatana Gosvami continued, "Previously I have done much
>|for you. Now I am in difficulty. Please return my goodwill
>|by releasing me.
98|Madhya 20.8
99|TEXT 8
100|TEXT
101|óD±a uýÃÃ¦Ú ÷R^± îR¿÷ LÁõþ Õ/NLÁ±õþ h
102|óRíI, ÕnS,-ðRÃý×Ãà h±t ýÃÃý×ÃÃNõ Îî±÷±õþ N" 8 N
103|panca sahasra mudra tumi kara angikara
104|punya, artha,-dui labha ha-ibe tomara"
105|SYNONYMS
106|panca sahasra-five thousand; mudra-golden coins; tumi-you;
>|kara angikara-please accept; punya-pious activity; artha-
>|material gain; dui labha-two kinds of achievement; ha-ibe-
>|will be; tomara-yours.
107|TRANSLATION
108|"Here are five thousand gold coins. Please accept them. By
>|releasing me, you will receive the results of pious
>|activities and gain material profit as well. Thus you will
>|profit in two ways simultaneously."
109|Madhya 20.9
110|TEXT 9
111|TEXT
112|îÂNõ Îuý×Ãà lõd LÁNýÃÃ,–"qd, ÷ýÃñúlþ h
113|Îî±÷±Nõþ rñ¿nÂlõ, ¿LÁc LÁ¿õþ õþ±æÃtÂlþ N" 9 N
114|tabe sei yavana kahe,-"suna, mahasaya
115|tomare chadiba, kintu kari raja-bhaya"
116|SYNONYMS
117|tabe-thereafter; sei-that; yavana-meat-eater; kahe-says;
>|suna-just hear; mahasaya-my dear sir; tomare-you; chadiba-I
>|would release; kintu-but; kari raja-bhaya-I am afraid of
>|the government.
118|TRANSLATION
119|In this way Sanatana Gosvami convinced the jailkeeper, who
>|replied, "Please hear me, my dear sir. I am willing to
>|release you, but I am afraid of the government."
120|Madhya 20.10–11
121|TEXTS 10–11
122|TEXT
123|ud±îd LÁNýÃÃ,–"îR¿÷ d± LÁõþ õþ±æÃ-tÂlþ h
124|ðÿŽÂí ¿álþ±Nrà l¿ðà ÎhnÂ׿iÂ' Õ±Ýlþlþ N 10 N
125|îD±ýÃñNõþ LÁ¿ýÃÃÝ-Îuý×Ãà õ±ýÃÃILÔÁNîÂI Îáh h
126|á/±õþ ¿dLÁi á/± Îð¿m' sDÁ±ó ¿ðÃh N 11 N
127|sanatana kahe,-"tumi na kara raja-bhaya
128|daksina giyache yadi leuti' aoyaya
129|tanhare kahio-sei bahya-krtye gela
130|gangara nikata ganga dekhi' jhanpa dila
131|SYNONYMS
132|sanatana kahe-Sanatana replied; tumi-you; na-not; kara-do;
>|raja-bhaya-fear of the government; daksina-to the south;
>|giyache-has gone; yadi-if; leuti'-returning; aoyaya-comes;
>|tanhare-to him; kahio-you say; sei-he; bahya-krtye-to
>|evacuate; gela-went; gangara nikata-near the bank of the
>|Ganges; ganga dekhi'-seeing the Ganges; jhanpa dila-jumped.
133|TRANSLATION
134|Sanatana replied, "There is no danger. The Nawab has gone
>|to the south. If he returns, tell him that Sanatana went to
>|pass stool near the bank of the Ganges and that as soon as
>|he saw the Ganges, he jumped in.
135|Madhya 20.12
136|TEXT 12
137|TEXT
138|ÕNdLÁ Îðÿmh, î±õþ h±áA d± ó±ý×ÃÃh h
139|ðñnlÂRLÁ±-u¿ýÃÃî nR¿õ LÁ±ýÃÃD± õ¿ýÃÃ' Îáh N 12 N
140|aneka dekhila, tara lag na paila
141|daduka-sahita dubi kahan vahi' gela
142|SYNONYMS
143|aneka-for a long time; dekhila-I looked; tara-of him; lag-
>|contact; na paila-could not obtain; daduka-sahita-with the
>|shackles; dubi-drowning; kahan-somewhere; vahi' gela-washed
>|away.
144|TRANSLATION
145|"Tell him, 'I looked for him a long time, but I could not
>|find any trace of him. He jumped in with his shackles, and
>|therefore he was drowned and washed away by the waves.'
146|Madhya 20.13
147|TEXT 13
148|TEXT
149|¿LÁrRà tÂlþ d±¿ýÃÃ, Õ±¿÷ Û-ÎðÃNú d± õþõ h
150|ðõþNõú ýÃÃÛž± Õ±¿÷ ÷!Á±NLÁ l±ý×Ãõ N" 13 N
151|kichu bhaya nahi, ami e-dese na raba
152|daravesa hana ami makkake yaiba"
153|SYNONYMS
154|kichu-any; bhaya-fear; nahi-there is not; ami-I; e-dese-in
>|this country; na raba-shall not remain; daravesa hana-
>|becoming a mendicant; ami-I; makkake yaiba-shall go to
>|Mecca.
155|TRANSLATION
156|"There is no reason for you to be afraid, for I shall not
>|remain in this country. I shall become a mendicant and go
>|to the holy city of Mecca."
157|Madhya 20.14
158|TEXT 14
159|TEXT
160|îÂn±¿ó lõd-÷d ›¶ui§ d± Îðÿmh± h
161|u±îÂ-ýÃñæñõþ ÷RA^± î±õþ Õ±Ná õþ±¿ú ÆLÁh± N 14 N
162|tathapi yavana-mana prasanna na dekhila
163|sata-hajara mudra tara age rasi kaila
164|SYNONYMS
165|tathapi-still; yavana-mana-the mind of the meat-eater;
>|prasanna-satisfied; na-not; dekhila-he saw; sata-hajara-
>|seven thousand; mudra-golden coins; tara-of him; age-in
>|front; rasi kaila-made a stack.
166|TRANSLATION
167|Sanatana Gosvami could see that the mind of the meat-eater
>|was still not satisfied. He then stacked seven thousand
>|gold coins before him.
168|Madhya 20.15
169|TEXT 15
170|TEXT
171|Îh±t ýÃÃý×ÃÃh lõNdõþ ÷R^± Îðÿmlþ± h
172|õþ±NS á/±ó±õþ ÆLÁh ðñnlÂRLÁ± LÁ±¿iÂlþ± N 15 N
173|lobha ha-ila yavanera mudra dekhiya
174|ratre ganga-para kaila daduka katiya
175|SYNONYMS
176|lobha ha-ila-there was attraction for the money; yavanera-
>|of the meat-eater; mudra dekhiya-seeing the golden coins;
>|ratre-at night; ganga-para kaila-he got him across the
>|Ganges; daduka-shackles; katiya-breaking.
177|TRANSLATION
178|When the meat-eater saw the coins, he was attracted to them.
>| He then agreed, and that night he cut Sanatana's shackles
>|and let him cross the Ganges.
179|Madhya 20.16
180|TEXT 16
181|TEXT
182|ánÂlZ±õþ-ón rñ¿nÂlh±, d±Nõþ î±ýÃÃD± l±ý×ÃÃNî h
183|õþ±¿S-¿ðd a¿h' Õ±ý×ÃÃh± ó±îÂnÂl±-óõSNî N 16 N
184|gada-dvara-patha chadila, nare tahan yaite
185|ratri-dina cali' aila patada-parvate
186|SYNONYMS
187|gada-dvara-patha-the path of the fortress; chadila-gave up;
>|nare-not able; tahan-there; yaite-to go; ratri-dina-night
>|and day; cali'-walking; aila-arrived; patada-parvate-in the
>|hilly tract of land known as Patada.
188|TRANSLATION
189|In this way, Sanatana Gosvami was released. However, he was
>|not able to walk along the path of the fortress. Walking
>|day and night, he finally arrived at the hilly tract of
>|land known as Patada.
190|Madhya 20.17
191|TEXT 17
192|TEXT
193|îÂn± ÛLÁ ÎtÂN¿÷LÁ ýÃÃlþ, î±õþ 걿۞ Îáh± h
194|'óõSî ó±õþ LÁõþ Õ±÷±'-¿õd¿î LÁ¿õþh± N 17 N
195|tatha eka bhaumika haya, tara thani gela
196|'parvata para kara ama'-vinati karila
197|SYNONYMS
198|tatha-there; eka bhaumika-one landowner; haya-there is;
>|tara thani-unto him; gela-he went; parvata-the hilly tract;
>|para kara-cross over; ama-me; vinati-submission; karila-he
>|made.
199|TRANSLATION
200|After reaching Patada, he met a landholder and submissively
>|requested him to get him across that hilly tract of land.
201|Madhya 20.18
202|TEXT 18
203|TEXT
204|Îuý×Ãà tÓÂÛž±õþ uN/ ýÃÃlþ ýÃñîÂá¿íî± h
205|tÓÂÛž±õþ LÁ±Ní LÁNýÃà Îuý×Ãà æñ¿d' Ûý×Ãà LÁn± N 18 N
206|sei bhunara sange haya hata-ganita
207|bhunara kane kahe sei jani' ei katha
208|SYNONYMS
209|sei bhunara-the landlord; sange-with; haya-there is; hata-
>|ganita-an expert in palmistry; bhunara-of the landlord;
>|kane-in the ear; kahe-says; sei-that man; jani'-knowing; ei
>|katha-this statement.
210|TRANSLATION
211|A man who was expert in palmistry was at that time staying
>|with the landlord. Knowing about Sanatana, he whispered the
>|following in the landlord's ear.
212|Madhya 20.19
213|TEXT 19
214|TEXT
215|'ý×ÃÃýÃñõþ 걿۞ uRõNíSõþ Õ(c)† Î÷±ýÃõþ ýÃÃlþ' h
216|q¿d' Õ±d¿µî tÓÂÛž± ud±îÂNd LÁlþ N 19 N
217|'inhara thani suvarnera asta mohara haya'
218|suni' anandita bhuna sanatane kaya
219|SYNONYMS
220|inhara thani-in the possession of this man; suvarnera-of
>|gold; asta-eight; mohara-coins; haya-there are; suni'-
>|hearing; anandita-pleased; bhuna-the landlord; sanatane-to
>|Sanatana; kaya-says.
221|TRANSLATION
222|The palmist said, "This man Sanatana possesses eight gold
>|coins." Hearing this, the landlord was very pleased and
>|spoke the following to Sanatana Gosvami.
223|Madhya 20.20
224|TEXT 20
225|TEXT
226|"õþ±NSI óõSî ó±õþ LÁ¿õþõ ¿dæÃ-Îh±LÁ ¿ðÃlþ± h
227|Ît±æÃd LÁõþýÃà îR¿÷ õþgd LÁ¿õþlþ± N" 20 N
228|"ratrye parvata para kariba nija-loka diya
229|bhojana karaha tumi randhana kariya"
230|SYNONYMS
231|ratrye-at night; parvata-the hilly tract; para kariba-I
>|shall cross; nija-loka diya-with my own men; bhojana karaha-
>|just take your meal; tumi-you; randhana kariya-cooking.
232|TRANSLATION
233|The landlord said, "I shall get you across that hilly tract
>|at night with my own men. Now just cook for yourself and
>|take your lunch."
234|Madhya 20.21
235|TEXT 21
236|TEXT
237|Ûî õ¿h' Õi§ ¿ðÃh LÁ¿õþlþ± u¥œ±d h
238|ud±îd Õ±¿u' îÂNõ ÆLÁh dðÃN¦§±d N 21 N
239|eta bali' anna dila kariya sammana
240|sanatana asi' tabe kaila nadi-snana
241|SYNONYMS
242|eta bali'-saying this; anna dila-supplied food grain;
>|kariya sammana-showing great respect; sanatana-Sanatana
>|Gosvami; asi'-coming; tabe-then; kaila-did; nadi-snana-
>|bathing in the river.
243|TRANSLATION
244|Saying this, the landlord offered Sanatana grain to cook.
>|Sanatana then went to the riverside and took his bath.
245|Madhya 20.22
246|TEXT 22
247|TEXT
248|ðRÃý×Ãà nÂ×óõ±Nu ÆLÁh± õþgd-Ît±æÃNd h
249|õþ±æÃ÷LaN ud±îd ¿õa±¿õþh± ÷Nd N 22 N
250|dui upavase kaila randhana-bhojane
251|raja-mantri sanatana vicarila mane
252|SYNONYMS
253|dui upavase -fasting for two days; kaila-performed;
>|randhana-bhojane-cooking and eating; raja-mantri-the former
>|minister of the Nawab; sanatana-Sanatana; vicarila-
>|considered; mane-in the mind.
254|TRANSLATION
255|Because Sanatana had been fasting for two days, he cooked
>|the food and ate it. However, having formerly been a
>|minister of the Nawab, he began to contemplate the
>|situation.
256|Madhya 20.23
257|TEXT 23
258|TEXT
259|'Ûý×Ãà tÓÂÛž± ÎLÁNd Î÷±Nõþ u¥œ±d LÁ¿õþh·'
260|Ûî ¿a¿(tm)L' ud±îd Tú±Nd óR¿rh N 23 N
261|'ei bhuna kene more sammana karila?'
262|eta cinti' sanatana isane puchila
263|SYNONYMS
264|ei bhuna-this landlord; kene-why; more-unto me; sammana
>|karila-offered so much respect; eta cinti'-thinking this;
>|sanatana-Sanatana; isane-from Isana, his servant; puchila-
>|inquired.
265|TRANSLATION
266|As a former minister for the Nawab, Sanatana could
>|certainly understand diplomacy. He therefore thought, "Why
>|is this landlord offering me such respect?" Thinking in
>|this way, he questioned his servant, whose name was Isana.
267|Madhya 20.24
268|TEXT 24
269|TEXT
270|'Îî±÷±õþ 걿۞ æñ¿d ¿LÁrRà ^õI Õ±rÃlþ' h
271|Tú±d LÁNýÃÃ,–'Î÷±õþ 걿۞ u±î Î÷±ýÃõþ ýÃÃlþ' N 24 N
272|'tomara thani jani kichu dravya achaya'
273|isana kahe,-'mora thani sata mohara haya'
274|SYNONYMS
275|tomara thani-in your possession; jani-I understand; kichu-
>|some; dravya-valuable thing; achaya-there is; isana kahe-
>|Isana replied; mora thani-in my possession; sata mohara-
>|seven gold coins; haya-there are.
276|TRANSLATION
277|Sanatana asked his servant, "Isana, I think you have some
>|valuable things with you
>|."
278|Isana replied, "Yes, I have seven gold coins."
279|Madhya 20.25
280|TEXT 25
281|TEXT
282|q¿d' ud±îd î±Nõþ LÁ¿õþh± tÂRSud h
283|'uN/ ÎLÁNd Õ±¿dlþ±rà Ûý×Ãà LÁ±h-l÷·' 25 N
284|suni' sanatana tare karila bhartsana
285|'sange kene aniyacha ei kala-yama?'
286|SYNONYMS
287|suni'-hearing; sanatana-Sanatana Gosvami; tare-him; karila
>|bhartsana-chastised; sange-with you; kene-why; aniyacha-
>|have you brought; ei-this; kala-yama-death knell.
288|TRANSLATION
289|Hearing this, Sanatana Gosvami chastised his servant,
>|saying, "Why have you brought this death knell with you?"
290|Madhya 20.26
291|TEXT 26
292|TEXT
293|îÂNõ Îuý×Ãà u±î Î÷±ýÃõþ ýÃÃN(tm)¦Nî LÁ¿õþlþ± h
294|tÓÂÛž±õþ LÁ±Nrà l±Ûž± LÁNýÃà Î÷±ýÃõþ s¿õþlþ± N 26 N
295|tabe sei sata mohara hastete kariya
296|bhunara kache yana kahe mohara dhariya
297|SYNONYMS
298|tabe-thereafter; sei sata mohara-these seven gold coins;
>|hastete kariya-taking in the hands; bhunara kache-to the
>|landlord; yana-going; kahe-says; mohara dhariya-holding the
>|gold coins.
299|TRANSLATION
300|Thereupon, Sanatana Gosvami took the seven gold coins in
>|his hands and went to the landlord. Holding the gold coins
>|before him, he spoke as follows.
301|Madhya 20.27
302|TEXT 27
303|TEXT
304|"Ûý×Ãà u±î uRõíS Î÷±ýÃõþ Õ±¿rh Õ±÷±õþ h
305|ý×ÃÃýÃñ hÛž± s÷S Îðÿm' óõSî LÁõþ ó±õþ N 27 N
306|"ei sata suvarna mohara achila amara
307|iha lana dharma dekhi' parvata kara para
308|SYNONYMS
309|ei sata-these seven; suvarna mohara-golden coins; achila-
>|were; amara-mine; iha lana-accepting them; dharma dekhi'-
>|observing religious principles; parvata-the hilly tract of
>|land; kara para-kindly get me across.
310|TRANSLATION
311|"I have these seven gold coins with me. Please accept them,
>|and from a religious point of view please get me across
>|that hilly tract of land.
312|Madhya 20.28
313|TEXT 28
314|TEXT
315|õþ±æõµN Õ±¿÷, ánÂlZ±õþ l±ý×ÃÃNî d± ó±¿õþ h
316|óRíI ÂýÃÃNõ, óõSî ձ÷± ÎðÃýÃÃ' ó±õþ LÁ¿õþ N" 28 N
317|raja-bandi ami, gada-dvara yaite na pari
318|punya habe, parvata ama deha' para kari"
319|SYNONYMS
320|raja-bandi-a prisoner of the government; ami-I; gada-dvara
>|yaite-to go openly on the road by the ramparts; na pari-I
>|am not able; punya-pious activity; habe-there will be;
>|parvata-the hilly tract of land; ama-to me; deha'-give help;
>| para kari-by crossing over.
321|TRANSLATION
322|"I am a prisoner of the government, and I cannot go along
>|the way of the ramparts. It will be very pious of you to
>|take this money and kindly get me across this hilly tract
>|of land."
323|Madhya 20.29
324|TEXT 29
325|TEXT
326|tÓÂÛž± ýÃñ¿u' LÁNýÃÃ,–"Õ±¿÷ æñ¿dlþ±¿rà ó¿ýÃÃNh h
327|Õ(c)† Î÷±ýÃõþ ýÃÃlþ Îî±÷±õþ ÎuõLÁ-ÕD±aÂNh N 29 N
328|bhuna hasi' kahe,-"ami janiyachi pahile
329|asta mohara haya tomara sevaka-ancale
330|SYNONYMS
331|bhuna-the landlord; hasi'-smiling; kahe-said; ami-I;
>|janiyachi-knew; pahile-before this; asta mohara-eight
>|golden coins; haya-there are; tomara-your; sevaka-ancale-in
>|the pocket of the servant.
332|TRANSLATION
333|Smiling, the landlord said, "Before you offered them, I
>|already knew that there were eight gold coins in your
>|servant's possession.
334|Madhya 20.30
335|TEXT 30
336|TEXT
337|Îî±÷± ÷±¿õþ' Î÷±ýÃõþ hý×ÃÃî±÷ Õ±¿æÃLÁ±õþ õþ±NSI h
338|t±h ÆýÃÃh, LÁ¿ýÃÃh± îR¿÷, rRÿiÂh±† ó±ó ÆýÃÃNî N 30 N
339|toma mari' mohara la-itama ajikara ratrye
340|bhala haila, kahila tumi, chutilana papa haite
341|SYNONYMS
342|toma mari'-killing you; mohara-golden coins; la-itama-I
>|would have taken; ajikara ratrye-on this night; bhala haila-
>|it was very good; kahila tumi-you have spoken; chutilana-I
>|am relieved; papa haite-from such a sin.
343|TRANSLATION
344|"On this very night I would have killed you and taken your
>|coins. It is very good that you have voluntarily offered
>|them to me. I am now relieved from such a sinful activity.
345|Madhya 20.31
346|TEXT 31
347|TEXT
348|uc(c)† ýÃÃý×ÃÃh±† Õ±¿÷, Î÷±ýÃõþ d± hý×Ãõ h
349|óRíI h±¿á' óõSî Îî±÷±' ó±õþ LÁ¿õþ' ¿ðõ N" 31 N
350|santusta ha-ilana ami, mohara na la-iba
351|punya lagi' parvata toma' para kari' diba"
352|SYNONYMS
353|santusta-satisfied; ha-ilana-have become; ami-I; mohara-the
>|golden coins; na la-iba-I shall not take; punya lagi'-
>|simply for pious activity; parvata-the hilly tract of land;
>|toma'-you; para kari' diba-I shall get across.
354|TRANSLATION
355|"I am very satisfied with your behavior. I shall not accept
>|these gold coins, but I shall get you across that hilly
>|tract of land simply to perform a pious activity."
356|Madhya 20.32
357|TEXT 32
358|TEXT
359|Îá±u±¿Ûž LÁNýÃÃ,–"ÎLÁýÃà ^õI hý×ÃÃNõ Õ±÷± ÷±¿õþ' h
360|Õ±÷±õþ ›¶±í õþŽÂ± LÁõþ ^õI Õ/NLÁ¿õþ' N" 32 N
361|gosani kahe,-"keha dravya la-ibe ama mari'
362|amara prana raksa kara dravya angikari'"
363|SYNONYMS
364|gosani kahe-Sanatana Gosvami said; keha-someone else;
>|dravya-the valuable coins; la-ibe-will take; ama mari'-
>|killing me; amara-my; prana-life; raksa kara-save; dravya
>|angikari'-by accepting these coins.
365|TRANSLATION
366|Sanatana Gosvami replied, "If you do not accept these coins,
>| someone else will kill me for them. It is better that you
>|save me from the danger by accepting the coins."
367|Madhya 20.33
368|TEXT 33
369|TEXT
370|îÂNõ tÓÂÛž± Îá±u±¿Ûžõþ uN/ a±¿õþ ó±ý×ÃÃLÁ ¿ðÃh h
371|õþ±NSI õþ±NSI õdóNn óõSî ó±õþ ÆLÁh N 33 N
372|tabe bhuna gosanira sange cari paika dila
373|ratrye ratrye vana-pathe parvata para kaila
374|SYNONYMS
375|tabe-thereupon; bhuna-the landlord; gosanira sange-with
>|Sanatana Gosvami; cari paika-four watchmen; dila-gave;
>|ratrye ratrye-during the whole night; vana-pathe-on the
>|jungle path; parvata-the hilly tract of land; para kaila-
>|took him across.
376|TRANSLATION
377|After this settlement was made, the landlord gave Sanatana
>|Gosvami four watchmen to accompany him. They went through
>|the forest path for the whole night and thus brought him
>|over the hilly tract of land.
378|Madhya 20.34
379|TEXT 34
380|TEXT
381|îÂNõ ó±õþ ýÃÃÛž± Îá±u±¿Ûž óR¿rh± Tú±Nd h
382|"æñ¿d,-Îúø¸ ^õI ¿LÁrRà ձNrà Îî±÷± ¦š±Nd" N 34 N
383|tabe para hana gosani puchila isane
384|"jani,-sesa dravya kichu ache toma sthane"
385|SYNONYMS
386|tabe-thereafter; para hana-after crossing; gosani-Sanatana
>|Gosvami; puchila-asked; isane-Isana; jani-I know; sesa
>|dravya-something valuable left; kichu-some; ache-there is;
>|toma sthane-with you.
387|TRANSLATION
388|After crossing the hills, Sanatana Gosvami told his servant,
>| "Isana, I think you still have some balance left from the
>|gold coins."
389|Madhya 20.35
390|TEXT 35
391|TEXT
392|Tú±d LÁNýÃÃ,–"ÛLÁ Î÷±ýÃõþ Õ±Nrà ÕõNúø¸ h"
393|Îá±u±¿Ûž LÁNýÃÃ,–"Î÷±ýÃõþ hÛž± l±ýÃÃ' îR¿÷ ÎðÃú N" 35 N
394|isana kahe,-"eka mohara ache avasesa"
395|gosani kahe,-"mohara lana yaha' tumi desa"
396|SYNONYMS
397|isana kahe-Isana replied; eka-one; mohara-gold coin; ache-
>|is; avasesa-left; gosani-Sanatana Gosvami; kahe-replied;
>|mohara lana-taking this gold coin; yaha-return; tumi-you;
>|desa-to your country.
398|TRANSLATION
399|Isana replied, "I still have one gold coin in my possession.
>|"
>|
400|Sanatana Gosvami then said, "Take the coin and return to
>|your home."
401|Madhya 20.36
402|TEXT 36
403|TEXT
404|î±Nõþ ¿õðñlþ ¿ðÃlþ± Îá±u±¿Ûž a¿hh± ÛLÁh± h
405|ýÃñNî LÁNõþD±lþ±, ¿rDÃnÂl± LÁ±Lš±, ¿dtSÂlþ ýÃÃý×ÃÃh± N 36
>|N
406|tare vidaya diya gosani calila ekala
407|hate karonya, chinda kantha, nirbhaya ha-ila
408|SYNONYMS
409|tare vidaya diya-bidding him farewell; gosani-Sanatana
>|Gosvami; calila ekala-began to travel alone; hate-in the
>|hand; karonya-a beggar's pot; chinda kantha-a torn quilt;
>|nirbhaya ha-ila-he became free from all anxiety.
410|TRANSLATION
411|After departing from Isana, Sanatana Gosvami began
>|traveling alone with a waterpot in his hand. Simply covered
>|with a torn quilt, he thus lost all his anxiety.
412|Madhya 20.37
413|TEXT 37
414|TEXT
415|a¿h' a¿h' Îá±u±¿Ûž îÂNõ Õ±ý×ÃÃh± ýÃñ¿æóRNõþ h
416|ugI±LÁ±Nh õ¿uh± ÛLÁ nÂ×ðÃI±d-¿tÂîÂNõþ N 37 N
417|cali' cali' gosani tabe aila hajipure
418|sandhya-kale vasila eka udyana-bhitare
419|SYNONYMS
420|cali' cali'-walking and walking; gosani-Sanatana Gosvami;
>|tabe-then; aila-arrived; hajipure-at Hajipura; sandhya-kale-
>|in the evening; vasila-sat down; eka-one; udyana-bhitare-
>|within a garden.
421|TRANSLATION
422|Walking and walking, Sanatana Gosvami finally arrived at a
>|place called Hajipura. That evening he sat down within a
>|garden.
423|Madhya 20.38
424|TEXT 38
425|TEXT
426|Îuý×Ãà ýÃñ¿æóRNõþ õþNýÃÃ-MLÁ±(tm)L î±õþ d±÷ h
427|Îá±u±¿Ûžõþ t¿ádNó¿îÂ, LÁNõþ õþ±æÃLÁ±÷ N 38 N
428|sei hajipure rahe-srikanta tara nama
429|gosanira bhagini-pati, kare raja-kama
430|SYNONYMS
431|sei-that; hajipure-in Hajipura; rahe-there is; srikanta
>|-Srikanta; tara-his; nama-name; gosanira-of Sanatana
>|Gosvami; bhagini-pati-sister's husband; kare-executes; raja-
>|kama-government service.
432|TRANSLATION
433|In Hajipura there was a gentlemen named Srikanta, who
>|happened to be the husband of Sanatana Gosvami's sister. He
>|was engaged there in government service.
434|Madhya 20.39
435|TEXT 39
436|TEXT
437|¿îd hŽÂ ÷R^± õþ±æñ ¿ðÃlþ±Nrà î±õþ ¦š±Nd h
438|Îâ±nÂl± ÷ÓhI hÛž± ó±ê±lþ ó±Ru±õþ ¦š±Nd N 39 N
439|tina laksa mudra raja diyache tara sthane
440|ghoda mulya lana pathaya patsara sthane
441|SYNONYMS
442|tina laksa-300,000; mudra-golden coins; raja-the king or
>|nawab; diyache-has given; tara sthane-in his custody; ghoda-
>|of horses; mulya lana-taking the price; pathaya-sends;
>|patsara sthane-to the care of the emperor.
443|TRANSLATION
444|Srikanta had 300,000 gold coins with him, which had been
>|given to him by the emperor for the purchase of horses.
>|Thus Srikanta was buying horses and dispatching them to the
>|emperor.
445|Madhya 20.40
446|TEXT 40
447|TEXT
448|iR¿/ nÂ×óõþ õ¿u' Îuý×Ãà Îá±u±¿ÛžNõþ Îð¿mh h
449|õþ±NSI ÛLÁæÃd-uN/ Îá±u±¿Ûž-ó±ú Õ±ý×ÃÃh N 40 N
450|tungi upara vasi' sei gosanire dekhila
451|ratrye eka-jana-sange gosani-pasa aila
452|SYNONYMS
453|tungi upara vasi'-sitting in an elevated place; sei-that
>|Srikanta; gosanire-Sanatana Gosvami; dekhila-saw; ratrye-at
>|night; eka-jana-sange-with a servant; gosani-pasa-near
>|Sanatana Gosvami; aila-he came.
454|TRANSLATION
455|When Srikanta was sitting in an elevated place, he could
>|see Sanatana Gosvami. That night he took a servant and went
>|to see Sanatana Gosvami.
456|Madhya 20.41
457|TEXT 41
458|TEXT
459|ðRÃý×ÃÃæÃd ¿÷¿h' îÂn± ý×ÃÃ(c)†N᱇ÂN ÆLÁh h
460|õgd-Î÷±ŽÂí-LÁn± Îá±u±¿Ûž uLÁ¿h LÁ¿ýÃÃh N 41 N
461|dui-jana mili' tatha ista-gosthi kaila
462|bandhana-moksana-katha gosani sakali kahila
463|SYNONYMS
464|dui-jana mili'-meeting together; tatha-there; ista-gosthi-
>|various types of conversation; kaila-did; bandhana-moksana-
>|of the arrest and release; katha-the story; gosani-Sanatana
>|Gosvami; sakali-everything; kahila-narrated.
465|TRANSLATION
466|When they met, they had many conversations. Sanatana
>|Gosvami told him in detail about his arrest and release.
467|Madhya 20.42
468|TEXT 42
469|TEXT
470|ÎîDÂNýÃñ LÁNýÃÃ,–"¿ðÃd-ðRÃý×Ãà õþýÃà Ûý×Ãæš±Nd h
471|tÂ^ ýÃÃÝ, rñnÂl' Ûý×Ãà ÷¿hd õuNd N" 42 N
472|tenho kahe,-"dina-dui raha ei-sthane
473|bhadra hao, chada' ei malina vasane"
474|SYNONYMS
475|tenho kahe-he said; dina-dui-at least for two days; raha-
>|stay; ei-sthane-in this place; bhadra hao-become like a
>|gentleman in appearance; chada'-give up; ei-this; malina-
>|dirty; vasane-dress.
476|TRANSLATION
477|Srikanta then told Sanatana Gosvami, "Stay here for at
>|least two days and dress up like a gentleman. Abandon these
>|dirty garments."
478|Madhya 20.43
479|TEXT 43
480|TEXT
481|Îá±u±¿Ûž LÁNýÃÃ, – " ÛL ÁŽÂí ý×ÃÃýÃñ
>|d ± õþ¿ýÃõ h
482|á/± ó±õþ LÁ¿õþ' ÎðÃýÃÃ', ÛŽÂNí a¿hõ N" 43 N
483|gosani kahe,-"eka-ksana iha na rahiba
484|ganga para kari' deha' e-ksane caliba"
485|SYNONYMS
486|gosani kahe-Sanatana Gosvami said; eka-ksana-even for one
>|moment; iha-here; na rahiba-I shall not stay; ganga para
>|kari' deha'-help me cross the river Ganges; e-ksane-
>|immediately; caliba-I shall go.
487|TRANSLATION
488|Sanatana Gosvami replied, "I shall not stay here even for a
>|moment. Please help me cross the Ganges. I shall leave
>|immediately."
489|Madhya 20.44
490|TEXT 44
491|TEXT
492|lP LÁ¿õþ' ÎîDÂNýÃñ ÛLÁ Ît±iÂLÁ¥¤h ¿ðÃh h
493|á/± ó±õþ LÁ¿õþ' ¿ðÃh-Îá±u±¿Ûž a¿hh N 44 N
494|yatna kari' tenho eka bhota-kambala dila
495|ganga para kari' dila-gosani calila
496|SYNONYMS
497|yatna kari'-with great care; tenho-he (Srikanta); eka-one;
>|bhota-kambala -woolen blanket; dila-gave; ganga para
>|kari' dila-got him across the River Ganges; gosani calila-
>|Sanatana Gosvami departed.
498|TRANSLATION
499|With great care, Srikanta gave him a woolen blanket and
>|helped him cross the Ganges. Thus Sanatana Gosvami departed
>|again.
500|Madhya 20.45
501|TEXT 45
502|TEXT
503|îÂNõ õ±õþ±íuN Îá±u±¿Ûž Õ±ý×ÃÃh± LÁî¿ðÃNd h
504|q¿d Õ±d¿µî ýÃÃý×ÃÃh± ›¶tRÂõþ Õ±á÷Nd N 45 N
505|tabe varanasi gosani aila kata-dine
506|suni anandita ha-ila prabhura agamane
507|SYNONYMS
508|tabe-in this way; varanasi-to Varanasi; gosani-Sanatana
>|Gosvami; aila-came; kata-dine-after a few days; suni-
>|hearing; anandita-very pleased; ha-ila-he became; prabhura-
>|of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; agamane-about the arrival.
509|TRANSLATION
510|After a few days, Sanatana Gosvami arrived at Varanasi. He
>|was very pleased to hear about Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu's
>|arrival there.
511|Madhya 20.46
512|TEXT 46
513|TEXT
514|aÂfNúmNõþõþ âNõþ Õ±¿u' Z±NõþNî õ¿uh± h
515|÷ýÃñ›¶tR æñ¿d' aÂfNúmNõþ LÁ¿ýÃÃh± N 46 N
516|candrasekharera ghare asi' dvarete vasila
517|mahaprabhu jani' candrasekhare kahila
518|SYNONYMS
519|candrasekharera ghare-to the house of Candrasekhara; asi'-
>|going; dvarete-at the door; vasila-sat down; mahaprabhu-Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu; jani'-knowing; candrasekhare-to
>|Candrasekhara; kahila-said.
520|TRANSLATION
521|Sanatana Gosvami then went to the house of Candrasekhara
>|and sat down by the door. Understanding what was happening,
>|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu spoke to Candrasekhara.
522|Madhya 20.47
523|TEXT 47
524|TEXT
525|'Z±Nõþ ÛLÁ ' Æõøžõ' ýÃÃlþ, Îõ±h±ýÃ
>|à îD±ýÃñNõþ' h
526|aÂfNúmõþ ÎðÃNm-'Æõøžõ' d±¿ýÃÃLÁ Z±Nõþ N 47 N
527|'dvare eka 'vaisnava' haya, bolaha tanhare'
528|candrasekhara dekhe-'vaisnava' nahika dvare
529|SYNONYMS
530|dvare-at your door; eka vaisnava-one Vaisnava devotee; haya-
>|there is; bolaha tanhai-e-please call him; candrasekhara-
>|Candrasekhara; dekhe-sees; vaisnava-a devotee; nahika-there
>|is not; dvare-at the door.
531|TRANSLATION
532|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu said, "There is a devotee at your
>|door. Please call him in." Going outside, Candrasekhara
>|could not see a Vaisnava at his door.
533|Madhya 20.48
534|TEXT 48
535|TEXT
536|'Z±NõþNî Æõøžõ d±¿ýÃÃ'-›¶tRÂNõþ LÁ¿ýÃÃh h
537|'ÎLÁýÃà ýÃÃlþ' LÁ¿õþ' ›¶tR î±ýÃñNõþ óR¿rh N 48 N
538|'dvarete vaisnava nahi'-prabhure kahila
539|'keha haya' kari' prabhu tahare puchila
540|SYNONYMS
541|dvarete-at my door; vaisnava nahi-there is no Vaisnava;
>|prabhure kahila-he informed Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; keha
>|haya-is there anyone; kari'-in this way; prabhu-Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu; tahare puchila-inquired from him.
542|TRANSLATION
543|When Candrasekhara informed the Lord that no Vaisnava was
>|at his door, the Lord asked him, "Is there anyone at all
>| at your door?"
544|Madhya 20.49
545|TEXT 49
546|TEXT
547|ÎîDÂNýÃñ LÁNýÃÃ,–ÛLÁ 'ðõþNõú' Õ±Nrà Z±Nõþ h
548|'îÂD±Nõþ Õ±d' ›¶tRÂõþ õ±NLÁI LÁ¿ýÃÃh îD±ýÃñNõþ N 49 N
549|tenho kahe,-eka 'daravesa' ache dvare
550|'tanre ana' prabhura vakye kahila tanhare
551|SYNONYMS
552|tenho kahe-he replied; eka daravesa-one Muslim mendicant;
>|ache-there is; dvare-at the door; tanre ana-bring him;
>|prabhura-of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; vakye-the order;
>|kahila-said; tanhare-unto him.
553|TRANSLATION
554|Candrasekhara replied, "There is a Muslim mendicant."
>|
>|
>|
555|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu immediately said, "Please bring him
>|here." Candrasekhara then spoke to Sanatana Gosvami, who
>|was still sitting beside the door.
556|Madhya 20.50
557|TEXT 50
558|TEXT
559|'›¶tR Îî±÷±lþ Îõ±h±lþ, Õ±ý×ÃÃu, ðõþNõú¯'
560|q¿d' Õ±dNµ ud±îd LÁ¿õþh± ›¶Nõú N 50 N
561|'prabhu tomaya bolaya, aisa, daravesa!'
562|suni' anande sanatana karila pravesa
563|SYNONYMS
564|prabhu-Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; tomaya-unto you; bolaya-
>|calls; aisa-come here; daravesa-O Muslim mendicant; suni'-
>|hearing; anande-in great pleasure; sanatana-Sanatana
>|Gosvami; karila pravesa-entered.
565|TRANSLATION
566|"O Muslim mendicant, please come in. The Lord is calling
>|you." Sanatana Gosvami was very pleased to hear this order,
>|and he entered Candrasekhara's house.
567|Madhya 20.51
568|TEXT 51
569|TEXT
570|îD±ýÃñNõþ Õ/Nd Îðÿm' ›¶tR s±Ûž± Õ±ý×ÃÃh± h
571|îD±Nõþ Õ±¿h/d LÁ¿õþ' Λ¶÷±¿õ(c)† ÆýÃÃh± N 51 N
572|tanhare angane dekhi' prabhu dhana aila
573|tanre alingana kari' premavista haila
574|SYNONYMS
575|tanhare-him; angane-in the courtyard; dekhi'-seeing; prabhu-
>|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; dhana aila-came to see him with
>|great haste; tanre-him; alingana kari'-embracing; prema-
>|avista haila-became overwhelmed with ecstatic love.
576|TRANSLATION
577|As soon as Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu saw Sanatana Gosvami in
>|the courtyard, He immediately went up to him with great
>|haste. After embracing him, the Lord was overwhelmed with
>|ecstatic love.
578|Madhya 20.52
579|TEXT 52
580|TEXT
581|›¶tRA¦óNúS Λ¶÷±¿õ(c)† ýÃÃý×ÃÃh± ud±îd h
582|'Î÷±Nõþ d± rRDÃý×ÃÃýÃÃ'-LÁNýÃà áðAáðÃ-õaÂd N 52 N
583|prabhu-sparse premavista ha-ila sanatana
584|'more na chuniha'-kahe gadgada-vacana
585|SYNONYMS
586|prabhu-sparse-by the touch of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu;
>|prema-avista-overwhelmed with ecstatic love; ha-ila-became;
>|sanatana-Sanatana Gosvami; more-me; na-do not; chuniha-
>|touch; kahe-says; gadgada-vacana-in a faltering voice.
587|TRANSLATION
588|As soon as Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu touched Sanatana Gosvami,
>| Sanatana was also overwhelmed with ecstatic love. In a
>|faltering voice, he said, "O my Lord, do not touch me."
589|Madhya 20.53
590|TEXT 53
591|TEXT
592|ðRÃý×ÃÃæÃNd Âáh±á¿h Îõþ±ðÃd Õó±õþ h
593|Îðÿm' aÂfNúmNõþõþ ýÃÃý×ÃÃh aÂ÷RLÁ±õþ N 53 N
594|dui-jane galagali rodana apara
595|dekhi' candrasekharera ha-ila camatkara
596|SYNONYMS
597|dui-jane-the two persons; galagali-shoulder to shoulder;
>|rodana-crying; apara-unlimited; dekhi'-seeing;
>|candrasekharera-of Candrasekhara; ha-ila-there was;
>|camatkara-astonishment.
598|TRANSLATION
599|Shoulder to shoulder, Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu and Sanatana
>|Gosvami began to cry unlimitedly. Candrasekhara was very
>|much astonished to see this.
600|Madhya 20.54
601|TEXT 54
602|TEXT
603|îÂNõ ›¶tR îD±õþ ýÃñî s¿õþ' hÛž± Îáh± h
604|¿óG±õþ nÂ×óNõþ Õ±ód-ó±Nú õu±ý×ÃÃh± N 54 N
605|tabe prabhu tanra hata dhari' lana gela
606|pindara upare apana-pase vasaila
607|SYNONYMS
608|tabe-thereafter; prabhu-Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; tanra-of
>|Sanatana Gosvami; hata dhari'-catching the hand; lana gela-
>|took him inside; pindara upare-on an elevated place; apana-
>|pase-near Him; vasaila-made Sanatana Gosvami sit down.
609|TRANSLATION
610|Catching his hand, Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu took Sanatana
>|Gosvami inside and made him sit on an elevated place next
>|to Him.
611|Madhya 20.55
612|TEXT 55
613|TEXT
614|MýÃÃN(tm)¦ LÁNõþd îD±õþ Õ/ u¥œ±æSd h
615|ÎîDÂNýÃñ LÁNýÃÃ,–'Î÷±Nõþ, ›¶tRÂ, d± LÁõþ ¦óúSd' N 55 N
616|sri-haste karena tanra anga sammarjana
617|tenho kahe,-'more, prabhu, na kara sparsana'
618|SYNONYMS
619|sri-haste-by the spiritual hand; karena-does; tanra anga-of
>|his body; sammarjana-cleansing; tenho kahe-he said; more-me;
>| prabhu-my Lord; na kara sparsana-do not touch.
620|TRANSLATION
621|When Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu began cleansing Sanatana
>|Gosvami's body with His own transcendental hand, Sanatana
>|Gosvami said, "O my Lord, please do not touch me."
622|Madhya 20.56
623|TEXT 56
624|TEXT
625|›¶tR LÁNýÃÃ,–"Îî±÷± ¦ó¿úS Õ±R ó¿õ¿SNî h
626|t¿MÃ-õNh ó±õþ îR¿÷ õrpÁ±G Îú±¿sNî N 56 N
627|prabhu kahe,-"toma sparsi atma pavitrite
628|bhakti-bale para tumi brahmanda sodhite
629|SYNONYMS
630|prabhu kahe-Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu replied; toma sparsi-I
>|touch you; atma pavitrite-to purify Myself; bhakti-bale-the
>|strength of your devotional service; para-are able; tumi-
>|you; brahmanda-the whole universe; sodhite-to purify.
631|TRANSLATION
632|The Lord replied, "I am touching you just to purify Myself,
>|because by the force of your devotional service you can
>|purify the whole universe.
633|Madhya 20.57
634|TEXT 57
635|TEXT
636|tõ¿Zs± t±áõî±(tm)¦NnStÓÂî±Р¦¤lþS ›¶Nt± h
637|îÂNn¹LRÁõS¿(tm)L îÂNnS±¿d ¦¤±(tm)LÐN¦šd áðñtÔÂî± N 57 N
638|bhavad-vidha bhagavatas
639| tirtha-bhutah svayam prabho
640|tirthi-kurvanti tirthani
641| svantah-sthena gada-bhrta
642|SYNONYMS
643|bhavat-vidhah-like you; bhagavatah-advanced devotees;
>|tirtha-bhutah-personified holy places of pilgrimage; svayam-
>|personally; prabho-my lord; tirthi-kurvanti-make into holy
>|places; tirthani-all the holy places of pilgrimage; sva-
>|antah-sthena-situated within their hearts; gada-bhrta-by
>|Lord Visnu, who carries a club.
644|TRANSLATION
645|"'Saints of your caliber are themselves places of
>|pilgrimage. Because of their purity, they are constant
>|companions of the Lord, and therefore they can purify even
>|the places of pilgrimage.'
646|PURPORT
647|This verse was spoken by Maharaja Yudhisthira to Vidura in
>|Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.13.10). Vidura was returning home
>|after visiting sacred places of pilgrimage, and Maharaja
>|Yudhisthira was receiving his saintly uncle. In essence,
>|Maharaja Yudhisthira was saying, "My dear Lord Vidura, you
>|yourself are a holy place because you are an advanced
>|devotee. People like you always carry Lord Visnu in their
>|hearts. You can revitalize all holy places after they have
>|been polluted by the pilgrimages of sinners."
648|A sinful person goes to a holy place of pilgrimage to be
>|purified. In a holy place, there are many saintly people
>|and temples of Lord Visnu; however, the holy place becomes
>|infected with the sins of many visitors. When an advanced
>|devotee goes to a holy place, he counteracts all the sins
>|of the pilgrims. Therefore Maharaja Yudhisthira addressed
>|Vidura in this way.
649|Since an advanced devotee carries Lord Visnu within his
>|heart, he is a moving temple and a moving Visnu. An
>|advanced devotee does not need to go to holy places, for
>|wherever he stays is a holy place. In this connection,
>|Narottama dasa Thakura states, tirtha-yatra parisrama,
>|kevala manera bhrama: visiting holy places is simply
>|another type of bewilderment. Since an advanced devotee
>|does not need to go to a holy place, why does he go? The
>|answer is that he goes simply to purify the place.
650|Madhya 20.58
651|TEXT 58
652|TEXT
653|d Î÷•ÃÃtÂMÃ(îRÂNõSðN ÷3/4ÃMÃÐ «óa¿›¶lþÐ h
654|îÂͦœ ÎðÃlþS îÂNî± ¢¶±ýÃÃIS u a óÓNæÃI± ln± ýÃÃIýÃÃ÷A N
>|58 N
655|na me 'bhaktas catur-vedi
656| mad-bhaktah sva-pacah priyah
657|tasmai deyam tato grahyam
658| sa ca pujyo yatha hy aham
659|SYNONYMS
660|na-not; me-My; abhaktah-devoid of pure devotional service;
>|catuh-vedi-a scholar in the four Vedas; mat-bhaktah-My
>|devotee; sva-pacah-even from a family of dog-eaters; priyah-
>|very dear; tasmai-to him (a pure devotee, even though born
>|in a very low family); deyam-should be given; tatah-from
>|him; grahyam-should be accepted (remnants of food); sah-
>|that person; ca-also; pujyah-worshipable; yatha-as much as;
>|hi-certainly; aham-I.
661|TRANSLATION
662|"[Lord Krsna said:] 'Even though a person is a very learned
>|scholar of the Sanskrit Vedic literatures, he is not
>|accepted as My devotee unless he is pure in devotional
>|service. However, even though a person is born in a family
>|of dog-eaters, he is very dear to Me if he is a pure
>|devotee who has no motive to enjoy fruitive activity or
>|mental speculation. Indeed, all respects should be given to
>|him, and whatever he offers should be accepted. Such
>|devotees are as worshipable as I am.'
663|PURPORT
664|This verse is included in the Hari-bhakti-vilasa (10.127),
>|compiled by Sanatana Gosvami.
665|Madhya 20.59
666|TEXT 59
667|TEXT
668|¿õ›¶±ðAÿZø¸nÂlA &í lRî ± ðõ þ
>|¿õµd±tÂ-
669|ó±ðñõþ¿õµ¿õ÷Rm±R «óaÂS õ¿õþ‡Â÷A h
670|÷NdI îÂðÿóSîÂ-÷Nd±õaÂNd¿ýÃÃî±nS-
671|›¶±íS óRd±¿î u LRÁhS d îR tÓ¿õþ÷±dÐ N 59 N
672|viprad dvi-sad-guna-yutad aravinda-nabha-
673| padaravinda-vimukhat sva-pacam varistham
674|manye tad-arpita-mano-vacanehitartha-
675| pranam punati sa kulam na tu bhuri-manah
676|SYNONYMS
677|viprat-than a brahmana; dvi-sat-guna-yutat-who is qualified
>|with twelve brahminical qualifications; aravinda-nabha-of
>|Lord Visnu, who has a lotuslike navel; pada-aravinda-unto
>|the lotus feet; vimukhat-than a person bereft of devotion;
>|sva-pacam-a candala, or a person accustomed to eating dogs;
>|varistham-more glorified; manye-I think; tat-arpita-
>|dedicated unto Him; manah-mind; vacana-words; ihita-
>|activities; artha-wealth; pranam-life; punati-purifies; sah-
>|he; kulam-his family; na tu-but not; bhuri-manah-a brahmana
>|proud of possessing such qualities.
678|TRANSLATION
679|"'One may be born in a brahmana family and have all twelve
>|brahminical qualities, but if he is not devoted to the
>|lotus feet of Lord Krsna, who has a navel shaped like a
>|lotus, he is not as good as a candala who has dedicated his
>|mind, words, activities, wealth and life to the service of
>|the Lord. Simply to take birth in a brahmana family or to
>|have brahminical qualities is not sufficient. One must
>|become a pure devotee of the Lord. If a sva-paca or candala
>|is a devotee, he delivers not only himself but his whole
>|family, whereas a brahmana who is not a devotee but simply
>|has brahminical qualifications cannot even purify himself,
>|what to speak of his family.' "
680|PURPORT
681|This verse is spoken by Prahlada Maharaja in Srimad-
>|Bhagavatam (7.9.10). A brahmana is supposed to be qualified
>|with twelve qualities. As stated in the Mahabharata:
682|dharmas ca satyam ca damas tapas ca
683| amatsaryam hris titiksanasuya
684|yajnas ca danam ca dhrtih srutam ca
685| vratani vai dvadasa brahmanasya
686|"A brahmana must be perfectly religious. He must be
>|truthful, and he must be able to control his senses. He
>|must execute severe austerities, and he must be detached,
>|humble and tolerant. He must not envy anyone, and he must
>|be expert in performing sacrifices and giving whatever he
>|has in charity. He must be fixed in devotional service and
>|expert in the knowledge of the Vedas. These are the twelve
>|qualifications for a brahmana."
687|The Bhagavad-gita (18.42) describes the brahminical
>|qualities in this way:
688|samo damas tapah saucam ksantir arjavam eva ca
689|jnanam vijnanam astikyam brahma -karma svabhava-jam
690|"Peacefulness, self-control, austerity , purity,
>|tolerance, honesty, knowledge, wisdom and religiousness-
>|these are the natural qualities by which the brahmanas work.
>|"
691|In the Muktaphala-tika, it is said:
692|samo damas tapah saucam ksanty-arjava-viraktayah
693|jnana-vijnana- santosah satyastikye dvi-sad gunah
694|"Mental equilibrium, sense control, austerity, cleanliness,
>|tolerance, simplicity, detachment, theoretical and
>|practical knowledge, satisfaction, truthfulness and firm
>|faith in the Vedas are the twelve qualities of a brahmana."
695|Madhya 20.60
696|TEXT 60
697|TEXT
698|Îî±÷± Îðÿm, Îî±÷± ¦ó¿úS, á±ý×Ãà Îî±÷±õþ &í h
699|uNõS¿flþ-ôÂh,-Ûý×Ãà ú±¦a-¿dõþ+óí N 60 N
700|toma dekhi, toma sparsi, gai tomara guna
701|sarvendriya-phala,-ei sastra-nirupana
702|SYNONYMS
703|toma dekhi-by seeing you; toma sparsi-by touching you; gai
>|tomara guna-by praising your transcendental qualities;
>|sarva-indriya-phala-the fulfillment of the activities of
>|all the senses; ei-this; sastra-nirupana-the verdict of the
>|revealed scriptures.
704|TRANSLATION
705|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu continued, "By seeing you, by
>|touching you and by glorifying your transcendental
>|qualities, one can perfect the purpose of all sense
>|activity. This is the verdict of the revealed scriptures.
706|PURPORT
707|This is confirmed in the following verse from the Hari-
>|bhakti-sudhodaya (13.2).
708|Madhya 20.61
709|TEXT 61
710|TEXT
711|ÕNŽ(r)±РôÂhS Q±ðÔÃú-ðÃúSdS ¿ýÃÃ
712|îÂNd±Ð ôÂhS Q±ðÔÃú-á±Su/Ð h
713|¿æÃý3Ãñ-ôÂhS Q±ðÔÃú-LÁNîSÂdS ¿ýÃÃ
714|uRðRÃhSt± t±áõî± ¿ýÃà Îh±NLÁ N 61 N
715|aksnoh phalam tvadrsa-darsanam hi
716| tanoh phalam tvadrsa-gatra-sangah
717|jihva-phalam tvadrsa-kirtanam hi
718| su-durlabha bhagavata hi loke
719|SYNONYMS
720|aksnoh-of the eyes; phalam-the perfect result of the action;
>| tvadrsa -a person like you; darsanam-to see; hi-
>|certainly; tanoh-of the body; phalam-the perfection of
>|activities; tvadrsa -of a person like you; gatra-
>|sangah-touching the body; jihva-phalam-the perfection of
>|the tongue; tvadrsa -a person like you; kirtanam-
>|glorifying; hi-certainly; su-durlabhah-very rare;
>|bhagavatah-pure devotees of the Lord; hi-certainly; loke-in
>|this world.
721|TRANSLATION
722|"'My dear Vaisnava, seeing a person like you is the
>|perfection of one's eyesight , touching your lotus feet is
>|the perfection of the sense of touch , and glorifying your
>|good qualities is the tongue's real activity, for in the
>|material world it is very difficult to find a pure devotee
>|of the Lord.' "
723|Madhya 20.62
724|TEXT 62
725|TEXT
726|Ûî LÁ¿ýÃà LÁNýÃà ›¶tRÂ,-"qd, ud±îd h
727|LÔÁøž-õnÂl ðÃlþ±÷lþ, ó¿îÂîÂ-ó±õd N 62 N
728|eta kahi kahe prabhu,-"suna, sanatana
729|krsna-bada dayamaya, patita-pavana
730|SYNONYMS
731|eta kahi-saying this; kahe-continued to speak; prabhu-Lord
>|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; suna-please hear; sanatana-My dear
>|Sanatana; krsna-Lord Krsna; bada-very much; daya-maya-
>|merciful; patita-pavana-deliverer of the fallen souls.
732|TRANSLATION
733|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu continued, "My dear Sanatana,
>|please hear from Me. Krsna is very merciful, and He is the
>|deliverer of all fallen souls.
734|Madhya 20.63
735|TEXT 63
736|TEXT
737|÷ýÃñ-ÎõþNõþõ ÆýÃÃNî Îî±÷± LÁ¿õþh± nÂ×X±õþ h
738|LÔÁó±õþ u÷R^ LÔÁøž áyNõþ Õó±õþ N" 63 N
739|maha-raurava haite toma karila uddhara
740|krpara samudra krsna gambhira apara"
741|SYNONYMS
742|maha-raurava haite-from the deepest hellish condition of
>|life; toma-you; karila uddhara-has delivered; krpara
>|samudra-the ocean of mercy; krsna-Krsna; gambhira-very
>|grave; apara-unlimitedly.
743|TRANSLATION
744|"My dear Sanatana, Krsna has saved you from Maharaurava,
>|life's deepest hell. He is an ocean of mercy, and His
>|activities are very grave."
745|PURPORT
746|As stated in the Bhagavad-gita (18.61), isvarah sarva-
>|bhutanam hrd-dese 'rjuna tisthati. Staying within everyone'
>|s heart, Lord Krsna works very gravely. No one can
>|understand how He is working, but as soon as the Lord
>|understands the sincere activity of a person in devotional
>|service, He helps him in such a way that the devotee cannot
>|understand how things are happening. If the devotee is
>|determined to serve the Lord, the Lord is always prepared
>|to help him (dadami buddhi-yogam tam yena mam upayanti te).
>|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu is telling Sanatana Gosvami how
>|merciful the Lord is. Sanatana Gosvami was a minister in
>|the service of Nawab Hussain Shah. He was always mixing
>|with materially inclined people, particularly with
>|Muslims, meat-eaters. Although he was in intimate touch
>|with them, by Krsna's mercy he came to find such
>|association distasteful. Therefore he left them. As stated
>|by Srinivasa Acarya , tyaktva turnam asesa- mandala -
>|pati-srenim sada tuccha-vat. Krsna enlightened Sanatana
>|Gosvami in such a way that he was able to give up his
>|exalted post as minister. Thinking his material position
>|insignificant, Sanatana was prepared to become a mendicant.
>|Appreciating the activities of Sanatana Gosvami, Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu praised his action and thanked Krsna
>|for His mercy upon him.
747|Madhya 20.64
748|TEXT 64
749|TEXT
750|ud±îd LÁNýÃÃ,–'LÔÁøž Õ±¿÷ d±¿ýÃà æñ¿d h
751|Õ±÷±õþ nÂ×X±õþ-ÎýÃÃîR Îî±÷±õþ LÔÁó± ÷±¿d N' 64 N
752|sanatana kahe,-'krsna ami nahi jani
753|amara uddhara-hetu tomara krpa mani '
754|SYNONYMS
755|sanatana kahe-Sanatana Gosvami said; krsna-Lord Krsna; ami-
>|I; nahi jani-do not know; amara-my; uddhara-hetu-the cause
>|of release; tomara-Your; krpa-mercy; mani-I accept.
756|TRANSLATION
757|Sanatana replied, "I do not know who Krsna is. As far as I
>|am concerned, I have been released from prison only by Your
>|mercy."
758|Madhya 20.65
759|TEXT 65
760|TEXT
761|'ÎLÁ÷Nd rRÿiÂh±' õ¿h ›¶tR ›¶Ÿ ÆLÁh± h
762|Õ±NðÃI±ó±(tm)L uõ LÁn± ÎîDÂNýÃñ qd±ý×ÃÃh± N 65 N
763|'kemane chutila' bali prabhu prasna kaila
764|adyopanta saba katha tenho sunaila
765|SYNONYMS
766|kemane chutila-how were you released; bali-saying; prabhu-
>|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; prasna kaila-inquired; adya-upanta-
>|from beginning to the end; saba-all; katha-the narration;
>|tenho-he; sunaila-described.
767|TRANSLATION
768|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu then asked Sanatana Gosvami, "How
>|were you released from prison?" Sanatana then described the
>|story from beginning to end.
769|Madhya 20.66
770|TEXT 66
771|TEXT
772|›¶tR ÂLÁNýÃÃ,–"Îî±÷±õþ ðRÃý×ÃÃt±ý×Ãà ›¶lþ±Ná ¿÷¿hh± h
773|õþ+ó, ÕdRó÷-ðRDÃNýÃÃ õÔµ±õd Îáh±" N 66 N
774|prabhu kahe,-"tomara dui-bhai prayage milila
775|rupa, anupama-dunhe vrndavana gela"
776|SYNONYMS
777|prabhu kahe-Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu said; tomara-your; dui-
>|bhai-two brothers; prayage milila-met Me at Prayaga; rupa-
>|Rupa Gosvami; anupama-his brother Anupama; dunhe-both of
>|them; vrndavana gela-have gone to Vrndavana.
778|TRANSLATION
779|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu said, "I met your two brothers,
>|Rupa and Anupama, at Prayaga. They have now gone to
>|Vrndavana."
780|Madhya 20.67
781|TEXT 67
782|TEXT
783|îód¿÷N|Nõþ Õ±õþ aÂfNúmNõþNõþ h
784|›¶tRÂ-Õ±:±lþ ud±îd ¿÷¿hh± ÎðDñýÃñNõþ N 67 N
785|tapana-misrere ara candrasekharere
786|prabhu-ajnaya sanatana milila donhare
787|SYNONYMS
788|tapana-misrere-unto Tapana Misra; ara-and; candrasekharere-
>|unto Candrasekhara; prabhu-ajnaya-by the order of Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu; sanatana-Sanatana; milila-met; donhare-
>|both of them.
789|TRANSLATION
790|By the order of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, Sanatana Gosvami
>|met both Tapana Misra and Candrasekhara.
791|Madhya 20.68
792|TEXT 68
793|TEXT
794|îód¿÷| îÂNõ îD±Nõþ ÆLÁh± ¿d÷Laí h
795|›¶tR LÁNýÃÃ,–'ÎŽÂNõþ LÁõþ±ýÃÃ, l±ýÃÃ, ud±îd N' 68 N
796|tapana-misra tabe tanre kaila nimantrana
797|prabhu kahe,-'ksaura karaha, yaha, sanatana'
798|SYNONYMS
799|tapana-misra-Tapana Misra; tabe-then; tanre-unto him (
>|Sanatana Gosvami); kaila-made; nimantrana-invitation;
>|prabhu kahe-Caitanya Mahaprabhu said; ksaura karaha-get
>|shaved; yaha-go; sanatana-My dear Sanatana.
800|TRANSLATION
801|Tapana Misra then extended an invitation to Sanatana, and
>|Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu asked Sanatana to go get a shave.
802|Madhya 20.69
803|TEXT 69
804|TEXT
805|aÂfNúmNõþNõþþ ›¶tR LÁNýÃà Îõ±h±Ûž± h
806|'Ûý×Ãà Îõø¸ ðÓõþ LÁõþ, l±ýÃà ý×DÃÃýÃñNõþ hÛž±' N 69 N
807|candrasekharere prabhu kahe bolana
808|'ei vesa dura kara, yaha inhare lana'
809|SYNONYMS
810|candrasekharere-unto Candrasekhara; prabhu kahe-Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu said; bolana-calling; ei vesa-this kind
>|of dress; dura kara-take away; yaha-go; inhare lana-taking
>|him with you.
811|TRANSLATION
812|After this, Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu called Candrasekhara
>|and asked him to take Sanatana Gosvami with him. He also
>|asked him to take away Sanatana's present dress.
813|Madhya 20.70
814|TEXT 70
815|TEXT
816|tÂ^ LÁõþ±Ûž± îD±Nõþ á/±¦§±d LÁõþ±ý×ÃÃh h
817|Îúmõþ Õ±¿dlþ± îD±Nõþ dÓîd õ¦a ¿ðÃh N 70 N
818|bhadra karana tanre ganga-snana karaila
819|sekhara aniya tanre nutana vastra dila
820|SYNONYMS
821|bhadra karana-making gentle; tanre-him; ganga-snana-bathing
>|in the Ganges; karaila-caused to do; sekhara-Candrasekhara;
>|aniya-bringing; tanre-to him; nutana-new; vastra-clothing;
>|dila-delivered.
822|TRANSLATION
823|Candrasekhara then made Sanatana Gosvami look like a
>|gentleman. He took him to bathe in the Ganges, and
>|afterwards he brought him a new set of clothes.
824|PURPORT
825|The words bhadra karana are significant in this verse. Due
>|to his long hair, mustache and beard, Sanatana Gosvami
>|looked like a daravesa, or hippie. Since Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu did not like Sanatana Gosvami's hippie features,
>|he immediately asked Candrasekhara to get him shaved clean.
>|If anyone with long hair or a beard wants to join this
>|Krsna consciousness movement and live with us, he must
>|similarly shave himself clean. The followers of Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu consider long hair objectionable
>|
>|
>|
>|.
826|Sanatana Gosvami was saved from a hellish condition (
>|Maharaurava) by the grace of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu.
>|Maharaurava is a hell wherein animal killers are placed. In
>|this regard, refer to Srimad-Bhagavatam (5.26.10–12).
827|Madhya 20.71
828|TEXT 71
829|TEXT
830|Îuý×Ãà õ¦a ud±îd d± ÆLÁh Õ/NLÁ±õþ h
831|q¿dlþ± ›¶tRÂõþ ÷Nd Õ±dµ Õó±õþ N 71 N
832|sei vastra sanatana na kaila angikara
833|suniya prabhura mane ananda apara
834|SYNONYMS
835|sei vastra-that new dress; sanatana-Sanatana Gosvami; na
>|kaila-did not; angikara-accept; suniya-hearing; prabhura-of
>|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; mane-in the mind; ananda apara-
>|unlimited happiness.
836|TRANSLATION
837|Candrasekhara offered a new set of garments to Sanatana
>|Gosvami, but Sanatana did not accept them. When Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu heard news of this, He became
>|unlimitedly happy.
838|Madhya 20.72
839|TEXT 72
840|TEXT
841|÷sI±ý LÁ¿õþlþ± ›¶tR Îáh± ¿tŽ± LÁ¿õþõ±Nõþ h
842|ud±îÂNd hÛž± Îáh± îód¿÷N|õþ ÂâNõþ N 72 N
843|madhyahna kariya prabhu gela bhiksa karibare
844|sanatane lana gela tapana-misrera ghare
845|SYNONYMS
846|madhyahna kariya-finishing bathing at noon; prabhu-Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu; gela-went; bhiksa karibare-to accept
>|lunch; sanatane-Sanatana Gosvami; lana-taking; gela-went;
>|tapana-misrera ghare-to the house of Tapana Misra.
847|TRANSLATION
848|After bathing at noon, Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu went to the
>|house of Tapana Misra for lunch. He took Sanatana Gosvami
>|with Him.
849|Madhya 20.73
850|TEXT 73
851|TEXT
852|ó±ðÛ¶ŽÂ±hd LÁ¿õþ' ¿tŽ±Nî õ¿uh± h
853|'ud±îÂNd ¿tŽ± ÎðÃýÃÃ'–¿÷N|Nõþ LÁ¿ýÃÃh± N 73 N
854|pada-praksalana kari' bhiksate vasila
855|'sanatane bhiksa deha'-misrere kahila
856|SYNONYMS
857|pada-praksalana-washing the feet; kari'-doing; bhiksate-to
>|lunch; vasila-sat down; sanatane bhiksa deha-give Sanatana
>|lunch also; misrere kahila-He asked Tapana Misra.
858|TRANSLATION
859|After washing His feet, Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu sat down
>|for lunch. He asked Tapana Misra to supply Sanatana Gosvami
>|lunch also.
860|Madhya 20.74
861|TEXT 74
862|TEXT
863|¿÷| LÁNýÃÃ,–'ud±îÂNdõþ ¿LÁrRà LÔÁîÂI Õ±Nrà h
864|îR¿÷ ¿tŽ± LÁõþ, ›¶u±ðà îD±Nõþ ¿ðõ ó±Nrà N' 74 N
865|misra kahe,-'sanatanera kichu krtya ache
866|tumi bhiksa kara, prasada tanre diba pache'
867|SYNONYMS
868|misra kahe-Tapana Misra said; sanatanera-of Sanatana
>|Gosvami; kichu-some; krtya-duty; ache-there is; tumi bhiksa
>|kara-You take Your lunch; prasada-the remnants of Your food;
>| tanre-unto him; diba-I shall deliver; pache-at the end.
869|TRANSLATION
870|Tapana Misra then said, "Sanatana has some duty to perform;
>|therefore he cannot accept lunch now. At the conclusion of
>|the meal, I shall supply Sanatana with some remnants."
871|Madhya 20.75
872|TEXT 75
873|TEXT
874|¿tŽ± LÁ¿õþ' ÷ýÃñ›¶tR ¿õ|±÷ LÁ¿õþh h
875|¿÷| ›¶tRÂõþ Îúø¸ó±S ud±îÂNd ¿ðÃh N 75 N
876|bhiksa kari' mahaprabhu visrama karila
877|misra prabhura sesa-patra sanatane dila
878|SYNONYMS
879|bhiksa kari'-after taking His lunch; mahaprabhu-Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu; visrama karila-took rest; misra-Tapana
>|Misra; prabhura-of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; sesa-patra-the
>|plate of remnants; sanatane dila-delivered to Sanatana.
880|TRANSLATION
881|After eating, Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu took rest for a while.
>| Tapana Misra then gave Sanatana Gosvami the remnants of
>|food left by Caitanya Mahaprabhu.
882|Madhya 20.76
883|TEXT 76
884|TEXT
885|¿÷| ud±îÂNd ¿ðÃh± dÓîd õud h
886|õ¦a d±¿ýÃà ¿dh±, ÎîDÂNýÃñ ÆLÁh ¿dNõðÃd N 76 N
887|misra sanatane dila nutana vasana
888|vastra nahi nila, tenho kaila nivedana
889|SYNONYMS
890|misra-Tapana Misra; sanatane-unto Sanatana; dila-delivered;
>|nutana vasana-new cloth; vastra-the cloth; nahi nila-he did
>|not accept; tenho-he; kaila-made; nivedana-submission.
891|TRANSLATION
892|When Tapana Misra offered Sanatana Gosvami a new cloth, he
>|did not accept it. Instead, he spoke as follows.
893|Madhya 20.77
894|TEXT 77
895|TEXT
896|"Î÷±Nõþ õ¦a ¿ðÃNî l¿ðà Îî±÷±õþ ýÃÃlþ ÷d h
897|¿dæà ó¿õþs±d ÛLÁ ÎðÃýÃÃ' óRõþ±îd N" 77 N
898|"more vastra dite yadi tomara haya mana
899|nija paridhana eka deha' puratana"
900|SYNONYMS
901|more-unto me; vastra dite-to offer cloth; yadi-if; tomara-
>|your; haya-there is; mana-mind; nija-own; paridhana-cloth;
>|eka-one; deha'-give; puratana-old.
902|TRANSLATION
903|"If you want to give me some cloth according to your desire,
>| please give me an old cloth you have used."
904|Madhya 20.78
905|TEXT 78
906|TEXT
907|îÂNõ ¿÷| óRõþ±îd ÛLÁ sR¿î ¿ðÃh h
908|ÎîDÂNýÃñ ðÃRý×Ãà õ¿ýÃõS±u-ÎLÁNóNd LÁ¿õþh N 78 N
909|tabe misra puratana eka dhuti dila
910|tenho dui bahirvasa-kaupina karila
911|SYNONYMS
912|tabe-thereafter; misra-Tapana Misra; puratana-old; eka-one;
>|dhuti-dhoti; dila-delivered; tenho-he (Sanatana Gosvami);
>|dui-two; bahirvasa-outer coverings; kaupina-underwear;
>|karila-made.
913|TRANSLATION
914|When Tapana Misra gave Sanatana Gosvami a used dhoti,
>|Sanatana immediately tore it into pieces to make two sets
>|of outer cloth and underwear.
915|Madhya 20.79
916|TEXT 79
917|TEXT
918|÷ýÃñõþ±(c)†ªNlþ ¿ZNæà ›¶tR ¿÷h±ý×ÃÃh± ud±îÂNd h
919|Îuý×Ãà ¿õ›¶ îD±Nõþ ÆLÁh ÷ýÃñ-¿d÷LaNí N 79 N
920|maharastriya dvije prabhu milaila sanatane
921|sei vipra tanre kaila maha-nimantrane
922|SYNONYMS
923|maharastriya -from Maharashtra; dvije-the brahmana;
>| prabhu-Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; milaila-introduced;
>|sanatane-unto Sanatana Gosvami; sei-that; vipra-brahmana;
>|tanre-unto him; kaila-did; maha-full; nimantrane-invitation.
924|TRANSLATION
925|When Caitanya Mahaprabhu introduced the Maharashtrian
>|brahmana to Sanatana, the brahmana immediately invited
>|Sanatana Gosvami for full meals.
926|Madhya 20.80
927|TEXT 80
928|TEXT
929|"ud±îd, îR¿÷ l±õR LÁ±úNNî õþ¿ýõ± h
930|î±õR Õ±÷±õþ âNõþ ¿tŽ± Îl LÁ¿õþõ± N" 80 N
931|"sanatana, tumi yavat kasite rahiba
932|tavat amara ghare bhiksa ye kariba"
933|SYNONYMS
934|sanatana-O Sanatana; tumi-you; yavat-as long as; kasite-in
>|Benares; rahiba-will remain; tavat-so long; amara-my; ghare-
>|at the home; bhiksa-lunch; ye-that; kariba-please accept.
935|TRANSLATION
936|The brahmana said, "My dear Sanatana, as long as you remain
>|at Kasi, please accept lunch at my place."
937|Madhya 20.81
938|TEXT 81
939|TEXT
940|ud±îd LÁNýÃÃ,–"Õ±¿÷ ÷±sRLÁõþN LÁ¿õþõ h
941|õr±pÁNíõþ âNõþ ÎLÁNd ÛLÁS ¿tŽ± hõ·" 81 N
942|sanatana kahe,-"ami madhukari kariba
943|brahmanera ghare kene ekatra bhiksa laba?"
944|SYNONYMS
945|sanatana kahe-Sanatana replied; ami-I; madhukari kariba-
>|shall practice acceptance of food by madhukari means;
>|brahmanera ghare-in the house of a brahmana; kene-why;
>|ekatra-in one place; bhiksa laba-I should accept lunch.
946|TRANSLATION
947|Sanatana replied, "I shall practice the process of
>|madhukari. Why should I accept full meals in the house of a
>|brahmana?"
948|PURPORT
949|The word madhukari comes from the word madhukara, which
>|refers to bees collecting honey from flower to flower. A
>|madhukari is a saintly person or a mendicant who does not
>|accept a full meal at one house but begs from door to door,
>|taking a little food from each householder's place. In this
>|way he does not overeat or give householders unnecessary
>|trouble. A person in the renounced order may beg but not
>|cook. His begging should not be a burden for the
>|householders. The madhukari process is strictly to be
>|followed by a babaji, that is, one who has attained the
>|paramahamsa stage. This practice is still current in
>|Vrndavana, and there are many places where alms are offered.
>| Unfortunately, there are many beggars who have come to
>|Vrndavana to accept alms but not follow the principles of
>|Sanatana Gosvami. People try to imitate him and lead an
>|idle life by practicing madhukari. It is almost impossible
>|to strictly follow Sanatana Gosvami or Rupa Gosvami. It is
>|better to accept food offered to Krsna in the temple than
>|to try to imitate Sanatana Gosvami and Rupa Gosvami.
950|yuktahara-viharasya yukta-cestasya karmasu
951|yukta-svapnavabodhasya yogo bhavati duhkha-ha
952|"He who is regulated in his habits of
>|eating, sleeping, recreation and work can mitigate all
>|material pains by practicing the yoga system." (Bg. 6.17)
953|The ideal sannyasi strictly follows the ways practiced by
>|the Gosvamis.
954|Madhya 20.82
955|TEXT 82
956|TEXT
957|ud±îÂNdõþ Æõõþ±NáI ›¶tRÂõþ Õ±dµ Õó±õþ h
958|Ît±iÂLÁ¥¤h ó±Nd ›¶tR a±NýÃà õ±Nõþ õ±õþ N 82 N
959|sanatanera vairagye prabhura ananda apara
960|bhota-kambala pane prabhu cahe bare bara
961|SYNONYMS
962|sanatanera-of Sanatana Gosvami; vairagye-by the
>|renunciation; prabhura-of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; ananda-
>|happiness; apara-unlimited; bhota-kambala-the woolen
>|blanket; pane-towards; prabhu-Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; cahe-
>|looks; bare bara-repeatedly.
963|TRANSLATION
964|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu felt unlimited happiness to observe
>|Sanatana Gosvami's strict following of the principles of
>|sannyasa. However, He repeatedly glanced at the woolen
>|blanket Sanatana Gosvami was wearing.
965|Madhya 20.83
966|TEXT 83
967|TEXT
968|ud±îd æñ¿dh Ûý×Ãà ›¶tRAÂNõþ d± t±lþ h
969|Ît±i îÂI±á LÁ¿õþõ±Nõþ ¿a¿(tm)Lh± nÂ×ó±lþ N 83 N
970|sanatana janila ei prabhure na bhaya
971|bhota tyaga karibare cintila upaya
972|SYNONYMS
973|sanatana janila-Sanatana Gosvami could understand; ei-this;
>|prabhure-by Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; na bhaya-is not
>|approved; bhota-the woolen blanket; tyaga-giving up;
>|karibare-to do; cintila-considered; upaya-a means.
974|TRANSLATION
975|Because Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu was repeatedly glancing at
>|this valuable woolen blanket, Sanatana Gosvami could
>|understand that the Lord did not approve of it. He then
>|began to consider a way to give it up.
976|Madhya 20.84
977|TEXT 84
978|TEXT
979|Ûî ¿a¿(tm)L' Îáh± á/±lþ ÷sI±ý LÁ¿õþNî h
980|ÛLÁ ÎáN¿nÂllþ± LÁ±Lš± sRÛž± ¿ðÃlþ±Nrà qLÁ±ý×ÃÃNî N 84 N
981|eta cinti' gela gangaya madhyahna karite
982|eka gaudiya kantha dhuna diyache sukaite
983|SYNONYMS
984|eta cinti'-thinking this; gela-went; gangaya-to the bank of
>|the Ganges; madhyahna-bathing at noon; karite-to do; eka-
>|one; gaudiya-Bengali Vaisnava; kantha-quilt; dhuna-washing;
>|diyache-spread out; sukaite-to dry.
985|TRANSLATION
986|Thinking in this way, Sanatana went to the bank of the
>|Ganges to bathe. While there, he saw that a mendicant from
>|Bengal had washed his quilt and spread it out to dry.
987|Madhya 20.85
988|TEXT 85
989|TEXT
990|î±Nõþ LÁNýÃÃ,–"ÝNõþ t±ý×ÃÃ, LÁõþ nÂ×óLÁ±Nõþ h
991|Ûý×Ãà Ît±i hÛž± Ûý×Ãà LDÁ±n± ÎðÃýÃÃ' Î÷±Nõþ N" 85 N
992|tare kahe,-"ore bhai, kara upakare
993|ei bhota lana ei kantha deha' more"
994|SYNONYMS
995|tare kahe-he said to him; ore bhai-O my brother; kara
>|upakare-kindly do a favor; ei bhota-this woolen blanket;
>|lana-taking; ei-this; kantha-quilt; deha'-give; more-to me.
996|TRANSLATION
997|Sanatana Gosvami then told the Bengali mendicant, "My dear
>|brother, please do me a favor. Trade me your quilt for this
>|woolen blanket."
998|Madhya 20.86
999|TEXT 86
1000|TEXT
1001|Îuý×Ãà LÁNýÃÃ,–"õþýÃÃuI LÁõþ ›¶±÷±¿íLÁ ýÃÃÛž±·
1002|õU÷ÓhI Ît±i ¿ðõ± ÎLÁd LDÁ±n± hÛž±·" 86 N
1003|sei kahe,-"rahasya kara pramanika hana?
1004|bahu-mulya bhota diba kena kantha lana?"
1005|SYNONYMS
1006|sei kahe-he said; rahasya-joking; kara-you do; pramanika
>|hana-although being a man of authority; bahu-mulya-very
>|valuable; bhota-woolen blanket; diba-you would give; kena-
>|why; kantha lana-taking this quilt.
1007|TRANSLATION
1008|The mendicant replied, "Sir, you are a respectable
>|gentleman. Why are you joking with me? Why would you trade
>|your valuable blanket for my torn quilt?"
1009|Madhya 20.87
1010|TEXT 87
1011|TEXT
1012|ÎîDÂNýÃñ LÁNýÃÃ,–"õþýÃÃuI dNýÃÃ, LÁ¿ýÃà uîÂIõ±íN h
1013|Ît±i hýÃÃ, îÂR¿÷ ÎðÃýÃÃ' Î÷±Nõþ LÁD±n±m±¿d N" 87 N
1014|tenho kahe,-"rahasya nahe, kahi satya-vani
1015|bhota laha, tumi deha' more kantha-khani"
1016|SYNONYMS
1017|tenho kahe-he said; rahasya nahe-there is no joking; kahi
>|satya-vani-I am speaking the truth; bhota laha-take this
>|blanket; tumi-you; deha'-give; more-to me; kantha-khani-the
>|quilt.
1018|TRANSLATION
1019|Sanatana said, "I am not joking; I am speaking the truth.
>|Kindly take this blanket in exchange for your torn quilt."
1020|Madhya 20.88
1021|TEXT 88
1022|TEXT
1023|Ûî õ¿h' LDÁ±n± hý×ÃÃh, Ît±i îD±Nõþ ¿ðÃlþ± h
1024|Îá±u±¿Ûžõþ êÂD±ý×Ãà ձý×ÃÃh± LDÁ±n± áNh ¿ðÃlþ± N 88 N
1025|eta bali' kantha la-ila, bhota tanre diya
1026|gosanira thani aila kantha gale diya
1027|SYNONYMS
1028|eta bali'-saying this; kantha la-ila-he took the quilt;
>|bhota-the blanket; tanre-unto him; diya-giving; gosanira
>|thani-to Caitanya Mahaprabhu; aila-returned; kantha-quilt;
>|gale-onto the shoulder; diya-keeping.
1029|TRANSLATION
1030|Saying this, Sanatana Gosvami exchanged the blanket for the
>|quilt. He then returned to Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu with the
>|quilt on his shoulder.
1031|Madhya 20.89
1032|TEXT 89
1033|TEXT
1034|›¶tR LÁNýÃÃ,–'Îî±÷±õþ Ît±iÂLÁ¥¤h ÎLÁ±n± Îáh·'
1035|›¶tRÂóNðà uõ LÁn± Îá±u±¿Ûž LÁ¿ýÃÃh N 89 N
1036|prabhu kahe,-'tomara bhota-kambala kotha gela?'
1037|prabhu-pade saba katha gosani kahila
1038|SYNONYMS
1039|prabhu kahe-Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu said; tomara-your;
>|bhota-kambala-woolen blanket; kotha gela-where did it go;
>|prabhu-pade-unto the lotus feet of Lord Caitanya; saba-all;
>|katha-narration; gosani-Sanatana Gosvami; kahila-said.
1040|TRANSLATION
1041|When Sanatana Gosvami returned, the Lord asked, "Where is
>|your woolen blanket?" Sanatana Gosvami then narrated the
>|whole story to the Lord.
1042|Madhya 20.90–91
1043|TEXTS 90–91
1044|TEXT
1045|›¶tR LÁNýÃÃ,–"ý×ÃÃýÃñ Õ±¿÷ LÁ¿õþlþ±¿rà ¿õa±õþ h
1046|¿õø¸lþ-Îõþ±á mG±ý×ÃÃh LÔÁøž Îl Îî±÷±õþ N 90 N
1047|Îu ÎLÁNd õþ±¿mNõ Îî±÷±õþ Îúø¸ ¿õø¸lþ-Ît±á·
1048|Îõþ±á m¿G' uÍZðÃI d± õþ±Nm Îúø¸ Îõþ±á N 91 N
1049|prabhu kahe,-"iha ami kariyachi vicara
1050|visaya-roga khandaila krsna ye tomara
1051|se kene rakhibe tomara sesa visaya-bhoga?
1052|roga khandi' sad-vaidya na rakhe sesa roga
1053|SYNONYMS
1054|prabhu kahe-Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu said; iha-this; ami-I;
>|kariyachi vicara-considered deliberately; visaya-roga-the
>|disease of material attraction; khandaila-has now nullified;
>| krsna-Lord Krsna; ye-since; tomara-your; se-Lord Krsna;
>|kene-why; rakhibe-should allow you to keep; tomara-your;
>|sesa-last; visaya-bhoga-attraction for material things;
>|roga khandi'-vanquishing the disease; sat-vaidya-a good
>|physician; na rakhe-does not keep; sesa-the last part; roga-
>|disease.
1055|TRANSLATION
1056|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu then said, "I have already
>|deliberately considered this matter. Since Lord Krsna is
>|very merciful, He has nullified your attachment for
>|material things. Why should Krsna allow you to maintain a
>|last bit of material attachment? After vanquishing a
>|disease, a good physician does not allow any of the disease
>|to remain.
1057|Madhya 20.92
1058|TEXT 92
1059|TEXT
1060|¿îd ÷R^±õþ Ît±i á±lþ, ÷±sRLÁõþN ¢¶±u h
1061|s÷SýÃñ¿d ýÃÃlþ, Îh±LÁ LÁNõþ nÂ×óýÃñu N" 92 N
1062|tina mudrara bhota gaya, madhukari grasa
1063|dharma-hani haya, loka kare upahasa"
1064|SYNONYMS
1065|tina mudrara bhota-a woolen blanket costing three gold
>|coins; gaya-on the body; madhukari grasa-and practicing the
>|madhukari system; dharma-hani haya-that is a religious
>|discrepancy; loka kare upahasa-people will joke.
1066|TRANSLATION
1067|"It is contradictory to practice madhukari and at the same
>|time wear a valuable blanket. One loses his spiritual
>|strength by doing this, and one will also become an object
>|of jokes."
1068|Madhya 20.93
1069|TEXT 93
1070|TEXT
1071|Îá±u±¿Ûž LÁNýÃÃ, – " Î l m¿Gh LRÁ¿
>|õø¸lþ- Ît±á h
1072|îD±õþ ý×ÃÃ26ñlþ Îáh Î÷±õþ Îúø¸ ¿õø¸lþ-Îõþ±á N" 93 N
1073|gosani kahe,-"ye khandila kuvisaya-bhoga
1074|tanra icchaya gela mora sesa visaya-roga"
1075|SYNONYMS
1076|gosani kahe-Sanatana Gosvami said; ye khandila-the person
>|who has vanquished; ku-visaya-bhoga-enjoyment of sinful
>|material life; tanra icchaya-by His desire; gela-has gone;
>|mora-my; sesa-last bit; visaya-roga-material disease.
1077|TRANSLATION
1078|Sanatana Gosvami replied, "The Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead has saved me from the sinful life of material
>|existence. By His desire, my last piece of material
>|attraction is now gone."
1079|Madhya 20.94
1080|TEXT 94
1081|TEXT
1082|›¶ui§ ýÃÃÛž± ›¶tR îÂD±Nõþ LÔÁó± ÆLÁh h
1083|îÂD±õþ LÔÁó±lþ ›¶Ÿ LÁ¿õþNî îD±õþ ú¿Mà ÆýÃÃh N 94 N
1084|prasanna hana prabhu tanre krpa kaila
1085|tanra krpaya prasna karite tanra sakti haila
1086|SYNONYMS
1087|prasanna hana-being very pleased; prabhu-Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu; tanre-unto him; krpa kaila-offered His
>|causeless mercy; tanra krpaya-by His mercy; prasna karite-
>|to inquire; tanra-his; sakti haila-there was strength.
1088|TRANSLATION
1089|Being pleased with Sanatana Gosvami, Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu bestowed His causeless mercy upon him. By the
>|Lord's mercy, Sanatana Gosvami received the spiritual
>|strength to inquire from Him.
1090|Madhya 20.95–96
1091|TEXTS 95–96
1092|TEXT
1093|óÓNõS ÆlNrà õþ±lþ-ó±Nú ›¶tR ›¶Ÿ ÆLÁh± h
1094|îD±õþ úNMÃI õþ±÷±dµ îD±õþ nÂ×MÃõþ ¿ðÃh± N 95 N
1095|ý×ÃÃýÃÃD± ›¶tRÂõþ úNMÃI ›¶Ÿ LÁNõþ ud±îd h
1096|Õ±óNd ÷ýÃñ›¶tR LÁNõþ 'îÂN'-¿dõþ+óí N 96 N
1097|purve yaiche raya-pase prabhu prasna kaila
1098|tanra saktye ramananda tanra uttara dila
1099|ihan prabhura saktye prasna kare sanatana
1100|apane mahaprabhu kare 'tattva'-nirupana
1101|SYNONYMS
1102|purve-formerly; yaiche-as; raya-pase-unto Ramananda Raya;
>|prabhu-Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; prasna kaila-inquired;
>|tanra saktye-only by His mercy; ramananda-Ramananda Raya;
>|tanra-his; uttara-answers; dila-gave; ihan-here; prabhura-
>|of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; saktye-by the strength; prasna-
>|questions; kare-puts; sanatana-Sanatana Gosvami; apane-
>|personally; mahaprabhu-Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; kare-does;
>|tattva-the truth; nirupana-discerning.
1103|TRANSLATION
1104|Formerly, Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu had asked Ramananda Raya
>|spiritual questions, and by the Lord's causeless mercy,
>|Ramananda Raya could properly reply. Now, by the Lord's
>|mercy, Sanatana Gosvami questioned the Lord, and Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu personally supplied the truth.
1105|Madhya 20.97
1106|TEXT 97
1107|TEXT
1108|LÔÁøž¦¤õþ+ó÷±sRÍlS«lSt¿Mõþu±|lþ÷A h
1109|îÂNS ud±îd±NlþúÐ LÔÁóNlþ±ó¿ðÃNðÃú uÐ N 97 N
1110|krsna-svarupa-madhuryais-
1111| varya-bhakti-rasasrayam
1112|tattvam sanatanayesah
1113| krpayopadidesa sah
1114|SYNONYMS
1115|krsna-svarupa-of the real identity of Sri Krsna; madhurya-
>|of conjugal love; aisvarya-of opulence; bhakti-of
>|devotional service; rasa-of transcendental mellows; asrayam-
>|the shelter; tattvam-the truth; sanatanaya-unto Sri
>|Sanatana; isah-Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, the Supreme Lord;
>|krpaya-by His causeless mercy; upadidesa-instructed; sah-He.
1116|TRANSLATION
1117|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
>| personally told Sanatana Gosvami about Lord Krsna's real
>|identity. He also told him about the Lord's conjugal love,
>|His personal opulence and the mellows of devotional service.
>| All these truths were explained to Sanatana Gosvami by the
>|Lord Himself out of His causeless mercy.
1118|Madhya 20.98
1119|TEXT 98
1120|TEXT
1121|îÂNõ ud±îd ›¶tRÂõþ aõþNí s¿õþlþ± h
1122|ÆðÃdI ¿õd¿î LÁNõþ ðÃN(tm)L îÔÂí hÛž± N 98 N
1123|tabe sanatana prabhura carane dhariya
1124|dainya vinati kare dante trna lana
1125|SYNONYMS
1126|tabe-thereafter; sanatana-Sanatana Gosvami; prabhura-of Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu; carane-the lotus feet; dhariya-
>|catching; dainya-humility; vinati-bowing; kare-does; dante-
>|in the teeth; trna-a straw; lana-taking.
1127|TRANSLATION
1128|Putting a straw in his mouth and bowing down, Sanatana
>|Gosvami clasped the lotus feet of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu
>|and humbly spoke as follows.
1129|Madhya 20.99
1130|TEXT 99
1131|TEXT
1132|"dNa æñ¿îÂ, dNaÂ-u/N, ó¿îÂî Õs÷ h
1133|LRÁ¿õø¸lþ-LÓÁNó ó¿nÂl' Î᱆±ý×ÃÃdR æÃd÷¯N 99 N
1134|"nica jati, nica-sangi, patita adhama
1135|kuvisaya-kupe padi' gonainu janama!
1136|SYNONYMS
1137|nica jati-born of a low family; nica-sangi-associated with
>|low men; patita-fallen; adhama-the lowest; ku-visaya-kupe-
>|in a well of material enjoyment; padi'-having fallen down;
>|gonainu-I have passed; janama-my life.
1138|TRANSLATION
1139|Sanatana Gosvami said, "I was born in a low family, and my
>|associates are all low-class men. I myself am fallen and am
>|the lowest of men. Indeed, I have passed my whole life
>|fallen in the well of sinful materialism.
1140|PURPORT
1141|Actually Sri Sanatana Gosvami belonged to a brahmana family
>|because he belonged to the Sarasvata division of the
>|brahmanas and was well cultured and well educated. Somehow
>|or other he accepted a ministership in the Muslim
>|government; therefore he had to associate with meat-eaters,
>|drunkards and gross materialists. Sanatana Gosvami
>|considered himself fallen, for in the association of such
>|men, he also fell victim to material enjoyment. Having
>|passed his life in that way, he considered that he had
>|wasted his valuable time. This statement about how one can
>|become fallen in this material world is made by the
>|greatest authority in the Gaudiya Vaisnava-sampradaya.
>|Actually the whole world is presently fallen into material
>|existence. Everyone is a meat-eater, drunkard, woman-hunter,
>| gambler and whatnot. People are enjoying material life by
>|committing the four basic sins. Although they are fallen,
>|if they simply submit themselves at the lotus feet of Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu, they will be saved from sinful
>|reactions.
1142|Madhya 20.100
1143|TEXT 100
1144|TEXT
1145|Õ±ód±õþ ¿ýÃÃýÃÃî ¿LÁrRÃý×Ãà d± æñ¿d¯
1146|¢¶±÷I-õIõýÃñNõþ ó¿GîÂ, î±ý×Ãà uîÂI ÷±¿d N 100 N
1147|apanara hitahita kichui na jani!
1148|gramya-vyavahare pandita, tai satya mani
1149|SYNONYMS
1150|apanara-of my personal self; hita-welfare; ahita-
>|inauspiciousness; kichui-anything; na jani-I do not know;
>|gramya-vyavahare-in ordinary dealings; pandita-a learned
>|man; tai satya mani-I accept that as truth.
1151|TRANSLATION
1152|"I do not know what is beneficial for me or what is
>|detrimental. Nonetheless, in ordinary dealings people
>|consider me a learned scholar, and I am also thinking of
>|myself as such.
1153|Madhya 20.101
1154|TEXT 101
1155|TEXT
1156|LÔÁó± LÁ¿õþ' l¿ðà Î÷±Nõþ LÁ¿õþlþ±rà nÂ×X±õþ h
1157|Õ±ód-LÔÁó±Nî LÁýÃà 'LÁîSõI' Õ±÷±õþ N 101 N
1158|krpa kari' yadi more kariyacha uddhara
1159|apana-krpate kaha 'kartavya' amara
1160|SYNONYMS
1161|krpa kari'-by Your causeless mercy; yadi-if; more-unto me;
>|kariyacha-You have done; uddhara-deliverance; apana-krpate-
>|by Your own mercy; kaha-please speak; kartavya amara-my
>|duty.
1162|TRANSLATION
1163|"Out of Your causeless mercy, You have delivered me from
>|the materialistic path. Now, by the same causeless mercy,
>|please tell me what my duty is.
1164|Madhya 20.102
1165|TEXT 102
1166|TEXT
1167|'ÎLÁ Õ±¿÷,' 'ÎLÁNd Õ±÷±lþ æñNõþ î±óSlþ' h
1168|ý×ÃÃýÃñ d±¿ýÃà æñ¿d–'ÎLÁ÷Nd ¿ýÃÃî ýÃÃlþ' N 102 N
1169|'ke ami', 'kene amaya jare tapa-traya'
1170|iha nahi jani-'kemane hita haya'
1171|SYNONYMS
1172|ke ami-who am I; kene-why; amaya-unto me; jare-give trouble;
>| tapa-traya-the three kinds of miserable conditions; iha-
>|this; nahi jani-I do not know; kemane-how; hita-my welfare;
>|haya-there is.
1173|TRANSLATION
1174|"Who am I? Why do the threefold miseries always give me
>|trouble? If I do not know this, how can I be benefited?
1175|PURPORT
1176|The threefold material miseries are miseries arising from
>|the body and the mind, miseries arising from dealings with
>|other living entities, and miseries arising from natural
>|disturbances. Sometimes we suffer bodily when we are
>|attacked by a fever, and sometimes we suffer mentally when
>|a close relative dies. Other living entities also cause us
>|misery. There are living entities born of the human embryo,
>|of eggs, perspiration and vegetation. Miserable conditions
>|brought about by natural catastrophes are controlled by the
>|higher demigods. There may be severe cold or thunderbolts,
>|or a person may be haunted by ghosts. These threefold
>|miseries are always before us, and they entrap us in a
>|dangerous situation. Padam padam yad vipadam [SB 10.14.58].
>|There is danger in every step of life.
1177|Madhya 20.103
1178|TEXT 103
1179|TEXT
1180|'u±sI'-'u±sd'-îÂN óR¿rNî d± æñ¿d h
1181|LÔÁó± LÁ¿õþ' uõ îÂN LÁýÃà îÂ' Õ±ó¿d N" 103 N
1182|'sadhya'-'sadhana'-tattva puchite na jani
1183|krpa kari' saba tattva kaha ta' apani"
1184|SYNONYMS
1185|sadhya-of the goal of spiritual life; sadhana-of the
>|process of obtaining that goal; tattva-truth; puchite-to
>|inquire; na jani-I do not know; krpa kari'-by Your
>|causeless mercy; saba tattva-all such truths; kaha ta'
>|apani-please personally explain to me.
1186|TRANSLATION
1187|"Actually I do not know how to inquire about the goal of
>|life and the process for obtaining it. Being merciful upon
>|me, please explain all these truths."
1188|Madhya 20.104
1189|TEXT 104
1190|TEXT
1191|›¶tR LÁNýÃÃ,–"LÔÁøž-LÔÁó± Îî±÷±Nî óÓíS ýÃÃlþ h
1192|uõ îÂN æñd, Îî±÷±õþ d±¿ýÃà î±óSlþ N 104 N
1193|prabhu kahe,-"krsna-krpa tomate purna haya
1194|saba tattva jana, tomara nahi tapa-traya
1195|SYNONYMS
1196|prabhu-Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; kahe-said; krsna-krpa-the
>|mercy of Krsna; tomate-on you; purna-full; haya-there is;
>|saba tattva-all truths; jana-you know; tomara-of you; nahi-
>|there is not; tapa-traya-the threefold miseries.
1197|TRANSLATION
1198|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu said, "Lord Krsna has bestowed His
>|full mercy upon you so that all these things are known to
>|you. For you, the threefold miseries certainly do not exist.
1199|Madhya 20.105
1200|TEXT 105
1201|TEXT
1202|LÔÁøžú¿Mà sõþ îR¿÷, æñd îÂNt±õ h
1203|æñ¿d' ðñnÂSI h±¿á' óRNrÃ,–u±sRõþ ¦¤t±õ N 105 N
1204|krsna-sakti dhara tumi, jana tattva-bhava
1205|jani' dardhya lagi' puche,-sadhura svabhava
1206|SYNONYMS
1207|krsna-sakti-the energy of Lord Krsna; dhara-possess; tumi-
>|you; jana-know; tattva-bhava-the factual position; jani'-
>|although knowing all these things; dardhya lagi'-for the
>|sake of strictness; puche-he inquires; sadhura-of a
>|saintly person; svabhava -the nature.
1208|TRANSLATION
1209|"Since you possess Lord Krsna's potency, you certainly know
>|these things. However, it is the nature of a sadhu to
>|inquire. Although he knows these things, the sadhu inquires
>|for the sake of strictness.
1210|Madhya 20.106
1211|TEXT 106
1212|TEXT
1213|Õ¿aõþ±Nðõ uõS±nSÐ ¿usINîÂIø¸±÷tÂN¿oîÂÐ h
1214|uX÷SuI±õNõ±s±lþ Îlø¸±S ¿dõS¿gdN ÷¿îÂÐ N 106 N
1215|acirad eva sarvarthah
1216| sidhyaty esam abhipsitah
1217|sad-dharmasyavabodhaya
1218| yesam nirbandhini matih
1219|SYNONYMS
1220|acirat-very soon; eva-certainly; sarva-arthah-the goal of
>|life; sidhyati-becomes fulfilled; esam-of these persons;
>|abhipsitah-desired; sat-dharmasya-of the path of
>|progressive devotional service; avabodhaya-for
>|understanding; yesam-those whose; nirbandhini-unflinching;
>|matih-intelligence.
1221|TRANSLATION
1222|"'Those who are eager to awaken their spiritual
>|consciousness and who
>|thus have unflinching, undeviated intelligence certainly
>|attain the desired goal of life very soon.'
1223|PURPORT
1224|This verse, quoted from the Naradiya Purana, is found in
>|the Bhakti-rasamrta-sindhu (1.2.103).
1225|Madhya 20.107
1226|TEXT 107
1227|TEXT
1228|Îl±áIó±S ýÃÃÝ îÂR¿÷ t¿Mà ›¶õîS±ý×ÃÃNî h
1229|SN÷ uõ îÂN qd, LÁ¿ýÃÃNlþ Îî±÷±Nî N 107 N
1230|yogya-patra hao tumi bhakti pravartaite
1231|krame saba tattva suna, kahiye tomate
1232|SYNONYMS
1233|yogya-patra-fit person; hao-are; tumi-you; bhakti-
>|devotional service; pravartaite-to propagate; krame-one
>|after another; saba-all; tattva-truths; suna-please hear;
>|kahiye-I shall speak; tomate-to you.
1234|TRANSLATION
1235|"You are fit to propagate the cult of devotional service.
>|Therefore gradually hear all the truths about it from Me. I
>|shall tell you about them.
1236|Madhya 20.108–109
1237|TEXTS 108–109
1238|TEXT
1239|æÃNNõõþ '¦¤õþ+ó' ýÃÃlþ–LÔÁNøžõþ '¿dîÂIðñu' h
1240|LÔÁNøžõþ 'îÂi¦š±-ú¿MÃ', 'ÎtÂðñNtÂðÃ-›¶LÁ±ú' N 108 N
1241|uÓlS±Sú-¿LÁõþí, ÆlNrà տ¢Ÿ;±h±aÂlþ h
1242|¦¤±t±¿õLÁ LÔÁNøžõþ ¿îd›¶LÁ±õþ 'ú¿MÃ' ýÃÃlþ N 109 N
1243|jivera 'svarupa' haya-krsnera 'nitya-dasa'
1244|krsnera 'tatastha-sakti' 'bhedabheda-prakasa'
1245|suryamsa-kirana, yaiche agni-jvala-caya
1246|svabhavika krsnera tina-prakara 'sakti' haya
1247|SYNONYMS
1248|jivera-of the living entity; svarupa -the
>|constitutional position; haya-is; krsnera-of Lord Krsna;
>|nitya-dasa-eternal servant; krsnera-of Lord Krsna; tatastha-
>|marginal; sakti-potency; bheda-abheda-one and different;
>|prakasa-manifestation; surya-amsa-part and parcel of the
>|sun; kirana-a ray of sunshine; yaiche-as; agni-jvala- caya
>|-molecular particle of fire; svabhavika-naturally;
>|krsnera-of Lord Krsna; tina-prakara-three varieties; sakti-
>|energies; haya-there are.
1249|TRANSLATION
1250|"It is the living entity's constitutional position to be an
>|eternal servant of Krsna because he is the marginal energy
>|of Krsna and a manifestation simultaneously one with and
>|different from the Lord, like a molecular particle of
>|sunshine or fire. Krsna has three varieties of energy.
1251|PURPORT
1252|Srila Bhaktivinoda Thakura explains these verses as
>|follows: Sri Sanatana Gosvami asked Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu,
>| "Who am I?" In answer, the Lord replied, "You are a pure
>|living entity. You are neither the gross material body nor
>|the subtle body composed of mind and intelligence. Actually
>|you are a spirit soul, eternally part and parcel of the
>|Supreme Soul, Krsna. Therefore you are His eternal servant.
>|You belong to Krsna's marginal potency. There are two
>|worlds-the spiritual world and the material world-and you
>|are situated between the material and spiritual potencies.
>|You have a relationship with both the material and the
>|spiritual world; therefore you are called the marginal
>|potency. You are related with Krsna as one and
>|simultaneously different. Because you are spirit soul, you
>|are one in quality with the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
>|but because you are a very minute particle of spirit soul,
>|you are different from the Supreme Soul. Therefore your
>|position is simultaneously one with and different from the
>|Supreme Soul. The examples given are those of the sun
>|itself and the small particles of sunshine and of a blazing
>|fire and the small particles of fire." Another explanation
>|of these verses can be found in Adi-lila , Chapter Two,
>|verse 96 .
1253|Madhya 20.110
1254|TEXT 110
1255|TEXT
1256|ÛLÁNðÃú¿¦šîÂuI±N¢ŸNæSÃI±R¦§± ¿õ(tm)¦±¿õþíN ln± h
1257|óõþuI õrpÁíÐ ú¿MÃ(tm)¦NnðÃ÷¿mhS æÃáR N 110 N
1258|eka-desa-sthitasyagner
1259| jyotsna vistarini yatha
1260|parasya brahmanah saktis
1261| tathedam akhilam jagat
1262|SYNONYMS
1263|eka-desa-in one place; sthitasya-being situated; agneh-of
>|fire; jyotsna-the illumination; vistarini-expanded
>|everywhere; yatha-just as; parasya-of the
>|
>|Supreme; brahmanah-of the Absolute Truth; saktih-the
>|energy; tatha-similarly; idam-this; akhilam-entire; jagat-
>|universe.
1264|TRANSLATION
1265|"'Just as the illumination of a fire, which is situated in
>|one place, is spread all over, the energies of the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead, Parabrahman, are spread all over
>|this universe.'
1266|PURPORT
1267|This is a quotation from the Visnu Purana (1.22.53).
1268|Madhya 20.111
1269|TEXT 111
1270|TEXT
1271|LÔÁNøžõþ ¦¤±t±¿õLÁ ¿îdú¿MÃ-ó¿õþí¿î h
1272|¿aÂ26ÿMÃ, æÃNõú¿MÃ, Õ±õþ ÷±lþ±ú¿Mà N 111 N
1273|krsnera svabhavika tina-sakti-parinati
1274|cic-chakti, jiva-sakti, ara maya-sakti
1275|SYNONYMS
1276|krsnera-of Lord Krsna; svabhavika-natural; tina-three;
>|sakti-of energies; parinati-transformations; cit-sakti-
>|spiritual potency; jiva-sakti-spiritual sparks, living
>|entities; ara-and; maya-sakti-illusory energy.
1277|TRANSLATION
1278|"Lord Krsna naturally has three energetic transformations,
>|and these are known as the spiritual potency, the living
>|entity potency and the illusory potency.
1279|Madhya 20.112
1280|TEXT 112
1281|TEXT
1282|¿õøRžú¿MÃÐ óõþ± Λ¶±Mñ ÎŽÂS:±mI± îÂn±óõþ± h
1283|Õ¿õðÃI±-LÁ÷SuS:±dI± îÔÂîÂNlþ± ú¿Mÿõþø¸INî N 112 N
1284|visnu-saktih para prokta
1285| ksetrajnakhya tatha para
1286|avidya-karma-samjnanya
1287| trtiya saktir isyate
1288|SYNONYMS
1289|visnu-saktih-the potency of Lord Visnu; para-spiritual;
>|prokta-it is said; ksetra-jna-akhya-the potency known as
>|ksetrajna; tatha-as well as; para-spiritual; avidya-
>|ignorance; karma-fruitive activities; samjna-known as; anya-
>|other; trtiya-third; saktih-potency; isyate-known thus.
1290|TRANSLATION
1291|"'Originally, Krsna's energy is spiritual, and the energy
>|known as the living entity is also spiritual. However,
>|there is another energy, called illusion, which consists of
>|fruitive activity. That is the Lord's third potency.'
1292|PURPORT
1293|This is a quotation from the Visnu Purana (6.7.61). For a
>|further explanation of this verse, refer to Adi-lila,
>|Chapter Seven, verse 119.
1294|Madhya 20.113
1295|TEXT 113
1296|TEXT
1297|úMÃlþÐ uõSt±õ±d±÷¿aÂ(tm)LI:±dNá±aõþ±Ð
1298|lNÃÃNî± õrpÁí(tm)¦±d uáS±ðÃI± t±õúMÃlþÐ h
1299|tõ¿(tm)L îóî±S Î|‡Â ó±õLÁuI lNn±øžî± N 113 N
1300|saktayah sarva-bhavanam
1301| acintya-jnana-gocarah
1302|yato 'to brahmanas tas tu
1303| sargadya bhava-saktayah
1304|bhavanti tapatam srestha
1305| pavakasya yathosnata
1306|SYNONYMS
1307|saktayah-energies; sarva-bhavanam-of all types of creation;
>|acintya-inconceivable; jnana-gocarah-by the range of man's
>|knowledge; yatah-from whom; atah-therefore; brahmanah-from
>|the Absolute Truth; tah-those; tu-but; sarga-adyah-bringing
>|about creation, maintenance and annihilation; bhava-
>|saktayah-the creative energies; bhavanti-are; tapatam-of
>|all the ascetics; srestha-O chief; pavakasya-of fire; yatha-
>|as; usnata-heat.
1308|TRANSLATION
1309|"'All the creative energies, which are inconceivable to a
>|common man, exist in the Supreme Absolute Truth. These
>|inconceivable energies act in the process of creation,
>|maintenance and annihilation. O chief of the ascetics, just
>|as there are two energies possessed by fire-namely heat and
>|light-these inconceivable creative energies are the natural
>|characteristics of the Absolute Truth.'
1310|PURPORT
1311|This is also a quotation from the Visnu Purana (1.3.2).
1312|Madhya 20.114
1313|TEXT 114
1314|TEXT
1315|llþ± ÎŽÂS:ú¿MÃÐ u± Îõ¿(c)†î± dÔó uõSá± h
1316|uSu±õþî±ó±d¿mh±dõ±N›Ÿ±îÂIS u(tm)Lî±dA N 114 N
1317|yaya ksetra-jna-saktih sa
1318| vestita nrpa sarva-ga
1319|samsara-tapan akhilan
1320| avapnoty atra santatan
1321|SYNONYMS
1322|yaya-by which; ksetra-jna-saktih-the living entities, known
>|as the ksetra-jna potency; sa-that potency; vestita-covered;
>| nrpa-O King; sarva-ga-capable of going anywhere in the
>|spiritual or the material world; samsara-tapan-miseries
>|due to the cycle of repeated birth and death; akhilan-all
>|kinds of; avapnoti-obtains; atra-in this material world;
>|santatan-arising from suffering or enjoying various kinds
>|of reactions to fruitive activities.
1323|TRANSLATION
1324|"'O King, the ksetra-jna-sakti is the living entity.
>|Although he has the facility to live in either the material
>|or the spiritual world, he suffers the threefold miseries
>|of material existence because he is influenced by the
>|avidya [nescience] potency, which covers his constitutional
>|position.
1325|PURPORT
1326|This and the following verse are also quoted from the Visnu
>|Purana (6.7.62–63) . For an explanation, see Madhya-lila,
>|Chapter 6, verses 155–156.
1327|Madhya 20.115
1328|TEXT 115
1329|TEXT
1330|îÂlþ± ¿îÂNõþ±¿ýÃÃîÂQ±2a ú¿MÃÐ ÎŽÂS:-uS¿:î± h
1331|uõStÓÂNîÂø¸R tÓó±h î±õþîÂN÷Id õîSÂNî N 115 N
1332|taya tirohitatvac ca
1333| saktih ksetra-jna-samjnita
1334|sarva-bhutesu bhu-pala
1335| taratamyena vartate
1336|SYNONYMS
1337|taya-by her; tirohitatvat -from being under
>|the influence; ca-also; saktih-the potency; ksetra-jna-
>|ksetra-jna; samjnita-known by the name; sarva-bhutesu-in
>|different types of bodies; bhu-pala-O King; taratamyena-in
>|different degrees; vartate-exists.
1338|TRANSLATION
1339|"'This living entity, covered by the influence of
>|nescience, exists in different forms in the material
>|condition. O King, he is thus proportionately freed from
>|the influence of the material energy, to greater or lesser
>|degrees.'
1340|Madhya 20.116
1341|TEXT 116
1342|TEXT
1343|ÕóNõþlþ¿÷îÂb¦dI±S ›¶LÔÁ¿îÂS ¿õ¿X Î÷ óõþ±÷A h
1344|æÃNõtÓÂî±S ÷ýÃñõ±NýÃñ lNlþðÃS s±lSNî æÃáR N 116 N
1345|apareyam itas tv anyam
1346| prakrtim viddhi me param
1347|jiva-bhutam maha-baho
1348| yayedam dharyate jagat
1349|SYNONYMS
1350|apara-inferior energy; iyam-this material world; itah-
>|beyond this; tu-but; anyam-another; prakrtim-energy; viddhi-
>|you must know; me-of Me; param-which is superior energy;
>|jiva-bhutam-they are the living entities; maha-baho-O
>|mighty-armed one; yaya-by which; idam-this material world;
>|dharyate-is being conducted; jagat-the cosmic manifestation.
1351|TRANSLATION
1352|"'Besides these inferior energies, O mighty-armed Arjuna,
>|there is another , superior energy of Mine, which comprises
>| the living entities who are exploiting the resources
>|of this material, inferior nature.'
1353|PURPORT
1354|This is a verse from the Bhagavad-gita (7.5). For an
>|explanation , see Adi-lila , Chapter Seven, verse 118
>|.
1355|Madhya 20.117
1356|TEXT 117
1357|TEXT
1358|LÔÁøž tR¿h' Îuý×Ãà æÃNõ Õd±¿ðÃ-õ¿ýÃÃ÷SRm h
1359|ÕîÂÛõ ÷±lþ± î±Nõþ ÎðÃlþ uSu±õþ-ðRÃÐm N 117 N
1360|krsna bhuli' sei jiva anadi-bahirmukha
1361|ataeva maya tare deya samsara-duhkha
1362|SYNONYMS
1363|krsna bhuli'-forgetting Krsna; sei jiva-that living entity;
>|anadi-from time immemorial; bahir-mukha-attracted by the
>|external feature; ataeva-therefore; maya-illusory energy;
>|tare-to him; deya-gives; samsara-duhkha-miseries of
>|material existence.
1364|TRANSLATION
1365|"Forgetting Krsna, the living entity has been attracted by
>|the external feature from time immemorial. Therefore the
>|illusory energy [maya] gives him all kinds of misery in his
>|material existence.
1366|PURPORT
1367|When the living entity forgets his constitutional position
>|as an eternal servant of Krsna, he is immediately entrapped
>|by the illusory, external energy. The living entity is
>|originally part and parcel of Krsna and is therefore the
>|superior energy of Krsna. He is endowed with inconceivable
>|minute energy that works inconceivably within the body.
>|However, the living entity, forgetting his position, is
>|situated in material energy. The living entity is called
>|the marginal energy because by nature he is spiritual but
>|by forgetfulness he is situated in the material energy.
>|Thus he has the power to live either in the material energy
>|or in the spiritual energy, and for this reason he is
>|called marginal energy. Being in the marginal position, he
>|is sometimes attracted by the external , illusory energy
>|, and this is the
>|beginning of his material life. When he enters the material
>|energy, he is subjected to the threefold time measurement-
>|past, present and future. Past, present and future belong
>|only to the material world; they do not exist in the
>|spiritual world. The living entity is eternal, and he
>|existed before the creation of this material world.
>|Unfortunately he has forgotten his relationship with Krsna.
>|The living entity's forgetfulness is described herein as
>|anadi, which indicates that it has existed since time
>|immemorial. One should understand that due to his desire to
>|enjoy himself in competition with Krsna, the living entity
>|comes into material existence.
1368|Madhya 20.118
1369|TEXT 118
1370|TEXT
1371|LÁtR ¦¤NáS nÂ×ê±lþ, LÁtR dõþNLÁ nRÂõ±lþ h
1372|ðÃGIæÃNd õþ±æñ Îld dðÃNNî aRÂõ±lþ N 118 N
1373|kabhu svarge uthaya, kabhu narake dubaya
1374|dandya-jane raja yena nadite cubaya
1375|SYNONYMS
1376|kabhu-sometimes; svarge-to higher planetary systems; uthaya-
>|he rises; kabhu-sometimes; narake-in hellish conditions of
>|life; dubaya-he is drowned; dandya-jane-a criminal; raja-a
>|king; yena-as; nadite-in the river; cubaya-dunks.
1377|TRANSLATION
1378|"In the material condition, the living entity is sometimes
>|raised to higher planetary systems and material prosperity
>|and sometimes drowned in a hellish situation. His state is
>|exactly like that of a criminal whom a king punishes by
>|submerging him in water and then raising him again from the
>|water.
1379|PURPORT
1380|In the Brhad -aranyaka Upanisad (4.3.16) it is stated,
>|asango hy ayam purusah: the living entity is always
>|free from the contamination of the material world. One who
>|is not materially infected and who does not forget Krsna as
>|his master is called nitya-mukta. In other words, one who
>|is eternally liberated from material contamination is
>|called nitya-mukta. From time immemorial the nitya-mukta
>|living entity has always been a devotee of Krsna, and his
>|only attempt has been to serve Krsna. Thus he never forgets
>|his eternal servitorship to Krsna. Any living entity who
>|forgets his eternal relationship with Krsna is under the
>|sway of the material condition. Bereft of the Lord's
>|transcendental loving service, he is subjected to the
>|reactions of fruitive activity. When he is elevated to the
>|higher planetary systems due to worldly pious activities,
>|he considers himself well situated, but when he is
>|subjected to punishment, he thinks himself improperly
>|situated. Thus material nature awards and punishes the
>|living entity. When the living entity is materially opulent,
>| material nature is rewarding him. When he is materially
>|embarrassed, material nature is punishing him.
1381|Madhya 20.119
1382|TEXT 119
1383|TEXT
1384|tÂlþS ¿ZîÂNlþ±¿t¿dNõúîÂÐ uI±-
1385|ðÃNú±ðÃNóîÂuI ¿õólSNlþ±•¦œÔ¿îÂÐ h
1386|îÂij±lþlþ±Nî± õRs Õ±tÂNæÃMÃÃS
1387|tÂÍMÃILÁNlþúS &Nðõî±R± N 119 N
1388|bhayam dvitiyabhinivesatah syad
1389| isad apetasya viparyayo 'smrtih
1390|tan-mayayato budha abhajet tam
1391| bhaktyaikayesam guru-devatatma
1392|SYNONYMS
1393|bhayam-fear; dvitiya-abhinivesatah-from the misconception
>|of being a product of material energy; syat-arises; isat-
>|from the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Krsna; apetasya-of
>|one who has withdrawn (the conditioned soul); viparyayah-
>|reversal of the position; asmrtih-no conception of his
>|relationship with the Supreme Lord; tat-mayaya-because of
>|the illusory energy of the Supreme Lord; atah-therefore;
>|budhah-one who is wise; abhajet-must worship; tam-Him;
>|bhaktya-by devotional service; ekaya-undiverted to karma
>|and jnana; isam-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; guru-as
>|the spiritual master; devata-the worshipable Lord; atma-the
>|Supersoul.
1394|TRANSLATION
1395|"'When the living entity is attracted by the material
>|energy, which is separate from Krsna, he is overpowered by
>|fear. Because he is separated from the Supreme Personality
>|of Godhead by the material energy, his conception of life
>|is reversed. In other words, instead of being the eternal
>|servant of Krsna, he becomes Krsna's competitor. This is
>|called viparyayo 'smrtih. To nullify this mistake, one who
>|is actually learned and advanced worships the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead as his spiritual master, worshipful
>|Deity and source of life. He thus worships the Lord by the
>|process of unalloyed devotional service.'
1396|PURPORT
1397|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (11.2.37). It is
>|an instruction given by Kavi Rsi, one of the nine saintly
>|personalities called the nine Yogendras. When Vasudeva,
>|Krsna's father, asked Devarsi Narada in Dvaraka about
>|devotional service, it was mentioned that previously King
>|Nimi, who was the King of Videha, was instructed by the
>|nine Yogendras. When Sri Narada Muni discoursed on
>|bhagavata-dharma, devotional service, he indicated how a
>|conditioned soul can be liberated by engaging in the loving
>|transcendental service of the Lord. The Lord is the
>|Supersoul, spiritual master and worshipable Deity of all
>|conditioned souls. Not only is Krsna the supreme worshipful
>|Deity for all living entities, but He is also the guru, or
>|caittya-guru, the Supersoul , who always gives the living
>|entity good counsel. Unfortunately the living entity
>|neglects the Supreme Person's instructions. He thus
>|identifies with the material energy and is consequently
>|overpowered by a kind of fear resulting from accepting
>|himself as the material body and considering paraphernalia
>|related to the material body to be his property. All types
>|of fruitive results actually come from the spirit soul, but
>|because he has forgotten his real duty, he is embarrassed
>|by many material consequences such as fear and attachment.
>|The only remedy is to revert to the service of the Lord and
>|thus be saved from material nature's unwanted harassment.
1398|Madhya 20.120
1399|TEXT 120
1400|TEXT
1401|u±sR-ú±¦a-LÔÁó±lþ l¿ðà LÔÁNøž±ijRm ýÃÃlþ h
1402|Îuý×Ãà æÃNõ ¿d(tm)¦Nõþ, ÷±lþ± î±ýÃñNõþ rñnÂllþ N 120 N
1403|sadhu-sastra-krpaya yadi krsnonmukha haya
1404|sei jiva nistare, maya tahare chadaya
1405|SYNONYMS
1406|sadhu-of saintly persons; sastra-of scriptures; krpaya-by
>|the mercy; yadi-if; krsna-unmukha haya-one becomes Krsna
>|conscious; sei-that; jiva-living entity; nistare-becomes
>|liberated; maya-the illusory energy; tahare-him; chadaya-
>|gives up.
1407|TRANSLATION
1408|"If the conditioned soul becomes Krsna conscious by the
>|mercy of saintly persons who voluntarily preach scriptural
>|injunctions and help him to become Krsna conscious, the
>|conditioned soul is liberated from the clutches of maya,
>|who gives him up.
1409|PURPORT
1410|A conditioned soul is one who has forgotten Krsna as his
>|eternal master. Thinking that he is enjoying the material
>|world, the conditioned soul suffers the threefold miseries
>|of material existence. Saintly persons (sadhus), Vaisnava
>|devotees of the Lord, preach Krsna consciousness on the
>|basis of the Vedic literature. It is only by their mercy
>|that the conditioned soul is awakened to Krsna
>|consciousness. When awakened, he is no longer eager to
>|enjoy the materialistic way of life. Instead, he devotes
>|himself to the loving transcendental service of the Lord.
>|When one engages in the Lord's devotional service, he
>|becomes detached from material enjoyment :
1411|bhaktih paresanubhavo viraktir
1412| anyatra caisa trika eka-kalah
1413| ( SB 11.2.42)
1414|This is the test by which one can tell whether he is
>|advancing in devotional service. One must be detached from
>|material enjoyment. Such detachment means that maya has
>|actually given the conditioned soul liberation from
>|illusory enjoyment. When one is advanced in Krsna
>|consciousness, he does not consider himself as good as
>|Krsna. Whenever he thinks that he is the enjoyer of
>|material advantages, he is imprisoned in the bodily
>|conception. However, when he is freed from the bodily
>|conception, he can engage in devotional service, which is
>|his actual position of freedom from the clutches of maya.
>|This is all explained in the following verse from the
>|Bhagavad-gita (7.14).
1415|Madhya 20.121
1416|TEXT 121
1417|TEXT
1418|ÆðõN ÎýÃÃIø¸± &í÷lþN ÷÷ ÷±lþ± ðRÃõþîÂIlþ± h
1419|÷±N÷õ Îl ›¶óðÃIN(tm)L ÷±lþ±N÷î±S îõþ¿(tm)L Îî N 121 N
1420|daivi hy esa guna-mayi
1421| mama maya duratyaya
1422|mam eva ye prapadyante
1423| mayam etam taranti te
1424|SYNONYMS
1425|daivi-belonging to the Supreme Lord; hi-certainly; esa-this;
>| guna-mayi-made of the three modes; mama-My; maya-external
>|energy; duratyaya-very difficult to surpass; mam-unto Me;
>|eva-certainly; ye-those who; prapadyante-surrender fully;
>|mayam-illusory energy; etam-this; taranti-cross over; te-
>|they.
1426|TRANSLATION
1427|"'This divine energy of Mine, consisting of the three
>|modes of material nature, is difficult to overcome. But
>|those who have surrendered unto Me can easily cross beyond
>|it.'
1428|Madhya 20.122
1429|TEXT 122
1430|TEXT
1431|÷±lþ±÷R* æÃNNõõþ d±¿ýÃà ¦¤îÂÐ LÔÁøž:±d h
1432|æÃNNõNõþ LÔÁó±lþ ÆLÁh± LÔÁøž ÎõðÃ-óRõþ±í N 122 N
1433|maya-mugdha jivera nahi svatah krsna-jnana
1434|jivere krpaya kaila krsna veda-purana
1435|SYNONYMS
1436|maya-mugdha-enchanted by the illusory energy; jivera-of the
>|conditioned soul; nahi-there is not; svatah-automatically;
>|krsna-jnana-knowledge of Krsna; jivere-unto the conditioned
>|soul; krpaya-out of mercy; kaila-presented; krsna-Lord
>|Krsna; veda-purana-the Vedic literature and the Puranas (
>|supplements to the Vedic literature).
1437|TRANSLATION
1438|"The conditioned soul cannot revive his Krsna consciousness
>|by his own effort. But out of causeless mercy, Lord Krsna
>|compiled the Vedic literature and its supplements, the
>|Puranas.
1439|PURPORT
1440|A conditioned soul is bewildered by the Lord's illusory
>|energy (maya). Maya's business is to keep the conditioned
>|soul forgetful of his real relationship with Krsna. Thus
>|the living entity forgets his real identity as spirit soul,
>|Brahman, and instead of realizing his factual position
>|thinks himself the product of the material energy.
>|According to Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.7.5):
1441|yaya sammohito jiva atmanam tri-gunatmakam
1442|paro 'pi manute 'nartham tat- krtam cabhipadyate
1443|"Due to this external energy, the living entity, although
>|transcendental to the three modes of material nature,
>|thinks of himself as a material product and thus undergoes
>|the reactions of material miseries."
1444|This is a description of maya's action upon the conditioned
>|soul. Thinking himself a product of the material energy,
>|the conditioned soul engages in the service of the material
>|energy in so many ways. He becomes the servant of lust,
>|anger, greed and envy. In this way one totally becomes a
>|servant of the illusory energy. Later, the bewildered soul
>|becomes a servant of mental speculation, but in any case he
>|is simply covered by the illusory energy. Out of His
>|causeless mercy and compassion, Krsna has compiled various
>|Vedic literatures in His incarnation as Vyasadeva.
>|Vyasadeva is a saktyavesa-avatara of Lord Krsna. He has
>|very kindly presented these literatures to awaken the
>|conditioned soul to his senses. Unfortunately, at the
>|present moment the conditioned souls are guided by demons
>|who do not care to read the Vedic literatures. Although
>|there is an immense treasure-house of knowledge, people are
>|engaged in reading useless literature that will give them
>|no information on how to get out of the clutches of maya.
>|The purpose of the Vedic literatures is explained in the
>|following verses.
1445|Madhya 20.123
1446|TEXT 123
1447|TEXT
1448|'ú±¦a-&-Õ±R'-õþ+Nó Õ±ód±Nõþ æñd±d h
1449|'LÔÁøž Î÷±õþ ›¶tRÂ, S±î±'–æÃNNõõþ ýÃÃlþ :±d N 123 N
1450|'sastra-guru-atma'-rupe apanare janana
1451|'krsna mora prabhu, trata'-jivera haya jnana
1452|SYNONYMS
1453|sastra-guru-atma-rupe-in the form of the Vedic literature,
>|the spiritual master and the Supersoul; apanare janana-
>|informs about Himself; krsna-Lord Krsna; mora-my; prabhu-
>|Lord; trata- deliverer; jivera-of the conditioned soul;
>|haya-there is; jnana-knowledge.
1454|TRANSLATION
1455|"The forgetful conditioned soul is educated by Krsna
>|through the Vedic literatures, the realized spiritual
>|master and the Supersoul. Through these, he can understand
>|the Supreme Personality of Godhead as He is, and he can
>|understand that Lord Krsna is his eternal master and
>|deliverer from the clutches of maya. In this way one can
>|acquire real knowledge of his conditioned life and can come
>|to understand how to attain liberation.
1456|PURPORT
1457|Being forgetful of his real position, the conditioned soul
>|may take help from sastra, guru and the Supersoul within
>|his heart. Krsna is situated within everyone's heart as the
>|Supersoul. As stated in the Bhagavad-gita (18.61):
1458|isvarah sarva-bhutanam hrd-dese 'rjuna tisthati
1459|bhramayan sarva- bhutani yantrarudhani mayaya
1460|"The Supreme Lord is situated in everyone's
>|heart, O Arjuna, and is directing the wanderings of all
>|living entities, who are seated as on a machine made of the
>|material energy."
1461|As the saktyavesa-avatara Vyasadeva, Krsna
>|teaches the conditioned soul through the Vedic literatures.
>|Krsna externally appears as the spiritual master and trains
>|the conditioned soul to come to Krsna consciousness. When
>|his original Krsna consciousness is revived, the
>|conditioned soul is delivered from the material clutches.
>|Thus a conditioned soul is always helped by the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead in three ways-by the scriptures, the
>|spiritual master and the Supersoul within the heart. The
>|Lord is the deliverer of the conditioned soul and is
>|accepted as the Supreme Lord of all living entities. Krsna
>|says in the Bhagavad-gita (18.66):
1462|sarva -dharman parityajya mam ekam saranam vraja
>|
>|
>|
1463|aham tvam sarva-papebhyo moksayisyami ma sucah
>|
>|
>|
>|
>|
>|
>|
1464|"Abandon all varieties of religion and
>| just surrender unto Me . I shall deliver you
>|from all sinful reactions. Do not fear." This same
>|instruction is found throughout all Vedic literatures.
>|Sadhu, sastra and guru act as the
>|representatives of Krsna, and the Krsna consciousness
>|movement is also taking place all over the universe.
>| Whoever takes advantage of this opportunity becomes
>| liberated .
1465|Madhya 20.124
1466|TEXT 124
1467|TEXT
1468|Îõ ðÃú±¦a LÁ N ýÃÖ'u¥¤g,' ' Õ
>|¿tÂNslþ,' ' ›¶Nlþ±æÃd' h
1469|'LÔÁøž'–›¶±óI u¥¤g, 't¿MÃ'–›¶±N5Iõþ u±sd N 124 N
1470|veda-sastra kahe-'sambandha', 'abhidheya', 'prayojana'
1471|'krsna'-prapya sambandha, 'bhakti'-praptyera sadhana
1472|SYNONYMS
1473|veda-sastra kahe-the Vedic literature instructs; sambandha-
>|the conditioned soul's relationship with the Lord;
>|abhidheya-the regulated activities of the conditioned soul
>|for reviving that relationship; prayojana-and the ultimate
>|goal of life to be attained by the conditioned soul; krsna-
>|Lord Krsna; prapya-to be awakened; sambandha-the original
>|relationship; bhakti-devotional service; praptyera sadhana-
>|the means of attaining Krsna.
1474|TRANSLATION
1475|"The Vedic literatures give information about the living
>|entity's eternal relationship with Krsna, which is called
>|sambandha. The living entity's understanding of this
>|relationship and his acting accordingly is called abhidheya.
>| Returning home, back to Godhead, is the ultimate goal of
>|life and is called prayojana.
1476|Madhya 20.125
1477|TEXT 125
1478|TEXT
1479|Õ¿tÂNslþ- d±÷ ' t¿MÃ,' ' Λ¶÷' – ›
>|¶Nlþ±æÃd h
1480|óRø¸±nS-¿úNõþ±÷¿í Λ¶÷ ÷ýÃñsd N 125 N
1481|abhidheya-nama 'bhakti', 'prema'-prayojana
1482|purusartha-siromani prema maha-dhana
1483|SYNONYMS
1484|abhidheya-activities to revive one's relationship; nama-
>|named; bhakti-devotional service; prema-love of Godhead;
>|prayojana-the ultimate goal of life; purusa-artha-siromani-
>|the topmost interest of the living entity; prema-love of
>|Godhead; maha-dhana-the greatest wealth.
1485|TRANSLATION
1486|"Devotional service, or sense activity for the satisfaction
>|of the Lord, is called abhidheya because it can develop one'
>|s original love of Godhead, which is the goal of life. This
>|goal is the living entity's topmost interest and greatest
>|wealth. Thus one attains the platform of transcendental
>|loving service unto the Lord.
1487|PURPORT
1488|The conditioned soul is bewildered by the external,
>|material energy, which fully engages him in sense
>|gratification in various ways. Due to engagement
>|in material activities, one's original Krsna consciousness
>|is covered. However, as the supreme father of all living
>|entities, Krsna wants His sons to return home, back to
>|Godhead; therefore He personally comes to deliver Vedic
>|literatures like the Bhagavad-gita. He engages His
>|confidential servants who serve as spiritual masters and
>|enlighten the conditioned living entities. Being present in
>|everyone's heart, the Lord gives the living entities the
>|conscience whereby they can accept the Vedas and the
>|spiritual master. In this way the living entity can
>|understand his constitutional position and his relationship
>|with the Supreme Lord. As personally enunciated by the Lord
>|Himself in the Bhagavad-gita (15.15), vedais ca sarvair
>|aham eva vedyah: through the study of Vedanta, one may
>|become fully aware of his relationship with the Supreme
>|Lord and act accordingly. In this way one may ultimately
>|attain the platform of loving service to the Lord. It is in
>|the living entity's best interest to understand the Supreme
>|Lord. Unfortunately, the living entities have forgotten
>|that this is in their best interest, and therefore Srimad-
>|Bhagavatam says , na te viduh svartha-gatim hi visnum (
>|SB 7.5.31).
1489|Everyone wants to achieve life's ultimate goal, but due to
>|being absorbed in the material energy, we waste our time
>|with sense gratification. Through the study of Vedic
>|literatures-of which the essence is the Bhagavad-gita-one
>|comes to Krsna consciousness. Thus one engages in
>|devotional service, called abhidheya. When the living
>|entity actually develops love of Godhead , he has
>|reached the ultimate goal , prayojana.
>|In other words, one who becomes fully Krsna conscious
>| has attained the perfection of life.
1490|Madhya 20.126
1491|TEXT 126
1492|TEXT
1493|LÔÁøž÷±sRlS-Îuõ±dµ-›¶±¿5õþ LÁ±õþí h
1494|LÔÁøž-Îuõ± LÁNõþ, Õ±õþ LÔÁøžõþu-Õ±¦¤±ðÃd N 126 N
1495|krsna-madhurya-sevananda-praptira karana
1496|krsna-seva kare, ara krsna-rasa-asvadana
1497|SYNONYMS
1498|krsna-madhurya-of an intimate relationship with Krsna; seva-
>|ananda-of pleasure from rendering service unto Him;
>|praptira-of achievement; karana-because; krsna-seva kare-
>|one renders service to Krsna; ara-and; krsna-rasa-of the
>|mellows of such service; asvadana-tasting.
1499|TRANSLATION
1500|"When one attains the transcendental bliss of an intimate
>|relationship with Krsna, he renders service to Him and
>|tastes the mellows of Krsna consciousness.
1501|Madhya 20.127
1502|TEXT 127
1503|TEXT
1504|ý×ÃÃýÃñNî ðÔÃ(c)†±(tm)L–ÆlNrà ðÿõþN^õþ âNõþ h
1505|'uõS:' Õ±¿u' ðRÃÐm Îðÿm' óRrNlþ î±ýÃñNõþ N 127 N
1506|ihate drstanta-yaiche daridrera ghare
1507|'sarvajna' asi' duhkha dekhi' puchaye tahare
1508|SYNONYMS
1509|ihate-in this connection; drstanta-the parable; yaiche-just
>|as; daridrera ghare-in the house of a poor man; sarva-jna-
>|an astrologer; asi'-coming; duhkha-distressed condition;
>|dekhi'-seeing; puchaye tahare-inquires from him.
1510|TRANSLATION
1511|"The following parable may be given. Once a learned
>|astrologer came to the house of a poor man and, seeing his
>|distressed condition, questioned him.
1512|PURPORT
1513|Sometimes we go to an astrologer or palmist when we are in
>|a distressed condition or when we want to know the future.
>|The living entity in conditioned life is always distressed
>|by the threefold miseries of material existence. Under the
>|circumstances, he is inquisitive about his position. For
>|instance, Sanatana Gosvami approached the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead, Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, to ask Him
>|why he was in a distressed condition. This is the position
>|of all conditioned souls. We are always in a distressed
>|condition, and an intelligent man naturally becomes
>|inquisitive. This position is called brahma-jijnasa. Athato
>|brahma jijnasa (Vedanta-sutra 1.1.1). Brahma here refers to
>|the Vedic literature. One should consult the Vedic
>|literature to know why the conditioned soul is always in a
>|distressed condition. The Vedic literatures are meant to
>|free the conditioned soul from the miserable conditions of
>|material existence. In this chapter, the story of the
>|astrologer Sarvajna and the poor man is very instructive.
1514|Madhya 20.128
1515|TEXT 128
1516|TEXT
1517|'îR¿÷ ÎLÁNd ðRÃÐmN, Îî±÷±õþ Õ±Nrà ¿óîÔÂsd h
1518|Îî±÷±Nõþ d± LÁ¿ýÃÃh, ÕdIS rñ¿nÂlh æÃNõd N" 128 N
1519|'tumi kene duhkhi, tomara ache pitr-dhana
1520|tomare na kahila, anyatra chadila jivana"
1521|SYNONYMS
1522|tumi-you; kene-why; duhkhi-distressed; tomara-your; ache-
>|there is; pitr-dhana-the riches of your father; tomare-unto
>|you; na kahila-he did not disclose; anyatra-somewhere else;
>|chadila-gave up; jivana-his life.
1523|TRANSLATION
1524|"The astrologer asked, 'Why are you unhappy? Your father
>|was very wealthy, but he did not disclose his wealth to you
>|because he died elsewhere.'
1525|Madhya 20.129
1526|TEXT 129
1527|TEXT
1528|uõSN:õþ õ±NLÁI LÁNõþ sNdõþ nÂ×NVNú h
1529|UNrà ÎõðÃ-óRõþ±í æÃNNõ 'LÔÁøž' nÂ×óNðÃNú N 129 N
1530|sarvajnera vakye kare dhanera uddese
1531|aiche veda-purana jive 'krsna' upadese
1532|SYNONYMS
1533|sarvajnera-of the astrologer; vakye -the words; kare-
>|make; dhanera-of the riches; uddese-news; aiche-similarly;
>|veda-purana-Vedic literatures; jive-unto the living entity,
>|the conditioned soul; krsna-of Lord Krsna; upadese-
>|instructs.
1534|TRANSLATION
1535|"Just as the words of the astrologer Sarvajna gave news of
>|the poor man's treasure, the Vedic literatures advise one
>|about Krsna consciousness when one is inquisitive to know
>|why he is in a distressed material condition.
1536|Madhya 20.130
1537|TEXT 130
1538|TEXT
1539|uõSN:õþ õ±NLÁI ÷Óhsd ÕdRõg h
1540|uõSú±N¦a nÂ×óNðÃNú, 'MLÔÁøž'–u¥¤g N 130 N
1541|sarvajnera vakye mula-dhana anubandha
1542|sarva-sastre upadese, 'sri-krsna'-sambandha
1543|SYNONYMS
1544|sarvajnera-of the astrologer; vakye-by the assurance; mula-
>|dhana-with the treasure; anubandha-connection; sarva-sastre-
>|all Vedic literatures; upadese-instruct; sri-krsna-Lord Sri
>|Krsna, the Supreme Personality of Godhead; sambandha
>|-the central connection.
1545|TRANSLATION
1546|"By the words of the astrologer, the poor man's connection
>|with the treasure was established. Similarly, the Vedic
>|literature advises us that our real connection is with Sri
>|Krsna, the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
1547|PURPORT
1548|In the Bhagavad-gita (7.26), Sri Krsna says:
1549|vedaham samatitani vartamanani carjuna
1550|bhavisyani ca bhutani mam tu veda na kascana
1551|"O Arjuna, as the Supreme Personality of Godhead, I know
>|everything that has happened in the past, all that is
>|happening in the present, and all things that are yet to
>|come. I also know all living entities, but Me no one knows."
1552|Thus Krsna knows the cause of the distressed condition of
>|the conditioned soul. He therefore descends from His
>|original position to instruct the conditioned soul and
>|inform him about his forgetfulness of his relationship with
>|Krsna. Krsna exhibits Himself in His relationships in
>|Vrndavana and at the Battle of Kuruksetra so that people
>|will be attracted to Him and will return home, back
>|to Godhead. Krsna also says in the Bhagavad-gita that He is
>|the proprietor of all universes, the enjoyer of everything
>|that be and the friend of everyone. Bhoktaram yajna-
>|tapasam sarva -loka-mahesvaram/ suhrdam sarva-
>|bhutanam (Bg. 5.29). If we revive our original intimate
>|relationship with Krsna, our distressed condition in the
>|material world will be mitigated. Everyone is trying to
>|adjust to the distressed conditions of material existence,
>|but the basic problems cannot be solved unless one is in an
>|intimate relationship with Krsna.
1553|Madhya 20.131
1554|TEXT 131
1555|TEXT
1556|'õ±Nóõþ sd Õ±NrÃ'-:±Nd sd d±¿ýÃà ó±lþ h
1557|îÂNõ uõS: LÁNýÃà î±Nõþ ›¶±¿5õþ nÂ×ó±lþ N 131 N
1558|'bapera dhana ache'-jnane dhana nahi paya
1559|tabe sarvajna kahe tare praptira upaya
1560|SYNONYMS
1561|bapera dhana ache-the father has some treasure; jnane-by
>|this knowledge; dhana-treasure; nahi paya-one does not get;
>|tabe-then; sarva-jna-the astrologer; kahe-says; tare-
>|unto the poor man; praptira upaya-the means of getting the
>|treasure.
1562|TRANSLATION
1563|"Although being assured of his father's treasure, the poor
>|man cannot acquire this treasure by such knowledge alone.
>|Therefore the astrologer had to inform him of the means
>|whereby he could actually find the treasure.
1564|Madhya 20.132
1565|TEXT 132
1566|TEXT
1567|'Ûý×Ãà ¦š±Nd Õ±Nrà sd'–l¿ðà ðÿŽÂNí mR¿ðÃNõ h
1568|'tÂN÷h-õhN' nÂ׿êÂNõ, sd d± ó±ý×ÃÃNõ N 132 N
1569|'ei sthane ache dhana'-yadi daksine khudibe
1570|'bhimarula-baruli' uthibe, dhana na paibe
1571|SYNONYMS
1572|ei sthane-at this place; ache-is; dhana-treasure; yadi-if;
>|daksine-on the southern side; khudibe-you will dig;
>|bhimarula-baruli-wasps and drones; uthibe-will rise; dhana-
>|the riches; na paibe-you will not get.
1573|TRANSLATION
1574|"The astrologer said, 'The treasure is in this place, but
>|if you dig toward the southern side, the wasps and drones
>|will rise, and you will not get your treasure.
1575|Madhya 20.133
1576|TEXT 133
1577|TEXT
1578|'ó¿(N÷' mR¿ðÃNõ, î±ýÃñ 'lŽÂ' ÛLÁ ýÃÃlþ h
1579|Îu ¿õâ(r) LÁ¿õþNõ,–sNd ýÃñî d± ónÂllþ N 133 N
1580|'pascime' khudibe, taha 'yaksa' eka haya
1581|se vighna karibe,-dhane hata na padaya
1582|SYNONYMS
1583|pascime-on the western side; khudibe-if you dig; taha-there;
>| yaksa-ghost; eka-one; haya-there is; se-he; vighna karibe-
>|will create disturbances; dhane-on the treasure; hata-hand;
>|na-not; padaya-touches.
1584|TRANSLATION
1585|"'If you dig on the western side, there is a ghost who
>|will create such a disturbance that your hands will not
>|even touch the treasure.
1586|Madhya 20.134
1587|TEXT 134
1588|TEXT
1589|'nÂ×MÃÃNõþ' mR¿ðÃNh Õ±Nrà LÔÁøž 'ÕæÃáNõþ' h
1590|sd d±¿ýÃà ó±Nõ, mR¿ðÃNî ¿á¿hNõ uõ±Nõþ N 134 N
1591|'uttare' khudile ache krsna 'ajagare'
1592|dhana nahi pabe, khudite gilibe sabare
1593|SYNONYMS
1594|uttare-on the northern side; khudile-if you dig; ache-there
>|is; krsna-black; ajagare-snake; dhana-treasure; nahi-not;
>|pabe-you will get; khudite-digging; gilibe-will devour;
>|sabare-everyone.
1595|TRANSLATION
1596|"'If you dig on the northern side, there is a big black
>|snake that will devour you if you attempt to dig up the
>|treasure.
1597|Madhya 20.135
1598|TEXT 135
1599|TEXT
1600|óÓõS¿ðÃNLÁ î±Nî ÷±iÂN ÕŠ mR¿ðÃNî h
1601|sNdõþ sÁ±¿õþ ó¿nÂlNõLÁ Îî±÷±õþ ýÃñNîÂNî N 135 N
1602|purva-dike tate mati alpa khudite
1603|dhanera jhari padibeka tomara hatete
1604|SYNONYMS
1605|purva-dike-on the eastern side; tate-there; mati-the dirt;
>|alpa-small quantity; khudite-digging; dhanera-of the
>|treasure; jhari-the pot; padibeka-you will get; tomara-your;
>| hatete-in the hands.
1606|TRANSLATION
1607|"'However, if you dig up a small quantity of dirt on the
>|eastern side, your hands will immediately touch the pot of
>|treasure.'
1608|PURPORT
1609|The Vedic literatures, including the Puranas, state that
>|according to the position of the conditioned soul, there
>|are different processes-karma-kanda, jnana-kanda, the yogic
>|process and the bhakti-yoga process. Karma-kanda is
>|compared to wasps and drones that will simply bite if one
>|takes shelter of them. Jnana-kanda, the speculative process,
>| is simply like a ghost who creates mental disturbances.
>|Yoga, the mystic process, is compared to a black snake that
>|devours people by the impersonal cultivation of kaivalya.
>|However, if one takes to bhakti-yoga, he becomes quickly
>|successful. In other words, through bhakti-yoga, one's
>|hands touch the hidden treasure without difficulty.
1610|The goal of all the revealed scriptures and Vedic
>|injunctions is Krsna , as He Himself says in the Bhagavad-
>|gita (15.15): vedais ca sarvair aham eva vedyah. Since
>| the Vedas
>|enjoin one to search out Krsna and take shelter at His
>|lotus feet, and since no Vedic process but devotional
>|service will enable one to do this, one has to take to
>|devotional service. According to the Bhagavad-gita (18.55),
>| only the bhakti process is said to be definitive. Bhaktya
>|mam abhijanati. This is the conclusive statement of the
>|Vedas, and one has to accept this process if one is serious
>|in searching for Krsna, the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
>|In this connection, Srila Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Thakura
>|gives the following statement. The eastern side represents
>|devotional service to Lord Krsna. The southern side
>|represents the process of fruitive activity (karma-kanda),
>|which ends in material gain. The western side represents
>|jnana-kanda, the process of mental speculation, sometimes
>|called siddhi-kanda. The northern side represents the
>|speculative method , sometimes known as the mystic yoga
>|system. It is only the eastern side, devotional service,
>|that enables one to attain life's real goal. On the
>|southern side, there are fruitive activities , by which one
>|is subject to the punishment of Yamaraja. When one follows
>|the system of fruitive activity, his material desires
>|remain prominent. Consequently the results of this process
>|are compared to wasps and drones. The living entity is
>|bitten by the wasps and drones of fruitive activity and
>|thus suffers in material existence birth after birth. One
>|cannot become free from material desires by following this
>|process. The propensity for material enjoyment never ends.
>|Therefore the cycle of birth and death continues, and the
>|spirit soul suffers perpetually.
1611|The mystic yoga process is compared to a black snake that
>|devours the living entity and injects him with poison. The
>|ultimate goal of the yoga system is to become one with the
>|Absolute. This means finishing one's personal existence.
>|But the spiritual part and parcel of the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead has an eternal individual existence.
>| The Bhagavad-gita confirms that the individual soul
>|existed in the past, is existing in the present and will
>|continue to exist as an individual in the future.
>|Artificially trying to become one with the Absolute is
>|suicidal. One cannot annihilate his natural condition.
1612|A yaksa, a protector of riches, will not allow anyone to
>|take away riches for enjoyment. Such a demon will simply
>|create disturbances. In other words, a devotee will not
>|depend on his material resources but on the mercy of the
>|Supreme Personality of Godhead, who can give real
>|protection. This is called raksisyatiti visvasah or (in the
>|Bengali poetry of Bhaktivinoda Thakura's Saranagati) '
>|avasya raksibe krsna'-visvasa palana. The surrendered soul
>|must accept the fact that his real protector is Krsna, not
>|his material acquisitions.
1613|Considering all these points, devotional service to Krsna
>|is the real treasure house for the living entity. When one
>|comes to the platform of devotional service, he always
>|remains opulent in the association of the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead. One who is bereft of devotional
>|service is swallowed by the black snake of the yoga system
>|and bitten by the wasps and drones of fruitive activity,
>|and he suffers consequent material miseries. Sometimes the
>|living entity is misled into trying to merge into spiritual
>|existence, thinking himself as good as the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead. This means that when he comes to
>|the spiritual platform, he will be disturbed and will again
>|return to the material platform. According to Srimad-
>|Bhagavatam (10.2.32):
1614|ye 'nye 'ravindaksa vimukta-maninas
1615| tvayy asta-bhavad avisuddha-buddhayah
1616|aruhya krcchrena param padam tatah
1617| patanty adho 'nadrta-yusmad-anghrayah
1618|Such people may become sannyasis, but unless they take
>|shelter of Krsna's lotus feet, they will return to the
>|material platform to perform philanthropic activities. In
>|this way, one's spiritual life is lost. This is to be
>|understood as being devoured by the black snake.
1619|Madhya 20.136
1620|TEXT 136
1621|TEXT
1622|UNrà ú±¦a LÁNýÃÃ,–LÁ÷S, :±d, Îl±á îÂI¿æÃ' h
1623|'tÂNMÃI' LÔÁøž õú ýÃÃlþ, tÂNMÃI îD±Nõþ t¿æà N 136 N
1624|aiche sastra kahe,-karma, jnana, yoga tyaji'
1625|'bhaktye' krsna vasa haya, bhaktye tanre bhaji
1626|SYNONYMS
1627|aiche-in that way; sastra kahe-the Vedic literatures
>|confirm; karma-fruitive activities; jnana-speculative
>|knowledge; yoga-the mystic yoga system; tyaji'-giving up;
>|bhaktye-by devotional service; krsna-the Supreme Absolute
>|Personality of Godhead; vasa haya-becomes satisfied;
>|bhaktye-by devotional service; tanre-Him; bhaji-we worship.
1628|TRANSLATION
1629|"The revealed scriptures conclude that one should give up
>|fruitive activity, speculative knowledge and the mystic
>|yoga system and instead take to devotional service, by
>|which Krsna can be fully satisfied.
1630|Madhya 20.137
1631|TEXT 137
1632|TEXT
1633|d u±slþ¿î ÷±S Îl±Ná± d u±SmIS s÷S nÂ×Xõ h
1634|d ¦¤±sI±lþ(tm)¦Ãó(tm)¦I±Ná± ln± t¿MÃ÷SN÷±¿æSÃî± N 137 N
1635|na sadhayati mam yogo
1636| na sankhyam dharma uddhava
1637|na svadhyayas tapas tyago
1638| yatha bhaktir mamorjita
1639|SYNONYMS
1640|na-never; sadhayati-causes to remain satisfied; mam-Me;
>|yogah-the process of control; na-nor; sankhyam-the process
>|of gaining philosophical knowledge about the Absolute Truth;
>| dharmah-such an occupation; uddhava-My dear Uddhava; na-
>|nor; svadhyayah-study of the Vedas; tapah-austerities;
>|tyagah-renunciation, acceptance of sannyasa, or charity;
>|yatha-as much as; bhaktih-devotional service; mama-unto Me;
>|urjita-developed.
1641|TRANSLATION
1642|"[The Supreme Personality of Godhead, Krsna, said:] 'My
>|dear Uddhava, neither through astanga-yoga [the mystic yoga
>|system to control the senses], nor through impersonal
>|monism or an analytical study of the Absolute Truth, nor
>|through study of the Vedas, nor through
>|austerities, charity or acceptance
>|of sannyasa can one satisfy Me as much as by
>|developing unalloyed devotional service unto Me.
1643|PURPORT
1644|This and the following verse are quoted from Srimad-
>|Bhagavatam (11.14.20 –21). The explanation for this verse
>|is given in Adi-lila 17.76 .
1645|Madhya 20.138
1646|TEXT 138
1647|TEXT
1648|tÂMÃI±ýÃÃN÷LÁlþ± ¢¶±ýÃÃIÐ |Xlþ±R± ¿›¶lþÐ uî±÷A h
1649|t¿MÃÐ óRd±¿î ÷¿i§‡Â± «ó±LÁ±d¿ó uyõ±R N 138 N
1650|bhaktyaham ekaya grahyah
1651| sraddhayatma priyah satam
1652|bhaktih punati man-nistha
1653| sva-pakan api sambhavat
1654|SYNONYMS
1655|bhaktya-by devotional service; aham-I, the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead; ekaya-unflinching; grahyah-
>|obtainable; sraddhaya-by faith; atma-the most dear; priyah-
>|to be served; satam-by the devotees; bhaktih-the devotional
>|service; punati-purifies; mat-nistha-fixed only on Me; sva-
>|pakan-the lowest of human beings, who are accustomed to
>|eating dogs; api-certainly; sambhavat-from all faults due
>|to birth and other circumstances.
1656|TRANSLATION
1657|"'Being very dear to the devotees and sadhus, I am
>|attained through unflinching faith and devotional service.
>|This bhakti-yoga system, which gradually increases
>|attachment for Me, purifies even a human being born among
>|dog-eaters. That is to say, everyone can be elevated to the
>|spiritual platform by the process of bhakti-yoga.'
1658|Madhya 20.139
1659|TEXT 139
1660|TEXT
1661|ÕîÂÛõ 't¿MÃ'–LÔÁøžÂ›¶±N5Iõþ nÂ×ó±lþ h
1662|'Õ¿tÂNslþ' õ¿h' î±Nõþ uõSú±N¦a á±lþ N 139 N
1663|ataeva 'bhakti'-krsna-praptyera upaya
1664|'abhidheya' bali' tare sarva-sastre gaya
1665|SYNONYMS
1666|ataeva-therefore; bhakti-devotional service; krsna-
>|praptyera-of achieving the lotus feet of Krsna; upaya-the
>|only means; abhidheya-abhidheya; bali'-calling; tare-this
>|system; sarva-sastre-in all revealed scriptures; gaya-is
>|described.
1667|TRANSLATION
1668|"The conclusion is that devotional service is the only
>|means for approaching the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
>|This system is therefore called abhidheya. This is the
>|verdict of all revealed scriptures.
1669|PURPORT
1670|As Lord Krsna states in the Bhagavad-gita (18.55).
1671|bhaktya mam abhijanati yavan yas casmi tattvatah
1672|tato mam tattvato jnatva visate tad-anantaram
1673|"One can understand Me as I am, as the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead, only by devotional service. And
>|when one is in full consciousness of Me by such devotion,
>|he can enter into the kingdom of God."
1674|The aim of life is to get rid of the material conditioning
>|and enter into spiritual existence. Although the sastras
>|prescribe different methods for different men, the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead says that one ultimately must accept
>|the path of devotional service as the assured path of
>|spiritual advancement. Devotional service to the Lord is
>|the only process actually confirmed by the Lord. Sarva-
>|dharman parityajya mam ekam saranam vraja (Bg. 18.66). One
>|must become a devotee if one wants to return home, back to
>|Godhead, and become eternally blissful.
1675|Madhya 20.140
1676|TEXT 140
1677|TEXT
1678|sd ó±ý×ÃÃNh ÆlNrà uRmNt±á ôÂh ó±lþ h
1679|uRmNt±á ÆýÃÃNî ðRÃÐm Õ±ó¿d óh±lþ N 140 N
1680|dhana paile yaiche sukha-bhoga phala paya
1681|sukha-bhoga haite duhkha apani palaya
1682|SYNONYMS
1683|dhana paile-when one gets riches; yaiche-just as; sukha-
>|bhoga-enjoyment of happiness; phala-result; paya-one gets;
>|sukha-bhoga-real enjoyment of happiness; haite-from; duhkha-
>|all distresses; apani-themselves; palaya-run away.
1684|TRANSLATION
1685|"When one actually becomes rich, he naturally enjoys all
>|kinds of happiness. When one is actually in a happy mood,
>|all distressful conditions go away by themselves. No
>|extraneous endeavor is needed.
1686|Madhya 20.141
1687|TEXT 141
1688|TEXT
1689|ÆîÂNrà t¿MÃ-ôÂNh LÔÁNøž Λ¶÷ nÂ×óæÃlþ h
1690|Λ¶N÷ LÔÁøž±¦¤±ðà ÆýÃÃNh tõ d±ú ó±lþ N 141 N
1691|taiche bhakti-phale krsne prema upajaya
1692|preme krsnasvada haile bhava nasa paya
1693|SYNONYMS
1694|taiche-similarly; bhakti-phale-by the result of devotional
>|service; krsne-unto Lord Krsna; prema-love; upajaya-arises;
>|preme-in devotional love; krsna-asvada-tasting the
>|association of Lord Krsna; haile-when there is; bhava-the
>|distress of the repetition of birth and death; nasa-
>|annihilation; paya-obtains.
1695|TRANSLATION
1696|"Similarly, as a result of bhakti, one's dormant love for
>|Krsna awakens. When one is so situated that he can taste
>|the association of Lord Krsna, material existence, the
>|repetition of birth and death, comes to an end.
1697|Madhya 20.142
1698|TEXT 142
1699|TEXT
1700|ðñ¿õþ^I-d±ú, tõŽÂlþ,–Λ¶N÷õþ 'ôÂh' dlþ h
1701|Λ¶÷uRm-Ît±á–÷RmI ›¶Nlþ±æÃd ýÃÃlþ N 142 N
1702|daridrya-nasa, bhava -ksaya ,-premera 'phala' naya
1703|prema-sukha-bhoga-mukhya prayojana haya
1704|SYNONYMS
1705|daridrya-nasa-the end of poverty-stricken life; bhava-ksaya-
>|annihilation of material existence; premera-of love of
>|Godhead; phala-the result; naya-certainly is not; prema-
>|sukha-bhoga-enjoyment of the happiness of love of God;
>|mukhya-chief; prayojana-goal of life; haya-is.
1706|TRANSLATION
1707|"The goal of love of Godhead is not to become materially
>|rich or free from material bondage. The real goal is to be
>|situated in devotional service to the Lord and to enjoy
>|transcendental bliss.
1708|PURPORT
1709|The results of devotional service are certainly not
>|material benefits or liberation from material bondage. The
>|goal of devotional service is to be eternally situated in
>|the loving service of the Lord and to enjoy spiritual bliss
>|from that service. One is said to be in a poverty-stricken
>|condition when one forgets the Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead. One has to end such a life of poverty in order to
>|automatically end the miserable conditions of material
>|existence. One is automatically liberated from material
>|enjoyment when one tastes the service of Krsna. One does
>|not have to endeavor separately for opulence. Opulence
>|automatically comes to the pure devotee, even though he
>|does not desire material happiness.
1710|Madhya 20.143
1711|TEXT 143
1712|TEXT
1713|ÎõðÃú±N¦a LÁNýÃà u¥¤g, Õ¿tÂNslþ, ›¶Nlþ±æÃd h
1714|LÔÁøž, LÔÁøžt¿MÃ, Λ¶÷,–¿îd ÷ýÃñsd N 143 N
1715|veda-sastre kahe sambandha, abhidheya, prayojana
1716|krsna, krsna-bhakti, prema,-tina maha-dhana
1717|SYNONYMS
1718|veda-sastre-in the Vedic literature; kahe-it is said;
>|sambandha-relationship; abhidheya-execution; prayojana
>|-goal; krsna-Lord Krsna; krsna-bhakti-devotional
>|service to the Lord; prema-love of Godhead; tina-these
>|three; maha-dhana-the supreme treasure.
1719|TRANSLATION
1720|"In the Vedic literatures, Krsna is the central point of
>|attraction, and His service is our activity. To attain the
>|platform of love of Krsna is life's ultimate goal.
>|Therefore Krsna, Krsna's service and love of Krsna are the
>|three great riches of life.
1721|Madhya 20.144
1722|TEXT 144
1723|TEXT
1724|Îõðñ¿ðà uLÁh ú±N¦a LÔÁøž–÷RmI u¥¤g h
1725|îD±õþ :±Nd Õ±dRø¸N/ l±lþ ÷±lþ±õg N 144 N
1726|vedadi sakala sastre krsna-mukhya sambandha
1727|tanra jnane anusange yaya maya-bandha
1728|SYNONYMS
1729|veda-adi-beginning with the Vedas; sakala-all; sastre-in
>|the revealed scriptures; krsna-Lord Krsna; mukhya-chief;
>|sambandha-central point or central attraction; tanra jnane-
>|by knowledge of Him; anusange-simultaneously; yaya-goes
>|away; maya-bandha-the bondage of material existence.
1730|TRANSLATION
1731|"In all revealed scriptures, beginning with the Vedas, the
>|central point of attraction is Krsna. When complete
>|knowledge of Him is realized, the bondage of maya, the
>|illusory energy, is automatically broken.
1732|Madhya 20.145
1733|TEXT 145
1734|TEXT
1735|õI±N÷±ýÃñlþ aõþ±aõþuI æÃáîÂN(tm)¦ Îî óRõþ±í±á÷±-
1736|(tm)¦±S î±N÷õ ¿ýÃà Îðõî±S óõþ¿÷LÁ±S æÊc LÁŠ±õ¿s h
1737|¿uX±N(tm)L óRdNõþLÁ Ûõ tÂáõ±dA ¿õøRžÐ u÷(tm)¦±á÷-
1738|õI±ó±Nõþø¸R ¿õNõaÂdõI¿îÂLÁõþS dNNîÂø¸R ¿d(NlþNî N 145 N
1739|vyamohaya caracarasya jagatas te te puranagamas
1740| tam tam eva hi devatam paramikam jalpantu kalpavadhi
1741|siddhante punar eka eva bhagavan visnuh samastagama-
1742| vyaparesu vivecana-vyatikaram nitesu nisciyate
1743|SYNONYMS
1744|vyamohaya-to increase the illusion and ignorance; cara-
>|acarasya-of all living entities, moving and nonmoving;
>|jagatah-of the world; te te-those respective; purana-the
>|supplementary Vedic literatures called the Puranas; agamah-
>|and Vedas; tam tam-that respective; eva hi-certainly;
>|devatam-demigod; paramikam-as supreme; jalpantu-let them
>|speak about; kalpa-avadhi-until the end of the millennium;
>|siddhante-in conclusion; punah-but; ekah-one; eva-only;
>|bhagavan-Supreme Personality of Godhead; visnuh-Lord Visnu;
>|samasta-all; agama-of the Vedas; vyaparesu-in the dealings;
>|vivecana-vyatikaram-to collective consideration; nitesu-
>|when forcibly brought; nisciyate-is established.
1745|TRANSLATION
1746|"'There are many types of Vedic literatures and
>|supplementary Puranas. In each of them there are particular
>|demigods who are spoken of as the chief demigods. This is
>|just to create an illusion for moving and nonmoving living
>|entities. Let them perpetually engage in such imaginations.
>|However, when one analytically studies all these Vedic
>|literatures collectively, he comes to the conclusion that
>|Lord Visnu is the one and only Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead.'
1747|PURPORT
1748|This is a verse from the Padma Purana.
1749|Madhya 20.146
1750|TEXT 146
1751|TEXT
1752|÷RmI-ÎáNí-õÔ¿MÃÃ, ¿LÁSõ± Õi¤lþ-õI¿îÂNõþNLÁ h
1753|ÎõNðõþ ›¶¿îÂ:± ÎLÁõh LÁýÃÃNlþ LÔÁøžNLÁ N 146 N
1754|mukhya-gauna-vrtti, kimva anvaya-vyatireke
1755|vedera pratijna kevala kahaye krsnake
1756|SYNONYMS
1757|mukhya-chief; gauna-secondary; vrtti-meaning; kimva-or;
>|anvaya-vyatireke-directly or indirectly; vedera pratijna-
>|ultimate declaration of the Vedas; kevala-only; kahaye-
>|speaks; krsnake-about Krsna.
1758|TRANSLATION
1759|"When one accepts the Vedic literature by interpretation or
>|even by dictionary meaning, directly or indirectly the
>|ultimate declaration of Vedic knowledge points to Lord
>|Krsna.
1760|Madhya 20.147–148
1761|TEXTS 147–148
1762|TEXT
1763|¿LÁS ¿õsNMÃà ¿LÁ÷±aÂN(c)† ¿LÁ÷dÓðÃI ¿õLÁŠNlþR h
1764|ý×ÃÃîÂIuI± ý+ðÃlþS Îh±NLÁ d±NdI± ÷NZðà LÁ(d N 147 N
1765|÷±S ¿õsNMÃÕÃÿtÂsNMÃà ÷±S ¿õLÁŠI±Nó±ýÃÃINî ýÃÃIýÃÃ÷A h
1766|Ûî±õ±dA uõSNõðñnSÐ ús Õ±¦š±lþ ÷±S ¿tÂðñ÷A h
1767|÷±lþ±÷±S÷dÓðÃI±N(tm)L ›¶¿î¿ø¸sI ›¶uNðÿî N 148 N
1768|kim vidhatte kim acaste
1769| kim anudya vikalpayet
1770|ity asya hrdayam loke
1771| nanyo mad veda kascana
1772|mam vidhatte 'bhidhatte mam
1773| vikalpyapohyate hy aham
1774|etavan sarva-vedarthah
1775| sabda asthaya mam bhidam
1776|maya-matram anudyante
1777| pratisidhya prasidati
1778|SYNONYMS
1779|kim-what; vidhatte-direct; kim-what; acaste-declare; kim-
>|what; anudya-taking as the object; vikalpayet-may
>|conjecture; iti-thus; asyah-of the Vedic literature;
>|hrdayam-intention; loke-in this world; na-not; anyah-other;
>|mat-than Me; veda-knows; kascana-anyone; mam-Me; vidhatte-
>|they ordain; abhidhatte-set forth; mam-Me; vikalpya-
>|speculating; apohyate-am fixed; hi-certainly; aham-I;
>|etavan-of such measures; sarva-veda-arthah-the purport of
>|the Vedas; sabdah-the Vedas; asthaya-taking shelter of; mam-
>|Me; bhidam-different; maya-illusory energy; matram-only;
>|anudya-saying; ante-at the end; pratisidhya-driving away;
>|prasidati-gets satisfaction.
1780|TRANSLATION
1781|"[Lord Krsna said:] 'What is the purpose of all Vedic
>|literatures? On whom do they focus? Who is the object
>|of all speculation? Outside of Me no one knows these things.
>| Now you should know that all these activities are aimed at
>|ordaining and setting forth Me. The purpose of the Vedic
>|literatures is to know Me by different speculations, either
>|by indirect understanding or by dictionary understanding.
>|Everyone is speculating about Me. The essence of all Vedic
>|literatures is to distinguish Me from maya. By considering
>|the illusory energy, one comes to the platform of
>|understanding Me. In this way one becomes free from
>|speculation about the Vedas and comes to Me as the
>|conclusion. Thus one is satisfied.'
1782|PURPORT
1783|These two verses are quoted from Srimad-Bhagavatam (11.21.
>|42–43). When Uddhava asked Krsna about the purpose of Vedic
>|speculation, the Lord informed him of the process of
>|understanding the Vedic literature. The Vedas are composed
>|of karma-kanda, jnana-kanda and upasana-kanda. one who
>|analytically studies the purpose of the Vedas
>|understands that by karma-kanda, sacrificial activity, one
>|comes to the conclusion of jnana-kanda, speculative
>|knowledge , and that after speculation one comes to the
>|conclusion that worship of the Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead is the ultimate. When one comes to this conclusion,
>|he becomes fully satisfied.
1784|Madhya 20.149
1785|TEXT 149
1786|TEXT
1787|LÔÁNøžõþ ¦¤õþ+ó–Õd(tm)L, Æõtõ–Õó±õþ h
1788|¿aÂ26ÿMÃ, ÷±lþ±ú¿MÃ, æÃNõú¿Mà ձõþ N 149 N
1789|krsnera svarupa-ananta, vaibhava-apara
1790|cic-chakti, maya-sakti, jiva-sakti ara
1791|SYNONYMS
1792|krsnera svarupa -the transcendental form of Krsna;
>|ananta-unlimitedly expanded; vaibhava-opulence; apara-
>|unlimited; cit-sakti-internal potency; maya-sakti-external
>|potency; jiva-sakti-marginal potency; ara-and.
1793|TRANSLATION
1794|"The transcendental form of Lord Krsna is unlimited and
>|also has unlimited opulence. He possesses the internal
>|potency, external potency and marginal potency.
1795|Madhya 20.150
1796|TEXT 150
1797|TEXT
1798|ÆõLRÁF, õrpÁ±Gáí–ú¿M-LÁ±lS ýÃÃlþ h
1799|¦¤õþ+óú¿Mà ú¿MÃ-LÁ±NlSõþ–LÔÁøž u÷±|lþ N 150 N
1800|vaikuntha, brahmanda-gana-sakti-karya haya
1801|svarupa-sakti sakti-karyera-krsna samasraya
1802|SYNONYMS
1803|vaikuntha-the spiritual world; brahmanda-gana-universes of
>|the material world; sakti-karya haya-they are all
>|activities of Krsna's potencies; svarupa-sakti-of the
>|internal potency; sakti-karyera-of the activities of the
>|external potency; krsna-Lord Krsna; samasraya-the original
>|source.
1804|TRANSLATION
1805|"the material and the spiritual world are
>|transformations of Krsna's external and internal potencies
>|respectively. Therefore Krsna is the original source of
>|both the material and the spiritual manifestations.
1806|Madhya 20.151
1807|TEXT 151
1808|TEXT
1809|ðÃúN÷ ðÃú÷S hŽÂI÷±¿|î±|lþ-¿õ¢¶ýÃÃ÷A h
1810|MLÔÁøž±mIS óõþS s±÷ æÃáX±÷ d÷±¿÷ îÂR N 151 N
1811|dasame dasamam laksyam
1812| asritasraya-vigraham
1813|sri-krsnakhyam param dhama
1814| jagad-dhama namami tat
1815|SYNONYMS
1816|dasame-in the Tenth Canto; dasamam-the tenth subject matter;
>| laksyam-to be seen; asrita-of the sheltered; asraya-of the
>|shelter; vigraham-who is the form; sri-krsna-akhyam-known
>|as Lord Sri Krsna; param-supreme; dhama-abode; jagat-dhama-
>|the abode of the universes; namami-I offer my obeisances;
>|tat-to Him.
1817|TRANSLATION
1818|"'The Tenth Canto of Srimad-Bhagavatam reveals the tenth
>|object, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is the
>|shelter of all surrendered souls. He is known as Sri Krsna,
>|and He is the ultimate source of all the universes. Let me
>|offer my obeisances unto Him.'
1819|PURPORT
1820|This is a quotation from the Bhavartha-dipika, Sridhara
>|Svami's commentary on Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.1.1). In the
>|Tenth Canto of Srimad-Bhagavatam there is a description of
>|the asraya-tattva, Sri Krsna. There are two tattvas-asraya-
>|tattva and asrita-tattva. Asraya-tattva is the objective,
>|and asrita-tattva is the subjective. Since the lotus feet
>|of Lord Sri Krsna are the shelter of all devotees, Sri
>|Krsna is called param dhama. In the Bhagavad-gita (10.12)
>|it is stated , param brahma param dhama pavitram paramam
>|bhavan. Everything is resting under the lotus feet of Krsna.
>| In Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.14.58) it is stated:
1821|samasrita ye pada-pallava-plavam
1822| mahat-padam punya-yaso murareh
1823|Under the lotus feet of Sri Krsna, the entire mahat-tattva
>|is existing. Since everything is under Sri Krsna's
>|protection, Sri Krsna is called asraya-tattva. Everything
>|else is called asrita-tattva. The material creation is also
>|called asrita-tattva. Liberation from material bondage and
>|the attainment of the spiritual platform are also asrita-
>|tattva. Krsna is the only asraya-tattva. In the beginning
>|of the creation there are Maha-Visnu, Garbhodakasayi Visnu
>|and Ksirodakasayi Visnu. They are also asraya-tattva. Krsna
>|is the cause of all causes (sarva-karana-karanam [Bs. 5.1]).
>| To understand Krsna perfectly, one has to make an
>|analytical study of asraya-tattva and asrita-tattva.
1824|Madhya 20.152
1825|TEXT 152
1826|TEXT
1827|LÔÁNøžõþ ¦¤õþ+ó-¿õa±õþ qd, ud±îd h
1828|ÕZlþ:±d-îÂN, õrNæà õrNæÃfdµd N 152 N
1829|krsnera svarupa-vicara suna, sanatana
1830|advaya-jnana-tattva, vraje vrajendra-nandana
1831|SYNONYMS
1832|krsnera-of Lord Krsna; svarupa-vicara-consideration of the
>|eternal form; suna-please hear; sanatana-My dear Sanatana;
>|advaya-jnana-tattva-the Absolute Truth without duality;
>|vraje-in Vrndavana; vrajendra-nandana-the son of Nanda
>|Maharaja.
1833|TRANSLATION
1834|"O Sanatana, please hear about the eternal form of Lord
>|Krsna. He is the Absolute Truth, devoid of duality but
>|present in Vrndavana as the son of Nanda Maharaja.
1835|Madhya 20.153
1836|TEXT 153
1837|TEXT
1838|uõS-Õ±¿ðÃ, uõS-ÕSúN, ¿LÁNú±õþ-Îúmõþ h
1839|¿aÂðñdµ-ÎðÃýÃÃ, uõS±|lþ, uNõS«õþ N 153 N
1840|sarva-adi, sarva-amsi, kisora-sekhara
1841|cid-ananda-deha, sarvasraya, sarvesvara
1842|SYNONYMS
1843|sarva-adi-origin of everything; sarva-amsi-sum total of all
>|parts and parcels; kisora-sekhara-the supreme youth; cit-
>|ananda-deha-a body of spiritual blissfulness; sarva-asraya-
>|shelter of everyone; sarva-isvara-the master of everyone.
1844|TRANSLATION
1845|"Krsna is the original source of everything and the sum
>|total of everything. He appears as the supreme youth, and
>|His whole body is composed of spiritual bliss. He is the
>|shelter of everything and master of everyone.
1846|PURPORT
1847|Krsna is the origin of all visnu-tattvas, including Maha-
>|Visnu, Garbhodakasayi Visnu and Ksirodakasayi Visnu. He is
>|the ultimate goal of Vaisnava philosophy. Everything
>|emanates from Him. His body is completely spiritual and is
>|the source of all spiritual being. Although He is the
>|source of everything, He Himself has no source. Advaitam
>|acyutam anadim ananta-rupam/ adyam purana-purusam nava-
>|yauvanam ca [Bs. 5.33]. Although He is the supreme source
>|of everyone, He is still always a fresh youth.
1848|Madhya 20.154
1849|TEXT 154
1850|TEXT
1851|T«õþÐ óõþ÷Ð LÔÁøžÐ u¿2aÂðñdµ¿õ¢¶ýÃÃÐ h
1852|Õd±¿ðõþ±¿ðÃNáS±¿õµÐ uõSLÁ±õþíLÁ±õþí÷A N 154 N
1853|isvarah paramah krsnah
1854| sac-cid-ananda-vigrahah
1855|anadir adir govindah
1856| sarva-karana-karanam
1857|SYNONYMS
1858|isvarah-the controller; paramah-supreme; krsnah-Lord Krsna;
>|sat-eternal existence; cit-absolute knowledge; ananda-
>|absolute bliss; vigrahah-whose form; anadih-without
>|beginning; adih-the origin; govindah-Lord Govinda; sarva-
>|karana-karanam-the cause of all causes.
1859|TRANSLATION
1860|"'Krsna, who is known as Govinda, is the supreme
>|controller. He has an eternal, blissful, spiritual body. He
>|is the origin of all. He has no other origin, for He is the
>|prime cause of all causes.'
1861|PURPORT
1862|This is the first verse of the Fifth Chapter of the Brahma-
>|samhita.
1863|Madhya 20.155
1864|TEXT 155
1865|TEXT
1866|¦¤lþS tÂáõ±dA LÔÁøž, 'Î᱿õµ' óõþ d±÷ h
1867|uÍõS«lSóÓíS lD±õþ Îá±hLÁ–¿dîÂIs±÷ N 155 N
1868|svayam bhagavan krsna, 'govinda' para nama
1869|sarvaisvarya-purna yanra goloka-nitya-dhama
1870|SYNONYMS
1871|svayam -personally; bhagavan-the Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead; krsna-Krsna; govinda-Govinda; para nama-another
>|name; sarva-aisvarya-purna-full of all opulences; yanra-
>|whose; goloka-Goloka Vrndavana; nitya-dhama-eternal abode.
1872|TRANSLATION
1873|"The original Supreme Personality of Godhead is Krsna. His
>|original name is Govinda. He is full of all opulences, and
>|His eternal abode is known as Goloka Vrndavana.
1874|Madhya 20.156
1875|TEXT 156
1876|TEXT
1877|ÛNî a±SúLÁh±Ð óRSuÐ LÔÁøžd tÂáõ±dA ¦¤lþ÷A h
1878|ý×ÃÃf±¿õþõI±LRÁhS Îh±LÁS ÷ÔnÂllþ¿(tm)L lRNá lRNá N 156 N
1879|ete camsa-kalah pumsah
1880| krsnas tu bhagavan svayam
1881|indrari-vyakulam lokam
1882| mrdayanti yuge yuge
1883|SYNONYMS
1884|ete-these; ca-and; amsa-plenary portions; kalah-parts of
>|plenary portions; pumsah-of the purusa-avataras; krsnah-
>|Lord Krsna; tu-but; bhagavan-the Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead; svayam-Himself; indra-ari-the enemies of Lord
>|Indra; vyakulam-full of; lokam-the world; mrdayanti-make
>|happy; yuge yuge-at the right time in each age.
1885|TRANSLATION
1886|"'All these incarnations of Godhead are either plenary
>|portions or parts of the plenary portions of the purusa-
>|avataras. But Krsna is the Supreme Personality of Godhead
>|Himself. In every age He protects the world through His
>|different features when the world is disturbed by the
>|enemies of Indra.'
1887|PURPORT
1888|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.3.28). See
>|also Adi-lila, Chapter Two, verse 67.
1889|Madhya 20.157
1890|TEXT 157
1891|TEXT
1892|:±d, Îl±á, t¿MÃ,–¿îd u±sNdõþ õNú h
1893|õrpÁ, Õ±R±, tÂáõ±dA–¿S¿õs ›¶LÁ±Nú N 157 N
1894|jnana, yoga, bhakti,-tina sadhanera vase
1895|brahma, atma, bhagavan-trividha prakase
1896|SYNONYMS
1897|jnana-knowledge; yoga-mystic power; bhakti-devotional
>|service; tina-three; sadhanera-of the processes of
>|spiritual life; vase-under the control; brahma-impersonal
>|Brahman; atma-localized Paramatma; bhagavan-the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead; tri-vidha prakase-three kinds of
>|manifestation.
1898|TRANSLATION
1899|"There are three kinds of spiritual processes for
>|understanding the Absolute Truth-the processes of
>|speculative knowledge, mystic yoga and bhakti-yoga.
>|According to these three processes, the Absolute Truth is
>|manifested as Brahman, Paramatma or Bhagavan.
1900|Madhya 20.158
1901|TEXT 158
1902|TEXT
1903|õðÿ(tm)L îÂMÃÃN¿õðÃ(tm)¦NS læAà :±d÷Zlþ÷A h
1904|õrNpÁ¿î óõþ÷±NR¿î tÂáõ±¿d¿î úsINî N 158 N
1905|vadanti tat tattva-vidas
1906| tattvam yaj jnanam advayam
1907|brahmeti paramatmeti
1908| bhagavan iti sabdyate
1909|SYNONYMS
1910|vadanti-they say; tat-that; tattva-vidah-learned souls;
>|tattvam-the Absolute Truth; yat-which; jnanam-knowledge;
>|advayam-nondual; brahma-Brahman; iti-thus; paramatma-
>|Paramatma; iti-thus; bhagavan-Bhagavan; iti-thus; sabdyate-
>|is known.
1911|TRANSLATION
1912|"'Learned transcendentalists who know the Absolute Truth
>|call this nondual substance Brahman, Paramatma or Bhagavan.'
1913|PURPORT
1914|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.2.11).
>|
1915|Those who are interested in the impersonal Brahman
>|effulgence, which is not different from the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead, can attain that goal by speculative
>|knowledge. Those who are interested in practicing mystic
>|yoga can attain the localized aspect of Paramatma. As
>|stated in the Bhagavad-gita (18.61), isvarah sarva-
>|bhutanam hrd-dese 'rjuna tisthati: the Supreme Personality
>|of Godhead is situated within the heart as Paramatma. He
>|witnesses the activities of the living entities and gives
>|them permission to act.
1916|For a further explanation, see Adi-lila, Chapter Two, verse
>|11.
1917|Madhya 20.159
1918|TEXT 159
1919|TEXT
1920|ÂõrpÁ–Õ/LÁ±¿(tm)L îD±õþ, ¿d¿õSNúø¸ ›¶LÁ±Nú h
1921|uÓlS Îld aÂ÷SaÂNŽÂ ÎæÃI±¿îÂ÷Slþ t±Nu N 159 N
1922|brahma-anga-kanti tanra, nirvisesa prakase
1923|surya yena carma-cakse jyotirmaya bhase
1924|SYNONYMS
1925|brahma-the impersonal Brahman effulgence; anga-kanti-the
>|bodily rays; tanra-of Him; nirvisesa-without varieties;
>|prakase-manifestation; surya yena-exactly like the sun;
>|carma-cakse-with our ordinary material eyes; jyotih-maya-
>|simply effulgent; bhase-appears.
1926|TRANSLATION
1927|"The manifestation of the impersonal Brahman effulgence,
>|which is without variety, is the rays of Krsna's bodily
>|effulgence. It is exactly like the sun. When the sun is
>|seen by our ordinary eyes, it appears to consist
>|simply of effulgence.
1928|Madhya 20.160
1929|TEXT 160
1930|TEXT
1931|luI ›¶t± ›¶tõNî± æÃáðÃGNLÁ±¿iÂ-
1932|ÎLÁ±¿iÂø¸3Núø¸õuRs±¿ðÿõtÓ¿î¿tÂi§÷A h
1933|îÂðAõrpÁ ¿d(c)¨h÷d(tm)L÷NúøtÓÂîÂS
1934|Î᱿õµ÷±¿ðóRø¸S îÂ÷ýÃÃS tÂæñ¿÷ h 160 N
1935|yasya prabha prabhavato jagad-anda-koti-
1936| kotisv asesa-vasudhadi-vibhuti-bhinnam
1937|tad brahma niskalam anantam asesa-bhutam
1938| govindam adi-purusam tam aham bhajami
1939|SYNONYMS
1940|yasya-of whom; prabha-the effulgence; prabhavatah-of one
>|who excels in power; jagat-anda-of universes; koti-kotisu-
>|in millions and millions; asesa-unlimited; vasudha-adi-with
>|planets and other manifestations; vibhuti-with opulences;
>|bhinnam-becoming variegated; tat-that; brahma-Brahman;
>|niskalam-without parts; anantam-unlimited; asesa-bhutam-
>|being complete; govindam-Lord Govinda; adi-purusam-the
>|original person; tam-Him; aham-I; bhajami-worship.
1941|TRANSLATION
1942|"'I worship Govinda, the primeval Lord, who is endowed
>|with great power. The glowing effulgence of His
>|transcendental form is the impersonal Brahman, which is
>|absolute, complete and unlimited and which displays the
>|varieties of countless planets, with their different
>|opulences, in millions and millions of universes.'
1943|PURPORT
1944|This verse is quoted from the Brahma-samhita (5.40). For an
>|explanation, refer to Adi-lila, Chapter Two, verse 14.
1945|Madhya 20.161
1946|TEXT 161
1947|TEXT
1948|óõþ÷±R± ÎlDNýÃñ, ÎîDÂNýÃñ LÔÁNøžõþ ÛLÁ ÕSú h
1949|Õ±R±õþ 'Õ±R±' ýÃÃlþ LÔÁøž uõS-ÕõîÂSu N 161 N
1950|paramatma yenho, tenho krsnera eka amsa
1951|atmara 'atma' haya krsna sarva-avatamsa
1952|SYNONYMS
1953|paramatma-the Supersoul within the heart; yenho-who; tenho-
>|He; krsnera-of Lord Krsna; eka-one; amsa-plenary portion;
>|atmara-of the soul; atma-the soul; haya-is; krsna-Lord
>|Krsna; sarva-of everything; avatamsa-source.
1954|TRANSLATION
1955|"The Paramatma, the Supersoul feature, is a
>|plenary portion of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who
>|is the original soul of all living entities.
>|Krsna is the source of the Paramatma.
1956|Madhya 20.162
1957|TEXT 162
1958|TEXT
1959|LÔÁøžN÷d÷Nõ¿ýÃà Q÷±R±d÷¿mh±Rd±÷A h
1960|æÃá¿Xî±lþ Îu±•óIS ÎðÃýÃÃNõ±t±¿î ÷±lþlþ± N 162 N
1961|krsnam enam avehi tvam
1962| atmanam akhilatmanam
1963|jagad-dhitaya so 'py atra
1964| dehivabhati mayaya
1965|SYNONYMS
1966|krsnam-in the Supreme Personality of Godhead; enam-this;
>|avehi-just try to understand; tvam-you; atmanam-the soul;
>|akhila-atmanam-of all living entities; jagat-hitaya -the
>|benefit of the whole universe; sah-He; api-certainly; atra-
>|here; dehi-a human being; iva-like; abhati-appears; mayaya-
>|by His internal potency.
1967|TRANSLATION
1968|"'You should know Krsna to be the original soul of all
>|atmas [living entities]. For the benefit of the whole
>|universe, He has, out of His causeless mercy, appeared as
>|an ordinary human being. He has done this by the strength
>|of His own internal potency.'
1969|PURPORT
1970|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.14.55).
>|Pariksit Maharaja asked Sukadeva Gosvami why Krsna was so
>|beloved by the residents of Vrndavana, who loved Him even
>|more than their own offspring or life itself. At that time
>|Sukadeva Gosvami replied that everyone's atma, or soul, is
>|very, very dear, especially to all living entities who have
>|accepted material bodies. But that atma, the spirit
>|soul, is part and parcel of Krsna. For this reason, Krsna
>|is very dear to every living entity. Everyone's body is
>|very dear to oneself, and one wants to protect the body by
>|all means because within the body the soul is living. Due
>|to the intimate relationship between the soul and the body,
>|the body is important and dear to everyone. Similarly, the
>|soul, being part and parcel of Krsna, the Supreme Lord, is
>|very, very dear to all living entities. Unfortunately, the
>|soul forgets his constitutional position and thinks he is
>|only the body (deha-atma- buddhi ). Thus the soul is
>|subjected to the rules and regulations of material nature.
>|When a living entity, by his intelligence, reawakens his
>|attraction for Krsna, he can understand that he is not the
>|body but part and parcel of Krsna. Thus filled with
>|knowledge, he no longer labors under attachment to the body
>|and everything related to the body. janasya moho 'yam aham
>|mameti [SB 5.5.8]. Material existence, wherein one thinks,
>|"I am the body, and this belongs to me," is also illusory.
>|One must redirect his attraction to Krsna. Srimad-
>|Bhagavatam (1.2.7) states:
1971|vasudeve bhagavati bhakti-yogah prayojitah
1972|janayaty asu vairagyam jnanam ca yad
>|ahaitukam
1973|"By rendering devotional service unto the Personality of
>|Godhead, Sri Krsna, one immediately acquires causeless
>|knowledge and detachment from the world."
1974|Madhya 20.163
1975|TEXT 163
1976|TEXT
1977|Õnõ± õUÍdNîd ¿LÁS :±Nîd îõ±æRSÃd h
1978|¿õ(c)†tÂI±ýÃÿ÷ðÃS LÔÁR¦§N÷LÁ±SNúd ¿¦šNî± æÃáR N 163 N
1979|atha va bahunaitena
1980| kim jnatena tavarjuna
1981|vistabhyaham idam krtsnam
1982| ekamsena sthito jagat
1983|SYNONYMS
1984|atha va-or; bahuna-much; etena-with this; kim-what use;
>|jnatena-being known; tava-by you; arjuna-O Arjuna;
>|vistabhya-pervading; aham-I; idam-this; krtsnam-entire; eka-
>|amsena-with one portion; sthitah-situated; jagat-universe.
1985|TRANSLATION
1986|"'But what need is there, Arjuna, for all this detailed
>|knowledge? With a single fragment of Myself I pervade and
>|support this entire universe.'
1987|PURPORT
1988|This is a quotation from the Bhagavad-gita (10.42).
1989|Madhya 20.164
1990|TEXT 164
1991|TEXT
1992|'tÂNMÃI' tÂáõ±Ndõþ ÕdRtõ–óÓíSõþ+ó h
1993|ÛLÁý×Ãà ¿õ¢¶NýÃà îD±õþ Õd(tm)L ¦¤õþ+ó N 164 N
1994|'bhaktye' bhagavanera anubhava-purna-rupa
1995|eka-i vigrahe tanra ananta svarupa
1996|SYNONYMS
1997|bhaktye-by devotional service; bhagavanera-of the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead; anubhava-perception; purna-rupa-
>|perfectly; eka-i-one; vigrahe-in the transcendental form;
>|tanra-His; ananta-unlimited; svarupa -expansions of
>|plenary portions.
1998|TRANSLATION
1999|"Only by devotional activity can one understand the
>|transcendental form of the Lord, which is perfect in all
>|respects. Although His form is one, He can expand His form
>|into unlimited numbers by His supreme will.
2000|Madhya 20.165
2001|TEXT 165
2002|TEXT
2003|¦¤lþSõþ+ó, îÂNðÃLÁ±Rõþ+ó, Õ±Nõú–d±÷ h
2004|›¶nN÷ý×Ãà ¿îdõþ+Nó õþNýÃÃd tÂáõ±dA N 165 N
2005|svayam -rupa, tad-ekatma-rupa, avesa-nama
2006|prathamei tina-rupe rahena bhagavan
2007|SYNONYMS
2008|svayam -rupa-the original form; tat-ekatma-rupa-the
>|same form, nondifferent from svayam-rupa; avesa-especially
>|empowered; nama-named; prathamei-in the beginning; tina-
>|rupe-in three forms; rahena-remains; bhagavan-the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead.
2009|TRANSLATION
2010|"The Supreme Personality of Godhead exists in three
>|principal forms-svayam-rupa, tad-ekatma-rupa and avesa-
>|rupa.
2011|PURPORT
2012|Srila Rupa Gosvami has described the svayam-rupa in his
>|Laghu-bhagavatamrta, Purva-khanda, verse 12 : ananyapeksi
>|yad rupam svayam-rupah sa ucyate . "The form of
>|the Supreme Personality of Godhead that does not depend on
>|other forms is called the svayam-rupa,
>|the original form." This form is also described in Srimad-
>|Bhagavatam: krsnas tu bhagavan svayam (1.3.28). "Krsna is
>|the original form of the Supreme Personality of Godhead."
>|That Krsna's form as a cowherd boy in Vrndavana is the
>|original form of the Personality of Godhead (svayam-rupa )
>| is confirmed in the Brahma-samhita (5.1):
2013|isvarah paramah krsnah sac-cid-ananda-vigrahah
2014|anadir adir govindah sarva- karana- karanam
2015|There is nothing superior to Govinda. He is the
>|ultimate source and the cause of all causes. This is also
>|confirmed in the Bhagavad-gita (7.7), where the Lord says,
>|mattah parataram nanyat: "There is no truth superior to Me."
2016|The tad- ekatma- rupa forms are also described in
>|the Laghu-bhagavatamrta (Purva-khanda, verse 14):
2017|yad rupam tad
>|-
>|abhedena
>| svarupena virajate
2018|akrtyadibhir anyadrk sa tad
>|-ekatma-rupakah
2019|"The tad-ekatma-rupa forms exist simultaneously with
>|the svayam-rupa form and are nondifferent. At the same time,
>| their bodily features and specific activities appear to be
>|different." The tad- ekatma-rupa forms are divided into
>|two categories-svamsa and vilasa.
2020|Lord Krsna's avesa forms are also explained in the
>|Laghu-bhagavatamrta (Purva 18):
2021|jnana-sakty-adi-kalaya yatravisto janardanah
2022|ta avesa nigadyante jiva eva mahattamah
2023|"A living entity who is
>|specifically empowered by the Lord with knowledge or
>|strength is technically called avesa-rupa ." As stated in
>|the Caitanya-caritamrta (Antya 7. 11), krsna -sakti
>|vina nahe tara pravartana: Unless a devotee is
>|specifically empowered by the Lord, he cannot preach the
>|holy name of the Lord all over the
>|world. This is an
>|explanation of the word avesa -rupa.
2024|Madhya 20.166
2025|TEXT 166
2026|TEXT
2027|'¦¤lþSõþ+ó' '¦¤lþS›¶LÁ±ú,'–ðRÃý×Ãà õþ+Nó ¦£Ó¿îS h
2028|¦¤lþSõþ+Nó–ÛLÁ 'LÔÁøž' õrNæà Îá±ó÷Ó¿îS N 166 N
2029|'svayam-rupa' 'svayam -prakasa'-dui rupe sphurti
2030|svayam-rupe-eka 'krsna' vraje gopa-murti
2031|SYNONYMS
2032|svayam -rupa-the original form of the Lord; svayam -
>|prakasa-the personal manifestation; dui rupe-in two forms;
>|sphurti-exhibition; svayam-rupe-in the original form; eka-
>|one; krsna-Krsna, the Supreme Personality of Godhead; vraje-
>|in Vrndavana; gopa-murti-the cowherd boy.
2033|TRANSLATION
2034|"The original form of the Lord [svayam-rupa] is exhibited
>|in two forms-svayam-rupa and svayam-prakasa. In His
>|original form as svayam-rupa, Krsna is observed as a
>|cowherd boy in Vrndavana.
2035|Madhya 20.167
2036|TEXT 167
2037|TEXT
2038|'›¶±tõ-Æõtõ'-õþ+Nó ¿Z¿õs ›¶LÁ±Nú h
2039|ÛLÁ-õóR õU õþ+ó ÆlNrà ÆýÃÃh õþ±Nu N 167 N
2040|'prabhava-vaibhava'-rupe dvividha prakase
2041|eka-vapu bahu rupa yaiche haila rase
2042|SYNONYMS
2043|prabhava-prabhava; vaibhava-vaibhava; rupe-in forms; dvi-
>|vidha prakase -twofold manifestations; eka-vapu-the
>|same original form; bahu rupa-expanded into unlimited
>|numbers; yaiche-like; haila-it was; rase-while dancing in
>|the rasa dance with the gopis.
2044|TRANSLATION
2045|"In His original form, Krsna manifests Himself in two
>|features-prabhava and vaibhava. He expands His one original
>|form into many, as He did during the rasa-lila dance.
2046|Madhya 20.168
2047|TEXT 168
2048|TEXT
2049|÷¿ýÃÃø¸N-¿õõ±NýÃà ÆýÃÃh õU¿õs ÷Ó¿îS h
2050|'›¶±tõ ›¶LÁ±ú'–Ûý×Ãà ú±¦a-óõþ¿u¿X N 168 N
2051|mahisi-vivahe haila bahu-vidha murti
2052|'prabhava prakasa'-ei sastra-parasiddhi
2053|SYNONYMS
2054|mahisi-vivahe-in the matter of marrying 16,108 wives at
>|Dvaraka; haila-there were; bahu-vidha murti-many forms;
>|prabhava prakasa-called prabhava-prakasa; ei-this; sastra-
>|parasiddhi-determined by reference to the revealed
>|scriptures.
2055|TRANSLATION
2056|"When the Lord married 16,108 wives at Dvaraka, He expanded
>|Himself into many forms. These expansions and the
>|expansions at the rasa dance are called prabhava-prakasa,
>|according to the directions of revealed scriptures.
2057|Madhya 20.169
2058|TEXT 169
2059|TEXT
2060|ÎuNtÂlS±¿ðÃ-›¶±lþ Îuý×Ãà LÁ±lþõÓIýÃà dlþ h
2061|LÁ±lþõÓIýÃà ÆýÃÃNh d±õþNðõþ ¿õ¦œlþ d± ýÃÃlþ N 169 N
2062|saubhary-adi-praya sei kaya-vyuha naya
2063|kaya-vyuha haile naradera vismaya na haya
2064|SYNONYMS
2065|saubhari-adi-beginning with the sage named Saubhari; praya-
>|like; sei-that; kaya-vyuha-the expansion of one's body;
>|naya-is not; kaya-vyuha-expansions of the body; haile-if
>|there are; naradera-of Narada Muni; vismaya-the
>|astonishment; na haya-there cannot be.
2066|TRANSLATION
2067|"The prabhava-prakasa expansions of Lord Krsna are not like
>|the expansions of the sage Saubhari. Had they been so,
>|Narada would not have been astonished to see them.
2068|Madhya 20.170
2069|TEXT 170
2070|TEXT
2071|¿aÂSS õÍîÂîÂNðÃNLÁd õóRø¸± lRáóR óÔnLAÁ h
2072|áÔNýÃÃø¸R ZI(c)†u±ýÃæÚS ¿¦alþ ÛLÁ nÂ×ðñõýÃÃR N 170 N
2073|citram bataitad ekena
2074| vapusa yugapat prthak
2075|grhesu dvy-asta-sahasram
2076| striya eka udavahat
2077|SYNONYMS
2078|citram-wonderful; bata-oh; etat-this; ekena-with one;
>|vapusa-form; yugapat-simultaneously; prthak-separately;
>|grhesu-in the houses; dvi-asta-sahasram-sixteen thousand;
>|striyah-all the queens; ekah-the one Sri Krsna; udavahat-
>|married.
2079|TRANSLATION
2080|"'It is astounding that Lord Sri Krsna, who is one without
>|a second, expanded Himself in sixteen thousand similar
>|forms to marry sixteen thousand queens in their respective
>|homes.'
2081|PURPORT
2082|This verse is spoken by Narada Muni in Srimad-Bhagavatam (
>|10.69.2).
2083|Madhya 20.171
2084|TEXT 171
2085|TEXT
2086|Îuý×Ãà õóR, Îuý×Ãà ձLÔÁ¿î óÔnLÁA l¿ðà t±Nu h
2087|t±õ±Nõú-ÎtÂNðà d±÷ 'Æõtõ›¶LÁ±Nú' N 171 N
2088|sei vapu, sei akrti prthak yadi bhase
2089|bhavavesa-bhede nama 'vaibhava-prakase'
2090|SYNONYMS
2091|sei vapu-that form; sei akrti-that feature; prthak-
>|different; yadi-if; bhase-appears; bhava-avesa-of the
>|ecstatic emotion; bhede-according to varieties; nama-named;
>|vaibhava-prakase-vaibhava-prakasa.
2092|TRANSLATION
2093|"If one form or feature is differently manifested according
>|to different emotional features, it is called vaibhava-
>|prakasa.
2094|Madhya 20.172
2095|TEXT 172
2096|TEXT
2097|Õd(tm)L ›¶LÁ±Nú LÔÁNøžõþ d±¿ýÃà ÷Ó¿îSÂNtÂðà h
2098|Õ±LÁ±õþ-õíS-Õ¦a-ÎtÂNðà d±÷-¿õNtÂðà N 172 N
2099|ananta prakase krsnera nahi murti-bheda
2100|akara-varna-astra-bhede nama-vibheda
2101|SYNONYMS
2102|ananta prakase-in innumerable manifestations; krsnera-of
>|Lord Krsna; nahi-there is not; murti-bheda-difference of
>|form; akara-of features; varna-of color; astra-of weapons;
>|bhede-according to differentiation; nama-vibheda-difference
>|of names.
2103|TRANSLATION
2104|"When the Lord expands Himself in innumerable forms, there
>|is no difference in the forms, but due to different
>|features, bodily colors and weapons, the names are
>|different.
2105|Madhya 20.173
2106|TEXT 173
2107|TEXT
2108|ÕNdI a uS¦Ô¨î±R±Nd± ¿õ¿sd±¿t¿ýÃÃNîd Îî h
2109|læÿ(tm)L Qijlþ±b¦±S Æõ õU÷ÓNîSÂILÁ÷Ó¿îSÂLÁ÷A N 173 N
2110|anye ca samskrtatmano
2111| vidhinabhihitena te
2112|yajanti tvan-mayas tvam vai
2113| bahu- murty eka-murtikam
2114|SYNONYMS
2115|anye-different persons; ca-also; samskrta-atmanah-persons
>|who are purified; vidhina-by the regulative principles;
>|abhihitena-stated in the revealed scriptures; te-such
>|persons; yajanti-worship; tvat-mayah-being absorbed in You;
>|tvam-You; vai-certainly; bahu-murti-having many forms; eka-
>|murtikam-although one.
2116|TRANSLATION
2117|"'In different Vedic scriptures, there are prescribed
>|rules and regulative principles for worshiping different
>|types of forms. When one is purified by these rules and
>|regulations, he worships You, the Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead. Although manifested in many forms, You are one.'
2118|PURPORT
2119|This verse is quoted from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.40.7). In
>|the Vedas it is stated that the one becomes many (eko bahu
>|syam). The Supreme Personality of Godhead expands Himself
>|in various forms-visnu-tattva, jiva-tattva and sakti-tattva.
2120|According to the Vedic literatures, there are different
>|regulative principles for the worship of each of these
>|forms. If one takes advantage of the Vedic literatures and
>|purifies himself by following the rules and regulations,
>|ultimately he worships the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
>|Krsna. Krsna says in the Bhagavad-gita (4.11): mama
>|vartmanuvartante manusyah partha sarvasah. Worship of the
>|demigods is in a sense worship of the Supreme Personality
>|of Godhead, but such worship is said to be avidhi-purvakam,
>|improper. Actually demigod worship is meant for
>|unintelligent men. One who is intelligent considers the
>|words of the Supreme Personality of Godhead: sarva dharman
>|parityajya mam ekam saranam vraja [Bg. 18.66]. One who
>|worships demigods worships the Supreme Lord indirectly, but
>|according to the revealed scriptures, there is no need to
>|worship Him indirectly. One can worship Him directly.
2121|Madhya 20.174
2122|TEXT 174
2123|TEXT
2124|Æõtõ›¶LÁ±ú LÔÁNøžõþ–Mõhõþ±÷ h
2125|õíS÷±S-ÎtÂðÃ, uõ–LÔÁNøžõþ u÷±d N 174 N
2126|vaibhava-prakasa krsnera-sri-balarama
2127|varna-matra-bheda, saba-krsnera samana
2128|SYNONYMS
2129|vaibhava-prakasa-manifestation of the vaibhava feature;
>|krsnera-of Lord Krsna; sri-balarama-Sri Balarama; varna-
>|matra-color only; bheda-difference; saba-everything;
>|krsnera samana-equal to Krsna.
2130|TRANSLATION
2131|"The first manifestation of the vaibhava feature of Krsna
>|is Sri Balaramaji. Sri Balarama and Krsna have different
>|bodily colors, but otherwise Sri Balarama is equal to Krsna
>|in all respects.
2132|PURPORT
2133|To understand the difference between svayam-rupa, tad-
>|ekatma-rupa, avesa, prabhava and vaibhava, Srila
>|Bhaktivinoda Thakura has given the following description.
>|In the beginning, Krsna has three bodily features: (1)
>|svayam-rupa, as a cowherd boy in Vrndavana; (2) tad-ekatma-
>|rupa, which is divided into svamsaka and vilasa; and (3)
>|avesa-rupa. The svamsaka, or expansions of the personal
>|potency, are (1) Karanodakasayi, Garbhodakasayi,
>|Ksirodakasayi and (2) incarnations such as the fish,
>|tortoise, boar and Nrsimha. The vilasa-rupa has a prabhava
>|division, including Vasudeva, Sankarsana, Pradyumna and
>|Aniruddha. There is also a vaibhava division, in which
>|there are twenty-four forms, including the second Vasudeva,
>|Sankarsana, Pradyumna and Aniruddha. For each of these,
>|there are three forms; therefore there are twelve forms
>|altogether. These twelve forms constitute the predominant
>|names for the twelve months of the year as well as the
>|twelve tilaka marks on the body. Each of the four
>|Personalities of Godhead expands into two other forms; thus
>|there are eight forms, such as Purusottama, Acyuta, etc.
>|The four forms (Vasudeva, etc.), the twelve (Kesava, etc.),
>|and the eight (Purusottama, etc.) all together constitute
>|twenty-four forms. the forms are differently named in
>|accordance with the placement of the weapons They hold in
>|Their four hands.
2134|Madhya 20.175
2135|TEXT 175
2136|TEXT
2137|Æõtõ›¶LÁ±ú ÆlNrà ÎðõLÁN-îdRæà h
2138|¿ZtRÂæÃ-¦¤õþ+ó LÁtRÂ, LÁtR ýÃÃlþ aÂîRÂtSRÂæà N 175 N
2139|vaibhava-prakasa yaiche devaki-tanuja
2140|dvibhuja-svarupa kabhu, kabhu haya caturbhuja
2141|SYNONYMS
2142|vaibhava-prakasa-the feature of vaibhava-prakasa; yaiche-
>|just as; devaki-tanuja-the son of Devaki; dvi-bhuja-two-
>|handed; svarupa-form; kabhu-sometimes; kabhu-sometimes;
>|haya-is; catur-bhuja-four-handed.
2143|TRANSLATION
2144|"An example of vaibhava-prakasa is the son of Devaki. He
>|sometimes has two hands and sometimes four hands.
2145|PURPORT
2146|When Lord Krsna took His birth, He appeared outside the
>|womb as four-handed Visnu. Then Devaki and Vasudeva offered
>|their prayers to Him and asked Him to assume His two-handed
>|form. The Lord immediately assumed His two-handed form and
>|ordered that He be transferred to Gokula , on the other
>|side of the river Yamuna.
2147|Madhya 20.176
2148|TEXT 176
2149|TEXT
2150|Îl-LÁ±Nh ¿ZtRÂæÃ, d±÷–Æõtõ›¶LÁ±ú h
2151|aÂîRÂtRSÂæà ÆýÃÃNh, d±÷–›¶±tõ›¶LÁ±ú N 176 N
2152|ye-kale dvibhuja, nama-vaibhava-prakasa
2153|caturbhuja haile, nama-prabhava-prakasa
2154|SYNONYMS
2155|ye-kale dvi-bhuja-when the Lord appears as two-handed; nama-
>|named; vaibhava-prakasa-vaibhava-prakasa; catur-bhuja haile-
>|when He becomes four-handed; nama-named; prabhava-prakasa-
>|prabhava-prakasa.
2156|TRANSLATION
2157|"When the Lord is two-handed He is called vaibhava-prakasa,
>| and when He is four-handed He is called prabhava-prakasa.
2158|Madhya 20.177
2159|TEXT 177
2160|TEXT
2161|¦¤lþSõþ+Nóõþ Îá±óNõú, Îá±ó-Õ¿tÂ÷±d Âh
2162|õ±uRNðÃNõõþ ŽÂ¿Slþ-Îõú, 'Õ±¿÷–ŽÂ¿Slþ'-:±d N 177 N
2163|svayam -rupera gopa-vesa, gopa-abhimana
2164|vasudevera ksatriya-vesa, 'ami-ksatriya'-jnana
2165|SYNONYMS
2166|svayam-rupera-of the original form; gopa-vesa-the dress of
>|a cowherd boy; gopa-abhimana-thinking Himself a cowherd boy;
>| vasudevera-of Vasudeva, the son of Vasudeva and Devaki;
>|ksatriya-vesa-the dress is like that of a ksatriya; ami-I;
>|ksatriya-a ksatriya; jnana-knowledge.
2167|TRANSLATION
2168|"In His original form, the Lord dresses like a cowherd boy
>|and thinks Himself one. When He appears as Vasudeva,
>| the son of Vasudeva and Devaki, His dress and
>|consciousness are those of a ksatriya, a warrior.
2169|Madhya 20.178
2170|TEXT 178
2171|TEXT
2172|ÎuNµlS, U«lS, ÷±sRlS, ÆõðÃ*I-¿õh±u h
2173|õrNæÃfdµNd ý×ÃÃýÃñ Õ¿sLÁ nÂ×~±u N 178 N
2174|saundarya, aisvarya, madhurya, vaidagdhya-vilasa
2175|vrajendra-nandane iha adhika ullasa
2176|SYNONYMS
2177|saundarya-the beauty; aisvarya-the opulence; madhurya-the
>|sweetness; vaidagdhya-vilasa-the intellectual pastimes;
>|vrajendra-nandane-of the son of Nanda Maharaja and Yasoda;
>|iha-all these; adhika ullasa-more jubilant.
2178|TRANSLATION
2179|"When one compares the beauty, opulence, sweetness and
>|intellectual pastimes of Vasudeva, the warrior, to Krsna,
>|the cowherd boy, son of Nanda Maharaja, one sees that Krsna'
>|s attributes are more pleasant.
2180|Madhya 20.179
2181|TEXT 179
2182|TEXT
2183|Î᱿õNµõþ ÷±sRõþN Îðÿm' õ±uRNðÃNõõþ Ύ±t h
2184|Îu ÷±sRõþN Õ±¦¤±¿ðÃNî nÂ×óæÃlþ Îh±t N 179 N
2185|govindera madhuri dekhi' vasudevera ksobha
2186|se madhuri asvadite upajaya lobha
2187|SYNONYMS
2188|govindera-of Lord Govinda; madhuri-the sweetness; dekhi'-
>|seeing; vasudevera-of Vasudeva; ksobha-agitation; se-that;
>|madhuri-sweetness; asvadite-to taste; upajaya-awakens;
>|lobha-greed.
2189|TRANSLATION
2190|"Indeed, Vasudeva is agitated just to see the sweetness of
>|Govinda, and a transcendental greed awakens in Him to enjoy
>|that sweetness.
2191|Madhya 20.180
2192|TEXT 180
2193|TEXT
2194|nÂ×ðAáNíS±3/4³ÃîÂ-÷±sRõþN-ó¿õþ÷huI±tÂNõþhNhuI Î÷
2195|ÆZîÂS ÂýÃÃ(tm)L u÷NŽÂlþdA ÷RUõþNuN ¿aÂSNlþNî a±õþíÐ h
2196|ÎaÂîÂÐ ÎLÁ¿h-LRÁîÓÂýÃÃNh±MÃõþ¿hîÂS uîÂIS uNm ÷±÷LÁS
2197|luI Λ¶ŽÂI ¦¤õþ+óî±S õræõsÓu±õþ+óI÷¿i¤26ÿî N 180 N
2198|udgirnadbhuta-madhuri-parimalasyabhira-lilasya me
2199| dvaitam hanta samiksayan muhur asau citriyate caranah
2200|cetah keli-kutuhalottaralitam satyam sakhe mamakam
2201| yasya preksya svarupatam vraja-vadhu-sarupyam anvicchati
2202|SYNONYMS
2203|udgirna-overflowing; adbhuta-wonderful; madhuri-sweetness;
>|parimalasya-whose fragrance; abhira-of a cowherd boy;
>|lilasya-who has pastimes; me-My; dvaitam-second form; hanta-
>|alas; samiksayan-showing; muhuh-again and again; asau-that;
>|citriyate-is acting like a picture; caranah-dramatic actor;
>|cetah-heart; keli-kutuhala-by longing for pastimes;
>|uttaralitam-greatly excited; satyam-actually; sakhe-O dear
>|friend; mamakam-My; yasya-of whom; preksya-by seeing;
>|svarupatam -similarity to My form; vraja-vadhu-of
>|the damsels of Vrajabhumi; sarupyam-a form like the forms;
>|anvicchati-desires.
2204|TRANSLATION
2205|"'My dear friend, this dramatic actor appears like a
>|second form of My own self. Like a picture, He displays My
>|pastimes as a cowherd boy overflowing with wonderfully
>|attractive sweetness and fragrance, which are so dear to
>|the damsels of Vraja. When I see such a display, My heart
>|becomes greatly excited. I long for such pastimes and
>|desire a form exactly like that of the damsels of Vraja.'
2206|PURPORT
2207|This verse is found in the Lalita-madhava (4.19). It was
>|spoken by Vasudeva in Dvaraka.
2208|Madhya 20.181
2209|TEXT 181
2210|TEXT
2211|÷nRõþ±lþ ÆlNrà ágõSdÔîÂI-ðõþúNd h
2212|óRdÐ Z±õþLÁ±Nî ÆlNrà ¿aÂS-¿õNh±LÁNd N 181 N
2213|mathuraya yaiche gandharva-nrtya-darasane
2214|punah dvarakate yaiche citra-vilokane
2215|SYNONYMS
2216|mathuraya-at Mathura; yaiche-just as; gandharva-nrtya-the
>|dance of the Gandharvas; darasane-by seeing; punah-again;
>|dvarakate-at Dvaraka; yaiche-just as; citra-vilokane-by
>|seeing a picture of Krsna.
2217|TRANSLATION
2218|"One instance of Vasudeva's attraction to Krsna occurred
>|when Vasudeva saw the Gandharva dance at Mathura. Another
>|instance occurred in Dvaraka when Vasudeva was surprised to
>|see a picture of Krsna.
2219|Madhya 20.182
2220|TEXT 182
2221|TEXT
2222|Õó¿õþLÁ¿hîóÓõSÐ LÁ(÷RLÁ±õþLÁ±õþN
2223|¦£RÂõþîR ÷÷ áõþNlþ±Ndø¸ ÷±sRlSóÓõþÐ h
2224|Õlþ÷ýÃÃ÷¿ó ýÃÃ(tm)L Λ¶ŽÂI lS hRtNaÂî±Ð
2225|uõþtÂu÷RóNt±M³ÃS LÁ±÷Nlþ õþ±¿sNLÁõ N 182 N
2226|aparikalita-purvah kas camatkara-kari
2227| sphuratu mama gariyan esa madhurya-purah
2228|ayam aham api hanta preksya yam lubdha-cetah
2229| sarabhasam upabhoktum kamaye radhikeva
2230|SYNONYMS
2231|aparikalita-not experienced; purvah-previously; kah-who;
>|camatkara-kari-causing wonder; sphuratu-manifests; mama-My;
>|gariyan-more great; esah-this; madhurya-purah-abundance of
>|sweetness; ayam-this; aham-I; api-even; hanta-alas; preksya-
>|seeing; yam-which; lubdha-cetah-My mind being bewildered;
>|sarabhasam -impetuously; upabhoktum-to enjoy;
>|kamaye-desire; radhika iva-like Srimati Radharani.
2232|TRANSLATION
2233|"'Who manifests an abundance of sweetness greater than
>|Mine, which has never been experienced before and which
>|causes wonder to all? Alas, I Myself, My mind bewildered
>|upon seeing this beauty, impetuously desire to enjoy it
>|like Srimati Radharani.'
2234|PURPORT
2235|This verse spoken by Vasudeva in Dvaraka is also recorded
>|by Srila Rupa Gosvami in his Lalita-madhava (8.34).
2236|Madhya 20.183
2237|TEXT 183
2238|TEXT
2239|Îuý×Ãà õóR ¿tÂi§±t±Nu ¿LÁrRà ¿tÂi§±LÁ±õþ h
2240|t±õ±Nõú±LÔÁ¿îÂ-ÎtÂNðà 'îÂNðÃLÁ±R' d±÷ îD±õþ N 183 N
2241|sei vapu bhinnabhase kichu bhinnakara
2242|bhavavesakrti-bhede 'tad-ekatma' nama tanra
2243|SYNONYMS
2244|sei vapu-that body; bhinna-abhase-manifested differently;
>|kichu-some; bhinna-akara-bodily differences; bhava-avesa-
>|akrti-forms and transcendental emotions; bhede-by different;
>| tat-ekatma nama-the name is tad-ekatma; tanra-of Krsna.
2245|TRANSLATION
2246|"When that body is a little differently manifested and its
>|features are a little different in transcendental emotion
>|and form, it is called tad-ekatma.
2247|Madhya 20.184
2248|TEXT 184
2249|TEXT
2250|îÂNðÃLÁ±Rõþ+Nó '¿õh±u', '¦¤±Sú'–ðRÃý×Ãà ÎtÂðà h
2251|¿õh±u, ¦¤±SNúõþ ÎtÂNðà ¿õ¿õs ¿õNtÂðà N 184 N
2252|tad-ekatma-rupe 'vilasa', 'svamsa'-dui bheda
2253|vilasa, svamsera bhede vividha vibheda
2254|SYNONYMS
2255|tat-ekatma-rupe-in the form of tad-ekatma; vilasa-pastime;
>|svamsa-personal expansion; dui bheda-two divisions; vilasa-
>|of the pastime expansion; svamsera-of the personal
>|expansion; bhede-by differences; vividha-various; vibheda-
>|distinctions.
2256|TRANSLATION
2257|"In the tad-ekatma-rupa there are pastime expansions [
>|vilasa] and personal expansions [svamsa]. Consequently
>|there are two divisions. According to pastime and personal
>|expansion, there are various differences.
2258|PURPORT
2259|The Lord's vilasa expansions are described in the following
>|verse from the Laghu-bhagavatamrta (1.15):
2260|svarupam anyakaram yat tasya bhati vilasatah
2261|prayenatma-samam saktya sa vilaso nigadyate
2262|"When the Lord displays numerous forms with different
>|features by His inconceivable potency, such forms are
>|called vilasa-vigrahas."
2263|The Lord's svamsa expansions are also described in the
>|Laghu-bhagavatamrta (1.17):
2264|tadrso nyuna-saktim yo vyanakti svamsa iritah
2265|sankarsanadir matsyadir yatha tat-tat-svadhamasu
2266|When a form of Krsna is nondifferent from the original form
>|but is less important and exhibits less potency, it is
>|called svamsa. Examples of svamsa expansions can be found
>|in the quadruple forms of the Lord residing in Their
>|respective places, beginning with Sankarsana, Vasudeva,
>|Pradyumna and Aniruddha, and also in the purusa-avataras,
>|lila-avataras, manvantara-avataras and yuga-avataras.
2267|Madhya 20.185
2268|TEXT 185
2269|TEXT
2270|›¶±tõ-Æõtõ-ÎtÂNðà ¿õh±u–¿Zs±LÁ±õþ h
2271|¿õh±Nuõþ ¿õh±u-ÎtÂð–Õd™L ›¶LÁ±õþ N 185 N
2272|prabhava-vaibhava-bhede vilasa-dvidhakara
2273|vilasera vilasa-bheda-ananta prakara
2274|SYNONYMS
2275|prabhava-vaibhava-bhede-by the differences between prabhava
>|and vaibhava; vilasa-pastime expansion; dvidha-akara-
>|twofold; vilasera-of pastime forms; vilasa-bheda-by the
>|different pastimes; ananta prakara-unlimited varieties.
2276|TRANSLATION
2277|"Again the vilasa forms are divided into twofold categories-
>|prabhava and vaibhava. Again the pastimes of these forms
>|are of unlimited variety.
2278|Madhya 20.186
2279|TEXT 186
2280|TEXT
2281|›¶±tõ¿õh±u–õ±uRNðõ, u‚ø¸Sí h
2282|›¶ðRÃI¥§, Õ¿dX,–÷RmI a±¿õþæÃd N 186 N
2283|prabhava-vilasa-vasudeva, sankarsana
2284|pradyumna, aniruddha,-mukhya cari-jana
2285|SYNONYMS
2286|prabhava-vilasa-the prabhava-vilasa forms; vasudeva-
>|Vasudeva; sankarsana-Sankarsana; pradyumna-Pradyumna;
>|aniruddha-Aniruddha; mukhya cari-jana-the four chief
>|expansions.
2287|TRANSLATION
2288|"The chief quadruple expansions are named Vasudeva,
>|Sankarsana, Pradyumna and Aniruddha. These are called
>|prabhava-vilasa.
2289|Madhya 20.187
2290|TEXT 187
2291|TEXT
2292|õrNæà Îá±ót±õ õþ±N÷õþ, óRANõþ ŽÂ¿Slþ-t±õd h
2293|õíS-Îõú-ÎtÂðÃ, î±Nî '¿õh±u' îD±õþ d±÷ N 187 N
2294|vraje gopa-bhava ramera, pure ksatriya-bhavana
2295|varna-vesa-bheda, tate 'vilasa' tanra nama
2296|SYNONYMS
2297|vraje-in Vrndavana; gopa-bhava-emotion of a cowherd boy;
>|ramera-of Balarama; pure-in Dvaraka; ksatriya-bhavana-the
>|emotion of a ksatriya; varna-vesa-bheda-by differences of
>|dress and color; tate-therefore; vilasa-pastime expansion;
>|tanra nama-His name.
2298|TRANSLATION
2299|"Balarama, who has the same original form as Krsna, is
>|Himself a cowherd boy in Vrndavana, and He also considers
>|Himself a member of the ksatriya race in Dvaraka. Thus His
>|color and dress are different, and He is called a pastime
>|form of Krsna.
2300|Madhya 20.188
2301|TEXT 188
2302|TEXT
2303|Æõtõ›¶LÁ±Nú Õ±õþ ›¶±tõ¿õh±Nu h
2304|ÛLÁý×Ãà ÷ÓNîÂIS õhNðõ t±õ-ÎtÂNðà t±Nu N 188 N
2305|vaibhava-prakase ara prabhava-vilase
2306|eka-i murtye baladeva bhava-bhede bhase
2307|SYNONYMS
2308|vaibhava-prakase-in vaibhava manifestation; ara-and;
>|prabhava-vilase-in the prabhava pastime form; eka-i murtye-
>|in one form; baladeva-Lord Baladeva; bhava-bhede-according
>|to different emotions; bhase-exists.
2309|TRANSLATION
2310|"Sri Balarama is a vaibhava-prakasa manifestation of Krsna.
>|He is also manifested in the original quadruple expansions
>|of Vasudeva, Sankarsana, Pradyumna and Aniruddha. These are
>|prabhava-vilasa expansions with different emotions.
2311|Madhya 20.189
2312|TEXT 189
2313|TEXT
2314|Õ±¿ðÃ-aÂîRÂõÓISýÃÖý×DÃÃýÃñõþ ÎLÁýÃà d±¿ýÃà u÷ h
2315|Õd™L aÂîRÂõÓSIýÃÃáNíõþ ›¶±LÁiÂI-LÁ±õþí N 189 N
2316|adi-catur-vyuha-inhara keha nahi sama
2317|ananta catur-vyuha-ganera prakatya-karana
2318|SYNONYMS
2319|adi-catur-vyuha-the original quadruple group; inhara-of
>|this; keha nahi-no one; sama-equal; ananta-unlimited; catur-
>|vyuha-ganera-of the quadruple expansions; prakatya-of
>|manifestation; karana-the cause.
2320|TRANSLATION
2321|"The first expansion of the caturvyuha, quadruple forms, is
>|unique. There is nothing to compare with Them. These
>|quadruple forms are the source of unlimited quadruple forms.
2322|Madhya 20.190
2323|TEXT 190
2324|TEXT
2325|ÂLÔÁNøžõþ Ûý×Ãà a±¿õþ ›¶±tõ¿õh±u h
2326|Z±õþLÁ±-÷nRõþ±-óRNõþ ¿dîÂI ý×DÃÃýÃñõþ õ±u N 190 N
2327|krsnera ei cari prabhava-vilasa
2328|dvaraka-mathura-pure nitya inhara vasa
2329|SYNONYMS
2330|krsnera-of Lord Krsna; ei-these; cari-four; prabhava-vilasa-
>|prabhava pastime forms; dvaraka-mathura-pure-in the two
>|cities Dvaraka and Mathura; nitya-eternal; inhara-of Them;
>|vasa-the residential quarters.
2331|TRANSLATION
2332|"These four prabhava pastime forms of Lord Krsna reside
>|eternally in Dvaraka and Mathura.
2333|Madhya 20.191
2334|TEXT 191
2335|TEXT
2336|Ûý×Ãà a±¿õþ ÆýÃÃNî a¿õ‰Ãú ÷Ó¿îS óõþLÁ±ú h
2337|Õ¦aNtÂNðà d±÷-ÎtÂð–Æõtõ¿õh±u N 191 N
2338|ei cari haite cabbisa murti parakasa
2339|astra-bhede nama-bheda-vaibhava-vilasa
2340|SYNONYMS
2341|ei cari haite-from these four; cabbisa-twenty-four; murti-
>|forms; parakasa-manifestation; astra-bhede-according to the
>|different weapons; nama-bheda-the difference of names;
>|vaibhava-vilasa-the vaibhava pastime expansions.
2342|TRANSLATION
2343|"From the original quadruple expansions, twenty-four forms
>|are manifested. They differ according to the placement of
>|the weapons in Their four hands. They are called vaibhava-
>|vilasa.
2344|Madhya 20.192
2345|TEXT 192
2346|TEXT
2347|óRdÐ LÔÁøž aÂîRÂõÓI SýÃÃ hÛž± óÓõSõþ+Nó h
2348|óõþNõI±÷-÷NsI ÆõNu d±õþ±lþíõþ+Nó N 192 N
2349|punah krsna catur-vyuha lana purva-rupe
2350|paravyoma-madhye vaise narayana-rupe
2351|SYNONYMS
2352|punah-again; krsna-Krsna; catur-vyuha-the quadruple
>|expansions; lana-taking; purva-rupe-as previously;
>|paravyoma-madhye-in the paravyoma area; vaise-resides;
>|narayana-rupe-in the form of four-handed Narayana.
2353|TRANSLATION
2354|"Lord Krsna again expands, and within the paravyoma, the
>|spiritual sky, He is situated in fullness as the four-
>|handed Narayana, accompanied by expansions of the original
>|quadruple form.
2355|PURPORT
2356|At the top of the paravyoma, the spiritual sky, there is
>|Goloka Vrndavana, which is divided into three parts. Two of
>|the parts, called Mathura and Dvaraka, are the residences
>|of Krsna in His prabhava-vilasa forms. Balarama, Krsna's
>|vaibhava-prakasa, is eternally situated in Gokula. From the
>|quadruple prabhava-vilasa, twenty-four forms of the
>|vaibhava-vilasa are expanded. Each has four hands holding
>|weapons in different positions. The topmost planet in the
>|spiritual sky is Goloka Vrndavana, and below that planet is
>|the spiritual sky itself. In that spiritual sky, Krsna
>|Himself is four-handed and is situated as Narayana.
2357|Madhya 20.193
2358|TEXT 193
2359|TEXT
2360|îD±ýÃñ ÆýÃÃNî óRdÐ aÂîRÂõÓISýÃÃ-óõþLÁ±ú h
2361|Õ±õõþíõþ+Nó a±¿õþ¿ðÃNLÁ lD±õþ õ±u N 193 N
2362|tanha haite punah catur-vyuha-parakasa
2363|avarana-rupe cari-dike yanra vasa
2364|SYNONYMS
2365|tanha haite-from that original catur-vyuha; punah-again;
>|catur-vyuha-parakasa-manifestation of quadruple expansions;
>|avarana-rupe-in the form of a covering; cari-dike-in four
>|directions; yanra-whose; vasa-residence.
2366|TRANSLATION
2367|"Thus the original quadruple forms again manifest
>|Themselves in a second set of quadruple expansions. The
>|residences of these second quadruple expansions cover the
>|four directions.
2368|Madhya 20.194
2369|TEXT 194
2370|TEXT
2371|a±¿õþæÃNdõþ óRdÐ óÔnLAÁ ¿îd ¿îd ÷Ó¿îS h
2372|ÎLÁúõ±¿ðà l±ýÃñ ÆýÃÃNî ¿õh±Nuõþ óÓ¿îS N 194 N
2373|cari-janera punah prthak tina tina murti
2374|kesavadi yaha haite vilasera purti
2375|SYNONYMS
2376|cari-janera-of the original of the four expansions; punah-
>|again; prthak-separate; tina tina-three each; murti-forms;
>|kesava-adi-beginning with Lord Kesava; yaha haite-from
>|which; vilasera purti-the vilasa expansions are fulfilled.
2377|TRANSLATION
2378|"Again these quadruple forms expand three times, beginning
>|with Kesava. That is the fulfillment of the pastime forms.
2379|Madhya 20.195
2380|TEXT 195
2381|TEXT
2382|aÂS±¿ðÃ-s±õþí-ÎtÂNðà d±÷-ÎtÂðà uõ h
2383|õ±uRNðÃNõõþ ÷Ó¿îS–ÎLÁúõ, d±õþ±lþí, ÷±sõ N 195 N
2384|cakradi-dharana-bhede nama-bheda saba
2385|vasudevera murti-kesava, narayana, madhava
2386|SYNONYMS
2387|cakra-adi-of the disc and other weapons; dharana-of holding;
>| bhede-by differences; nama-of names; bheda-differences;
>|saba-all; vasudevera murti-the expansions of Vasudeva;
>|kesava-Kesava; narayana-Narayana; madhava-Madhava.
2388|TRANSLATION
2389|"Out of the catur-vyuha, there are three expansions of each
>|and every form, and They are named differently according to
>|the position of the weapons. The Vasudeva expansions are
>|Kesava, Narayana and Madhava.
2390|Madhya 20.196
2391|TEXT 196
2392|TEXT
2393|u‚ø¸SNíõþ ÷Ó¿îS–Î᱿õµ, ¿õøRž, ÷sRuÓðÃd h
2394|Û ÕdI Î᱿õµ–dNýÃà õrNæfdµd N 196 N
2395|sankarsanera murti-govinda, visnu, madhusudana
2396|e anya govinda-nahe vrajendra-nandana
2397|SYNONYMS
2398|sankarsanera murti-the expansions of Sankarsana; govinda-
>|Govinda; visnu-Visnu; madhusudana -Madhusudana; e-
>|this; anya-another; govinda-Govinda; nahe vrajendra-nandana-
>|not the son of Nanda Maharaja.
2399|TRANSLATION
2400|"The expansions of Sankarsana are Govinda, Visnu and
>|Madhusudana. This Govinda is different from the original
>|Govinda, for He is not the son of Maharaja Nanda.
2401|Madhya 20.197
2402|TEXT 197
2403|TEXT
2404|›¶ðRIN¥§õþ ÷Ó¿îS–¿S¿õS÷, õ±÷d, Msõþ h
2405|Õ¿dNXõþ ÷Ó¿îS–ý+ø¸NNLÁú, ó1/2d±tÂ, ðñN÷±ðõþ N 197 N
2406|pradyumnera murti-trivikrama, vamana, sridhara
2407|aniruddhera murti-hrsikesa, padmanabha, damodara
2408|SYNONYMS
2409|pradyumnera murti-expansions of the form of Pradyumna;
>|trivikrama -Trivikrama; vamana-Vamana; sridhara-
>|Sridhara; aniruddhera murti-expansions of Aniruddha;
>|hrsikesa-Hrsikesa; padmanabha-Padmanabha; damodara-Damodara.
2410|TRANSLATION
2411|"The expansions of Pradyumna are Trivikrama, Vamana and
>|Sridhara. The expansions of Aniruddha are Hrsikesa,
>|Padmanabha and Damodara.
2412|Madhya 20.198
2413|TEXT 198
2414|TEXT
2415|Z±ðÃú-÷±Nuõþ Îðõî±–Ûý×Ãõ±õþ æÃd h
2416|÷±áSúNNø¸S–ÎLÁúõ, ÎóNNø¸–d±õþ±lþí N 198 N
2417|dvadasa-masera devata-ei-bara jana
2418|margasirse -kesava, pause-narayana
2419|SYNONYMS
2420|dvadasa-masera-of the twelve months; devata-predominating
>|Deities; ei-these; bara jana-twelve Personalities of
>|Godhead; marga-sirse-the month of Agrahayana (November–
>|December); kesava-Kesava; pause-the month of Pausa (
>|December –January); narayana-Narayana.
2421|TRANSLATION
2422|"These twelve are the predominating Deities of the twelve
>|months. Kesava is the predominating Deity of Agrahayana,
>|and Narayana is the predominating Deity of Pausa.
2423|Madhya 20.199
2424|TEXT 199
2425|TEXT
2426|÷±Nâõþ Îðõî±–÷±sõ, Î᱿õµ–ô±‰RÃNd h
2427|ÆaÂNS–¿õøRž, Æõú±Nm–M÷sRuÓðÃd N 199 N
2428|maghera devata-madhava, govinda-phalgune
2429|caitre-visnu, vaisakhe-sri-madhusudana
2430|SYNONYMS
2431|maghera devata-the predominating Deity of the month of
>|Magha (January-February); madhava-Madhava; govinda-Govinda;
>|phalgune-in the month of Phalguna (February-March); caitre-
>|in the month of Caitra (March-April); visnu-Lord Visnu;
>|vaisakhe-in the month of Vaisakha (April-May); sri-
>|madhusudana-Madhusudana.
2432|TRANSLATION
2433|"The predominating Deity of the month of Magha is Madhava,
>|and the predominating Deity of the month of Phalguna is
>|Govinda. Visnu is the predominating Deity of Caitra, and
>|Madhusudana is the predominating Deity of Vaisakha.
2434|Madhya 20.200
2435|TEXT 200
2436|TEXT
2437|ÆæÃIN‡Â–¿S¿õS÷, Õ±ø¸±NnÂl–õ±÷d ÎðÃNõú h
2438||±õNí–Msõþ, t±N^–Îðõ ý+ø¸NNLÁú N 200 N
2439|jyaisthe-trivikrama, asadhe-vamana devesa
2440|sravane-sridhara, bhadre-deva hrsikesa
2441|SYNONYMS
2442|jyaisthe-in the month of Jyaistha (May–June); trivikrama-
>|Trivikrama; asadhe-in the month of Asadha (June –July);
>|vamana deva-isa-Lord Vamana; sravane-in the month of
>|Sravana (July –August); sridhara-Sridhara; bhadre-in the
>|month of Bhadra (August –September); deva hrsikesa-Lord
>|Hrsikesa.
2443|TRANSLATION
2444|"In the month of Jyaistha, the predominating Deity is
>|Trivikrama. In Asadha the Deity is Vamana, in Sravana the
>|Deity is Sridhara, and in Bhadra the Deity is Hrsikesa.
2445|Madhya 20.201
2446|TEXT 201
2447|TEXT
2448|Õ±¿«Nd–ó1/2d±tÂ, LÁ±¿îSÂNLÁ ðñN÷±ðõþ h
2449|'õþ±s±-ðñN÷±ðõþ' ÕdI õrNæÃf-ÎLÁ±†Ãõþ N 201 N
2450|asvine-padmanabha, kartike damodara
2451|'radha-damodara' anya vrajendra-konara
2452|SYNONYMS
2453|asvine-in the month of Asvina (September–October);
>|padmanabha -Padmanabha; kartike-in the month of
>|Kartika (October –November); damodara-Damodara; radha-
>|damodara-the Damodara of Srimati Radharani; anya-another;
>|vrajendra-konara-the son of Maharaja Nanda.
2454|TRANSLATION
2455|"In the month of Asvina, the predominating Deity is
>|Padmanabha, and in Kartika it is Damodara. This Damodara
>|is different from Radha-Damodara, the son of Nanda Maharaja
>|in Vrndavana.
2456|Madhya 20.202
2457|TEXT 202
2458|TEXT
2459|Z±ðÃú-¿îÂhLÁ-÷La Ûý×Ãà Z±ðÃú d±÷ h
2460|Õ±aÂ÷Nd Ûý×Ãà d±N÷ ¦ó¿úS îÂMÃÃR¦š±d N 202 N
2461|dvadasa-tilaka-mantra ei dvadasa nama
2462|acamane ei name sparsi tat-tat-sthana
2463|SYNONYMS
2464|dvadasa-tilaka-for twelve marks of tilaka; mantra-the
>|mantra; ei-these; dvadasa nama-twelve names; acamane-in
>|washing with water; ei name-with these names; sparsi-we
>|touch; tat-tat-sthana-the respective places.
2465|TRANSLATION
2466|"When putting the twelve tilaka marks on the twelve places
>|of the body, one has to chant the mantra consisting of
>|these twelve Visnu names. After daily worship, when one
>|anoints the different parts of the body with water, these
>|names should be chanted as one touches each part of the
>|body.
2467|PURPORT
2468|While marking the body with tilaka, one should chant the
>|following mantra, which consists oftwelve names
>|of Lord Visnu :
2469|lalate kesavam dhyayen narayanam athodare
2470|vaksah-sthale madhavam tu govindam kantha-kupake
2471|visnum ca daksine kuksau bahau ca
>|madhusudanam
2472|trivikramam kandhare tu vamanam vama- parsvake
2473|sridharam vama -bahau tu hrsikesam tu kandhare
2474|prsthe ca padmanabham ca katyam damodaram nyaset
2475|"When one marks the forehead with tilaka, he must remember
>|Kesava. When one marks the lower abdomen, he must remember
>|Narayana. For the chest, one should remember Madhava, and
>|when marking the hollow of the neck one should remember
>|Govinda. Lord Visnu should be remembered while marking the
>|right side of the belly, and Madhusudana should be
>|remembered when marking the right arm. Trivikrama should be
>|remembered when marking the right shoulder, and Vamana
>|should be remembered when marking the left side of the
>|belly. Sridhara should be remembered while marking the left
>|arm, and Hrsikesa should be remembered when marking the
>|left shoulder. Padmanabha and Damodara should be remembered
>|when marking the back."
2476|Madhya 20.203
2477|TEXT 203
2478|TEXT
2479|Û ý×Ãà a ±¿õþæÃNdõþ ¿õh±u- ÷Ó¿îS Õ
>|±õþ Õ(c)† æÃd h
2480|îD± uõ±õþ d±÷ LÁ¿ýÃÃ, qd ud±îd N 203 N
2481|ei cari-janera vilasa-murti ara asta lana
2482|tan sabara nama kahi, suna sanatana
2483|SYNONYMS
2484|ei cari-janera-of the four personalities; vilasa-murti-
>|pastime forms; ara-more; asta jana-eight personalities; tan
>|sabara-of all of Them; nama-the holy names; kahi-I shall
>|mention; suna-hear; sanatana-O Sanatana.
2485|TRANSLATION
2486|"From Vasudeva, Sankarsana, Pradyumna and Aniruddha, there
>|are eight additional pastime expansions. O Sanatana, please
>|hear Me as I mention Their names.
2487|Madhya 20.204
2488|TEXT 204
2489|TEXT
2490|óRNø¸±MÃÃ÷, ÕaRÂIîÂ, dÔ¿uSýÃÃ, æÃd±ðSÃd h
2491|ÂýÃÿõþ, LÔÁøž, ÕNs±ŽÂæÃ, nÂ×Nóf,–Õ(c)†æÃd N 204 N
2492|purusottama, acyuta, nrsimha, janardana
2493|hari, krsna, adhoksaja, upendra,-asta-jana
2494|SYNONYMS
2495|purusottama-Purusottama; acyuta-Acyuta; nrsimha-Nrsimha;
>|janardana-Janardana; hari-Hari; krsna-Krsna; adhoksaja-
>|Adhoksaja; upendra-Upendra; asta-jana-eight persons.
2496|TRANSLATION
2497|"The eight pastime expansions are Purusottama, Acyuta,
>|Nrsimha, Janardana, Hari, Krsna, Adhoksaja and Upendra.
2498|Madhya 20.205
2499|TEXT 205
2500|TEXT
2501|õ±uRNðÃNõõþ ¿õh±u ðRÃý×ÃÖÕNs±ŽÂæÃ, óRNø¸±M÷ h
2502|u‚ø¸SNíõþ ¿õh±u–nÂ×Nóf, ÕaRÂIî ðRÃý×ÃÃæÃd N 205 N
2503|vasudevera vilasa dui-adhoksaja, purusottama
2504|sankarsanera vilasa-upendra, acyuta dui-jana
2505|SYNONYMS
2506|vasudevera vilasa-the pastime expansions of Vasudeva; dui-
>|two; adhoksaja-Adhoksaja; purusottama-Purusottama;
>|sankarsanera vilasa-the pastime expansions of Sankarsana;
>|upendra-Upendra; acyuta-Acyuta; dui-jana-the two persons.
>|
2507|TRANSLATION
2508|"Of these eight expansions, two are pastime forms of
>|Vasudeva. Their names are Adhoksaja and Purusottama. The
>|two pastime forms of Sankarsana are Upendra and Acyuta.
2509|Madhya 20.206
2510|TEXT 206
2511|TEXT
2512|›¶ðRÃIN¥§õþ ¿õh±u–dÔ¿uSýÃÃ, æÃd±ðSÃd h
2513|Õ¿dNXõþ ¿õh±u–ýÃÿõþ, LÔÁøž ðRÃý×ÃÃæÃd N 206 N
2514|pradyumnera vilasa-nrsimha, janardana
2515|aniruddhera vilasa-hari, krsna dui-jana
2516|SYNONYMS
2517|pradyumnera vilasa-the pastime forms of Pradyumna; nrsimha-
>|Nrsimha; janardana-Janardana; aniruddhera vilasa-the
>|pastime forms of Aniruddha; hari-Hari; krsna-Krsna; dui-
>|jana-the two persons.
2518|TRANSLATION
2519|"The pastime forms of Pradyumna are Nrsimha and Janardana,
>|and the pastime forms of Aniruddha are Hari and Krsna.
2520|Madhya 20.207
2521|TEXT 207
2522|TEXT
2523|Ûý×Ãà a¿õ‰Ãú ÷Ó¿îS–›¶±tõ-¿õh±u ›¶s±d h
2524|Õ¦as±õþí-ÎtÂNðà sNõþ ¿tÂi§ ¿tÂi§ d±÷ N 207 N
2525|ei cabbisa murti-prabhava-vilasa pradhana
2526|astra-dharana-bhede dhare bhinna bhinna nama
2527|SYNONYMS
2528|ei cabbisa murti-all of these twenty-four forms; prabhava-
>|vilasa-pastime forms of the prabhava expansions; pradhana-
>|chief; astra-dharana-of holding the weapons; bhede-in terms
>|of differences; dhare-accept; bhinna bhinna-separate from
>|one another; nama-names.
2529|TRANSLATION
2530|"All these twenty-four forms constitute the chief prabhava-
>|vilasa pastime forms of the Lord. They are named
>|differently according to the position of the weapons in
>|Their hands.
2531|Madhya 20.208
2532|TEXT 208
2533|TEXT
2534|ý×DÃÃýÃñõþ ÷NsI l±ýÃñõþ ýÃÃlþ Õ±LÁ±õþ-Îõú-ÎtÂðà h
2535|Îuý×Ãà Îuý×Ãà ýÃÃlþ ¿õh±u-Æõtõ-¿õNtÂðà N 208 N
2536|inhara madhye yahara haya akara-vesa-bheda
2537|sei sei haya vilasa-vaibhava-vibheda
2538|SYNONYMS
2539|inhara madhye-out of Them all; yahara-of whom; haya-there
>|is; akara-of bodily features; vesa-of dress; bheda-
>|difference; sei sei haya-They are; vilasa-vaibhava-of
>|vaibhava-vilasa; vibheda-the difference.
2540|TRANSLATION
2541|"Of all these, the forms that differ in dress and features
>|are distinguished as vaibhava-vilasa.
2542|Madhya 20.209
2543|TEXT 209
2544|TEXT
2545|ó1/2d±tÂ, ¿S¿õS÷, dÔ¿uSýÃÃ, õ±÷d h
2546|ýÃÿõþ, LÔÁøž Õ±¿ðà ýÃÃlþ 'Õ±LÁ±Nõþ' ¿õhŽÂí N 209 N
2547|padmanabha, trivikrama, nrsimha, vamana
2548|hari, krsna adi haya 'akare' vilaksana
2549|SYNONYMS
2550|padmanabha-Padmanabha; trivikrama-Trivikrama; nrsimha-
>|Nrsimha; vamana-Vamana; hari-Hari; krsna-Krsna; adi-and so
>|on; haya-are; akare vilaksana-different in bodily features.
2551|TRANSLATION
2552|"Of Them, Padmanabha, Trivikrama, Nrsimha, Vamana, Hari,
>|Krsna and so on all have different bodily features.
2553|Madhya 20.210
2554|TEXT 210
2555|TEXT
2556|LÔÁNøžõþ ›¶±tõ¿õh±u–õ±uRNðõ±¿ðà a±¿õþ æÃd h
2557|Îuý×Ãà a±¿õþæÃd±õþ ¿õh±u–¿õSú¿î áíd N 210 N
2558|krsnera prabhava-vilasa-vasudevadi cari jana
2559|sei cari-janara vilasa-vimsati ganana
2560|SYNONYMS
2561|krsnera-of Lord Krsna; prabhava-vilasa-prabhava pastime
>|forms; vasudeva-adi-Vasudeva and others; cari jana-
>|quadruple expansions; sei-those; cari-janara-of the four
>|personalities; vilasa-pastime forms; vimsati ganana-counted
>|as twenty.
2562|TRANSLATION
2563|"Vasudeva and the three others are direct prabhava pastime
>|forms of Lord Krsna. Of these quadruple forms, the pastime
>|expansions are twenty in number.
2564|Madhya 20.211
2565|TEXT 211
2566|TEXT
2567|ý×DÃÃýÃñ-uõ±õþ óÔnLAÁ ÆõLRÁF–óõþNõI±÷-s±N÷ h
2568|óÓõS±¿ðà Õ(c)†¿ðÃNLÁ ¿îd ¿îd SN÷ N 211 N
2569|inha-sabara prthak vaikuntha-paravyoma-dhame
2570|purvadi asta-dike tina tina krame
2571|SYNONYMS
2572|inha-of Them; sabara-of all; prthak-separate; vaikuntha-a
>|Vaikuntha planet; paravyoma-dhame-in the spiritual world;
>|purva-adi-beginning from the east; asta-dike-in the eight
>|directions; tina tina-three in each; krame-in consecutive
>|order.
2573|TRANSLATION
2574|"All these forms preside over different Vaikuntha planets
>|in the spiritual world, beginning from the east in
>|consecutive order. In each of the eight directions, there
>|are three different forms.
2575|Madhya 20.212
2576|TEXT 212
2577|TEXT
2578|lðÃI¿ó óõþNõI±÷ uõ±LÁ±õþ ¿dîÂIs±÷ h
2579|îÂn±¿ó õrpÁ±NG LÁ±Nõþ± LDÁ±NýÃñ u¿i§s±d N 212 N
2580|yadyapi paravyoma sabakara nitya-dhama
2581|tathapi brahmande karo kanho sannidhana
2582|SYNONYMS
2583|yadyapi-although; paravyoma-the spiritual sky; sabakara-of
>|all of Them; nitya-dhama-the eternal abode; tathapi-still;
>|brahmande-in the material universes; karo-of some of Them;
>|kanho-somewhere; sannidhana-the residential places.
2584|TRANSLATION
2585|"Although They all have Their residences eternally in the
>|spiritual sky, some of Them are situated within the
>|material universes.
2586|Madhya 20.213
2587|TEXT 213
2588|TEXT
2589|óõþNõI±÷-÷NsI d±õþ±lþNíõþ ¿dîÂI-¿¦š¿î h
2590|óõþNõI±÷-nÂ×ó¿õþ LÔÁøžNh±NLÁõþ ¿õtR¿î N 213 N
2591|paravyoma-madhye narayanera nitya-sthiti
2592|paravyoma-upari krsnalokera vibhuti
2593|SYNONYMS
2594|paravyoma-madhye-in the spiritual sky; narayanera-of
>|Narayana; nitya-sthiti-eternal residence; paravyoma-upari-
>|in the upper portion of the spiritual sky; krsna-lokera
>|vibhuti-the opulence of the Krsnaloka planet.
2595|TRANSLATION
2596|"There is an eternal residence of Narayana in the spiritual
>|sky. In the upper portion of the spiritual sky is a planet
>|known as Krsnaloka, which is filled with all opulences.
2597|Madhya 20.214
2598|TEXT 214
2599|TEXT
2600|ÛLÁ 'LÔÁøžNh±LÁ' ýÃÃlþ ¿S¿õs›¶LÁ±õþ h
2601|Îá±LRÁh±mI, ÷nRõþ±mI, Z±õþLÁ±mI Õ±õþ N 214 N
2602|eka 'krsnaloka' haya trividha-prakara
2603|gokulakhya, mathurakhya, dvarakakhya ara
2604|SYNONYMS
2605|eka-one; krsna-loka-the planet known as Krsnaloka; haya-
>|there is; tri-vidha-prakara-in three different divisions;
>|gokula-akhya-Gokula; mathura-akhya-Mathura; dvaraka-akhya-
>|Dvaraka; ara-and.
2606|TRANSLATION
2607|"The planet of Krsnaloka is divided into three sections-
>|Gokula, Mathura and Dvaraka.
2608|Madhya 20.215
2609|TEXT 215
2610|TEXT
2611|÷nRõþ±Nî ÎLÁúNõõþ ¿dîÂI u¿i§s±d h
2612|dNh±aÂNh óRNø¸±MÃÃ÷–'æÃái§±n' d±÷ N 215 N
2613|mathurate kesavera nitya sannidhana
2614|nilacale purusottama-'jagannatha' nama
2615|SYNONYMS
2616|mathurate-in Mathura; kesavera-of Lord Kesava; nitya-
>|eternal; sannidhana -residence; nilacale-in
>|Nilacala (Jagannatha Puri); purusottama-Purusottama;
>|jagannatha nama-also known as Jagannatha.
2617|TRANSLATION
2618|"Lord Kesava eternally resides at Mathura, and Lord
>|Purusottama, known by the name Jagannatha, eternally
>|resides at Nilacala.
2619|Madhya 20.216
2620|TEXT 216
2621|TEXT
2622|›¶lþ±Ná ÷±sõ, ÷µ±Nõþ |N÷sRuÓðÃd h
2623|Õ±dµ±õþNíI õ±uRNðõ, ó1/2d±t æÃd±ðSÃd N 216 N
2624|prayage madhava, mandare sri-madhusudana
2625|anandaranye vasudeva, padmanabha janardana
2626|SYNONYMS
2627|prayage-at Prayaga; madhava-Bindu Madhava; mandare-at
>|Mandara-parvata; sri-madhusudana-Sri Madhusudana; ananda-
>|aranye-at the place known as Anandaranya; vasudeva-Lord
>|Vasudeva; padmanabha-Lord Padmanabha; janardana-Lord
>|Janardana.
2628|TRANSLATION
2629|"At Prayaga, the Lord is situated as Bindu Madhava, and at
>|Mandara-parvata, the Lord is known as Madhusudana. Vasudeva,
>| Padmanabha and Janardana reside at Anandaranya.
2630|Madhya 20.217
2631|TEXT 217
2632|TEXT
2633|¿õøRžLÁ±=NNî ¿õøRž, ýÃÿõþ õþNýÃÃ, ÷±lþ±óRNõþ h
2634|UNrà ձõþ d±d± ÷Ó¿îS õrpÁ±G-¿tÂîÂNõþ N 217 N
2635|visnu-kancite visnu, hari rahe, mayapure
2636|aiche ara nana murti brahmanda-bhitare
2637|SYNONYMS
2638|visnu-kancite-at Visnu-kanci; visnu-Lord Visnu; hari-Lord
>|Hari; rahe-remains; mayapure-at Mayapur; aiche-similarly;
>|ara-also; nana-various; murti-forms; brahmanda-bhitare-
>|throughout the universe.
2639|TRANSLATION
2640|"At Visnu-kanci there is Lord Visnu, at Mayapur Lord Hari,
>|and throughout the universe a variety of other forms.
2641|PURPORT
2642|All of these forms are murti forms, and They are worshiped
>|in the temples. Their names are Kesava at Mathura,
>|Purusottama or Jagannatha at Nilacala, Sri Bindu Madhava at
>|Prayaga, Madhusudana at Mandara, and Vasudeva, Padmanabha
>|and Janardana at Anandaranya, which is situated in Kerala,
>|South India. At Visnu-kanci
>| is Lord Varadaraja, and Hari is
>|situated at Mayapur, Lord Caitanya's birth site. Thus
>|in different places throughout the universe there are
>|various Deities in temples bestowing Their causeless mercy
>|upon the devotees. All these Deity forms are nondifferent
>|from the murtis in the spiritual world of the Vaikunthas.
>|Although the arca-murti, the worshipable Deity form of the
>|Lord, appears to be made of material elements, it is as
>|good as the spiritual forms found in the spiritual
>|Vaikunthalokas. The Deity in the temple, however, is
>|visible to the material eyes of the devotee. It is not
>|possible for one in material , conditioned life to see the
>|spiritual form of the Lord. To bestow causeless mercy upon
>|us, the Lord appears as the arca-murti so that we can see
>|Him. It is forbidden to consider the arca-murti to be made
>|of stone or wood. In the Padma Purana it is said:
2643|arcye visnau sila-dhir gurusu nara-matir vaisnave jati-
>|buddhir
2644| visnor va vaisnsnavanam kali-mala-mathane pada-tirthe 'mbu-
>|buddhih
2645|sri-visnor namni mantre sakala-kalusa-he sabda-samanya-
>|buddhir
2646| visnau sarvesvarese tad-itara-sama-dhir yasya va naraki sah
2647|No one should consider the Deity in the temple to be made
>|of stone or wood, nor should one consider the spiritual
>|master an ordinary human being. No one should consider a
>|Vaisnava to belong to a particular caste or creed, and no
>|one should consider caranamrta or Ganges water to be like
>|ordinary water. Nor should anyone consider the Hare Krsna
>|maha-mantra to be a material vibration. All these
>|expansions of Krsna in the material world are simply
>|demonstrations of the Lord's mercy and willingness to give
>|facility to His devotees who are engaged in His devotional
>|service within the material world.
2648|Madhya 20.218
2649|TEXT 218
2650|TEXT
2651|Ûý×ÃÃ÷î ÂõrpÁ±G-÷NsI uõ±õþ 'óõþLÁ±ú' h
2652|u5ZNNó dõmNG lD±ýÃñõþ ¿õh±u N 218 N
2653|ei-mata brahmanda-madhye sabara 'parakasa'
2654|sapta-dvipe nava-khande yanhara vilasa
2655|SYNONYMS
2656|ei-mata-in this way; brahmanda-madhye-within this universe;
>|sabara-of all of Them; parakasa-manifestations; sapta-dvipe-
>|on seven islands; nava-khande-in different sections, nine
>|in number; yanhara vilasa-the pastimes of whom.
2657|TRANSLATION
2658|"Within the universe the Lord is situated in different
>|spiritual manifestations. These are situated on seven
>|islands in nine sections. Thus Their pastimes are going on.
2659|PURPORT
2660|The seven islands are mentioned in the Siddhanta-siromani:
2661|bhumer ardham ksara-sindhor udak-stham
2662| jambu-dvipam prahur acarya-varyah
2663|ardhe 'nyasmin dvipa-satkasya yamye
2664| ksara-ksirady-ambudhinam nivesah
2665|sakam tatah salmalam atra kausam
2666| krauncam ca gomedaka -puskare ca
2667|dvayor dvayor antaram ekam ekam
2668| samudrayor dvipam udaharanti
2669|The seven islands (dvipas) are known as (1) Jambu, (2) Saka,
>| (3) Salmali, (4) Kusa, (5) Kraunca, (6) Gomeda, or Plaksa,
>|and (7) Puskara. The planets are called dvipas. Outer space
>|is like an ocean of air. Just as there are islands in the
>|watery ocean, these planets in the ocean of space are
>|called dvipas, or islands in outer space. There are nine
>|khandas, known as (1) Bharata, (2) Kinnara, (3) Hari, (4)
>|Kuru, (5) Hiranmaya, (6) Ramyaka, (7) Ilavrta, (8)
>|Bhadrasva and (9) Ketumala. These are different parts of
>| Jambudvipa. A valley between two mountains is called a
>|khanda or varsa.
2670|Madhya 20.219
2671|TEXT 219
2672|TEXT
2673|uõSS ›¶LÁ±ú îD±õþ–tÂNMà uRm ¿ðÃNî h
2674|æÃáNîõþ Õs÷S d±¿ú' s÷S ¦š±¿óNî N 219 N
2675|sarvatra prakasa tanra-bhakte sukha dite
2676|jagatera adharma nasi' dharma sthapite
2677|SYNONYMS
2678|sarvatra-everywhere; prakasa-manifestations; tanra-His;
>|bhakte-to the devotees; sukha dite-to give happiness;
>|jagatera-of the material world; adharma-irreligious
>|principles; nasi'-destroying; dharma-religious principles;
>|sthapite-to establish.
2679|TRANSLATION
2680|"The Lord is situated in all the universes in different
>|forms just to please His devotees. Thus the Lord destroys
>|irreligious principles and establishes religious principles.
2681|PURPORT
2682|In the material world, the Lord is situated in different
>|arca-murtis (Deities) in the temples just to decrease the
>|material activities of the conditioned soul and increase
>|his spiritual activities. Particularly in India there are
>|many temples throughout the country. Devotees may take
>|advantage of them and go see the Lord at Jagannatha Puri,
>|Vrndavana, Prayaga, Mathura, Hardwar and Visnu-kanci. When
>|the devotees travel to these places and see the Lord, they
>|become very happy in devotional service.
2683|Madhya 20.220
2684|TEXT 220
2685|TEXT
2686|ý×DÃÃýÃñõþ ÷NsI LÁ±Nõþ± ýÃÃlþ 'Õõî±Nõþ' áíd h
2687|ÆlNrà ¿õøRž, ¿S¿õS÷, dÔ¿uSýÃÃ, õ±÷d N 220 N
2688|inhara madhye karo haya 'avatare' ganana
2689|yaiche visnu, trivikrama, nrsimha, vamana
2690|SYNONYMS
2691|inhara madhye-of Them; karo-of some; haya-there is; avatare-
>|as incarnations; ganana-counting; yaiche-as; visnu-Lord
>|Visnu; trivikrama-Lord Trivikrama; nrsimha-Lord Nrsimha;
>|vamana-Lord Vamana.
2692|TRANSLATION
2693|"Of these forms, some are considered incarnations. Examples
>|are Lord Visnu, Lord Trivikrama, Lord Nrsimha and Lord
>|Vamana.
2694|Madhya 20.221
2695|TEXT 221
2696|TEXT
2697|Õ¦asÔ¿îÂ-ÎtÂðÃ-d±÷–ÎtÂNðõþ LÁ±õþí h
2698|aÂS±¿ðÃ-s±õþí-ÎtÂðà qd, ud±îd N 221 N
2699|astra-dhrti-bheda-nama-bhedera karana
2700|cakradi-dharana-bheda suna, sanatana
2701|SYNONYMS
2702|astra-dhrti-of holding the weapons; bheda-difference; nama-
>|bhedera-of differences of names; karana-the cause; cakra-
>|adi-of weapons, beginning with the disc; dharana-of holding;
>| bheda-differences; suna-please hear; sanatana-O Sanatana.
2703|TRANSLATION
2704|"My dear Sanatana, just hear from Me as I tell you how the
>|different visnu-murtis hold Their weapons, beginning with
>|the disc, and how They are named differently according to
>|the placement of the weapons in Their hands.
2705|Madhya 20.222
2706|TEXT 222
2707|TEXT
2708|ðÿŽÂí±Ns± ýÃÃ(tm)¦ ÆýÃÃNî õ±÷±sÐ ólS(tm)L h
2709|aÂS±¿ðà զas±õþí-áíd±õþ Õ(tm)L N 222 N
2710|daksinadho hasta haite vamadhah paryanta
2711|cakradi astra-dharana-gananara anta
2712|SYNONYMS
2713|daksina-adhah-the lower right; hasta-hand; haite-from; vama-
>|adhah-the lower left hand; paryanta-up to; cakra-adi-
>|beginning with the disc; astra-dharana-of holding the
>|weapons; gananara-of counting; anta-the end.
2714|TRANSLATION
2715|"The procedure for counting begins with the lower right
>|hand and goes to the upper right hand, the upper left hand,
>|and the lower left hand. Lord Visnu is named according to
>|the order of the weapons He holds in His hands.
2716|Madhya 20.223
2717|TEXT 223
2718|TEXT
2719|¿uX±nS-uS¿ýÃÃî± LÁNõþ a¿õ‰Ãú ÷Ó¿îS áíd h
2720|î±õþ ÷Nî LÁ¿ýÃà ձNá aÂS±¿ðÃ-s±õþí N 223 N
2721|siddhartha-samhita kare cabbisa murti ganana
2722|tara mate kahi age cakradi-dharana
2723|SYNONYMS
2724|siddhartha-samhita-the revealed scripture named the
>|Siddhartha-samhita; kare-does; cabbisa-twenty-four; murti-
>|forms; ganana-counting; tara mate-according to the opinion
>|of Siddhartha-samhita; kahi-I shall describe; age-first;
>|cakra-adi-dharana-holding of the weapons, beginning with
>|the disc.
2725|TRANSLATION
2726|"According to the Siddhartha-samhita there are twenty-four
>|forms of Lord Visnu. First I shall describe, according to
>|the opinion of that book, the location of the weapons,
>|beginning with the disc.
2727|PURPORT
2728|The twenty-four forms are (1) Vasudeva, (2) Sankarsana, (3)
>|Pradyumna, (4) Aniruddha, (5) Kesava, (6) Narayana, (7)
>|Madhava, (8) Govinda, (9) Visnu, (10) Madhusudana, (11)
>|Trivikrama, (12) Vamana, (13) Sridhara, (14) Hrsikesa, (15)
>|Padmanabha, (16) Damodara, (17) Purusottama, (18) Acyuta, (
>|19) Nrsimha, (20) Janardana, (21) Hari, (22) Krsna, (23)
>|Adhoksaja and (24) Upendra.
2729|Madhya 20.224
2730|TEXT 224
2731|TEXT
2732|õ±uRNðõ–áðñúºaÂSó1/2sõþ h
2733|u‚ø¸Sí–áðñúºó1/2aÂSLÁõþ N 224 N
2734|vasudeva-gada-sankha-cakra-padma-dhara
2735|sankarsana-gada-sankha-padma-cakra-kara
2736|SYNONYMS
2737|vasudeva-Vasudeva; gada-club; sankha-conchshell; cakra-disc;
>| padma-lotus flower; dhara-holding; sankarsana-Sankarsana;
>|gada-club; sankha-conchshell; padma-lotus flower; cakra-
>|kara-the disc in the hand.
2738|TRANSLATION
2739|"In His lower right hand, Lord Vasudeva holds a club, in
>|the upper right hand a conchshell, in the upper left hand a
>|disc and in the lower left hand a lotus flower. In His
>|lower right hand, Sankarsana holds a club, in His upper
>|right hand a conchshell, in His upper left hand a lotus
>|flower and in His lower left hand a disc.
2740|Madhya 20.225
2741|TEXT 225
2742|TEXT
2743|›¶ðRÃI¥§–aÂSúºáðñó1/2sõþ h
2744|Õ¿dX–aÂSáðñúºó1/2LÁõþ N 225 N
2745|pradyumna-cakra-sankha-gada-padma-dhara
2746|aniruddha-cakra-gada-sankha-padma-kara
2747|SYNONYMS
2748|pradyumna-Lord Pradyumna; cakra-disc; sankha-conch; gada-
>|club; padma-lotus; dhara-holding; aniruddha-Lord Aniruddha;
>|cakra-disc; gada-club; sankha-conch; padma-kara-lotus
>|flower in hand.
2749|TRANSLATION
2750|"Pradyumna holds the disc, conch, club and lotus. Aniruddha
>|holds the disc, club, conch and lotus.
2751|Madhya 20.226
2752|TEXT 226
2753|TEXT
2754|óõþNõI±N÷ õ±uRNðõ±¿ðÖ¿dæà ¿dæà զasõþ h
2755|îD±õþ ÷î LÁ¿ýÃÃ, Îl-uõ Õ¦aLÁõþ N 226 N
2756|paravyome vasudevadi-nija nija astra-dhara
2757|tanra mata kahi, ye-saba astra-kara
2758|SYNONYMS
2759|para-vyome-in the spiritual sky; vasudeva-adi-beginning
>|with Lord Vasudeva; nija nija-Their own respective; astra-
>|dhara-holding of different weapons; tanra mata kahi-I am
>|speaking the opinion of the Siddhartha-samhita; ye-saba-all;
>| astra-kara-weapons in the different hands.
2760|TRANSLATION
2761|"Thus in the spiritual sky the expansions, headed by
>|Vasudeva, hold weapons in Their own respective order. I am
>|repeating the opinion of the Siddhartha-samhita in
>|describing Them.
2762|Madhya 20.227
2763|TEXT 227
2764|TEXT
2765|MNLÁúõ–ó1/2úºaÂSáðñsõþ h
2766|d±õþ±lþí–úºó1/2áðñaÂSsõþ N 227 N
2767|sri-kesava-padma-sankha-cakra-gada-dhara
2768|narayana-sankha-padma-gada-cakra-dhara
2769|SYNONYMS
2770|sri-kesava-Lord Kesava; padma-lotus; sankha-conch; cakra-
>|disc; gada-club; dhara-holding; narayana-Lord Narayana;
>|sankha-conch; padma-lotus; gada-club; cakra-disc; dhara-
>|holding.
2771|TRANSLATION
2772|"Lord Kesava holds the lotus, conch, disc and club. Lord
>|Narayana holds the conch, lotus, club and disc.
2773|Madhya 20.228
2774|TEXT 228
2775|TEXT
2776|M÷±sõ–áðñaÂSúºó1/2LÁõþ h
2777|MN᱿õµ–aÂSáðñó1/2úºsõþ N 228 N
2778|sri-madhava-gada-cakra-sankha-padma-kara
2779|sri-govinda-cakra-gada-padma-sankha-dhara
2780|SYNONYMS
2781|sri-madhava-Lord Madhava; gada-club; cakra-disc; sankha-
>|conch; padma-lotus; kara-in the hands; sri-govinda-Lord
>|Govinda; cakra-disc; gada-club; padma-lotus; sankha-conch;
>|dhara-holding.
2782|TRANSLATION
2783|"Lord Madhava holds the club, disc, conch and lotus. Lord
>|Govinda holds the disc, club, lotus and conch.
2784|Madhya 20.229
2785|TEXT 229
2786|TEXT
2787|¿õøRž÷Ó¿îS–áðñó1/2úºaÂSLÁõþ h
2788|÷sRuÓðÃd–aÂSúºó1/2áðñsõþ N 229 N
2789|visnu-murti-gada-padma-sankha-cakra-kara
2790|madhusudana-cakra-sankha-padma-gada-dhara
2791|SYNONYMS
2792|visnu-murti-Lord Visnu; gada-club; padma-lotus; sankha-
>|conch; cakra-disc; kara-in the hands; madhusudana-Lord
>|Madhusudana; cakra-disc; sankha-conch; padma-lotus; gada-
>|club; dhara-holding.
2793|TRANSLATION
2794|"Lord Visnu holds the club, lotus, conch and disc. Lord
>|Madhusudana holds the disc, conch, lotus and club.
2795|Madhya 20.230
2796|TEXT 230
2797|TEXT
2798|¿S¿õS÷–ó1/2áðñaÂSúºLÁõþ h
2799|Mõ±÷d–úºaÂSáðñó1/2sõþ N 230 N
2800|trivikrama-padma-gada-cakra-sankha-kara
2801|sri-vamana-sankha-cakra-gada-padma-dhara
2802|SYNONYMS
2803|trivikrama-Lord Trivikrama; padma-lotus; gada-club; cakra-
>|disc; sankha-conch; kara-in the hands; sri-vamana-Lord
>|Vamana; sankha-conch; cakra-disc; gada-club; padma-lotus;
>|dhara-holding.
2804|TRANSLATION
2805|"Lord Trivikrama holds the lotus, club, disc and conch.
>|Lord Vamana holds the conch, disc, club and lotus.
2806|Madhya 20.231
2807|TEXT 231
2808|TEXT
2809|Msõþ–ó1/2aÂSáðñúºLÁõþ h
2810|ý+ø¸NNLÁú–áðñaÂSó1/2úºsõþ N 231 N
2811|sridhara-padma-cakra-gada-sankha-kara
2812|hrsikesa-gada-cakra-padma-sankha-dhara
2813|SYNONYMS
2814|sridhara-Lord Sridhara; padma-lotus; cakra-disc; gada-club;
>|sankha-conch; kara-in the hands; hrsikesa-Lord Hrsikesa;
>|gada-club; cakra-disc; padma-lotus; sankha-conch; dhara-
>|holding.
2815|TRANSLATION
2816|"Lord Sridhara holds the lotus, disc, club and conch. Lord
>|Hrsikesa holds the club, disc, lotus and conch.
2817|Madhya 20.232
2818|TEXT 232
2819|TEXT
2820|ó1/2d±t–úºó1/2aÂSáðñLÁõþ h
2821|ðñN÷±ðõþ–ó1/2aÂSáðñúºsõþ N 232 N
2822|padmanabha-sankha-padma-cakra-gada-kara
2823|damodara-padma-cakra-gada-sankha-dhara
2824|SYNONYMS
2825|padmanabha-Lord Padmanabha; sankha-conch; padma-lotus;
>|cakra-disc; gada-club; kara-in the hands; damodara-Lord
>|Damodara; padma-lotus; cakra-disc; gada-club; sankha-conch;
>|dhara-holding.
2826|TRANSLATION
2827|"Lord Padmanabha holds the conch, lotus, disc and club.
>|Lord Damodara holds the lotus, disc, club and conch.
2828|Madhya 20.233
2829|TEXT 233
2830|TEXT
2831|óRNø¸±MÃÃ÷–aÂSó1/2úºáðñsõþ h
2832|MÕaRÂIî–áðñó1/2aÂSúºsõþ N 233 N
2833|purusottama-cakra-padma-sankha-gada-dhara
2834|sri-acyuta-gada-padma-cakra-sankha-dhara
2835|SYNONYMS
2836|purusottama-Lord Purusottama; cakra-disc; padma-lotus;
>|sankha-conch; gada-club; dhara-holding; sri-acyuta-Lord
>|Acyuta; gada-club; padma-lotus; cakra-disc; sankha-conch;
>|dhara-holding.
2837|TRANSLATION
2838|"Lord Purusottama holds the disc, lotus, conch and club.
>|Lord Acyuta holds the club, lotus, disc and conch.
2839|Madhya 20.234
2840|TEXT 234
2841|TEXT
2842|MdÔ¿uSýÃÖaÂSó1/2áðñúºsõþ h
2843|æÃd±ðSÃd–ó1/2aÂSúºáðñLÁõþ N 234 N
2844|sri-nrsimha-cakra-padma-gada-sankha-dhara
2845|janardana-padma-cakra-sankha-gada-kara
2846|SYNONYMS
2847|sri-nrsimha-Lord Nrsimha; cakra-disc; padma-lotus; gada-
>|club; sankha-conch; dhara-holding; janardana-Lord Janardana;
>| padma-lotus; cakra-disc; sankha-conch; gada-club; kara-in
>|the hands.
2848|TRANSLATION
2849|"Lord Nrsimha holds the disc, lotus, club and conch. Lord
>|Janardana holds the lotus, disc, conch and club.
2850|Madhya 20.235
2851|TEXT 235
2852|TEXT
2853|MýÃÿõþ–úºaÂSó1/2áðñLÁõþ h
2854|MLÔÁøž–úºáðñó1/2aÂSLÁõþ N 235 N
2855|sri-hari-sankha-cakra-padma-gada-kara
2856|sri-krsna-sankha-gada -padma-cakra-kara
2857|SYNONYMS
2858|sri-hari-Lord Hari; sankha-conch; cakra-disc; padma-lotus;
>|gada-club; kara-in the hand; sri-krsna-Lord Krsna; sankha-
>|conch; gada-club; padma-lotus; cakra-disc; kara-in the
>|hands.
2859|TRANSLATION
2860|"Sri Hari holds the conch, disc, lotus and club. Lord Sri
>|Krsna holds the conch, club, lotus and disc.
2861|Madhya 20.236
2862|TEXT 236
2863|TEXT
2864|ÕNs±ŽÂæÖó1/2áðñúºaÂSLÁõþ h
2865|nÂ×Nóf–úºáðñaÂSó1/2LÁõþ N 236 N
2866|adhoksaja-padma-gada-sankha-cakra-kara
2867|upendra-sankha-gada-cakra-padma-kara
2868|SYNONYMS
2869|adhoksaja-Lord Adhoksaja; padma-lotus; gada-club; sankha-
>|conch; cakra-disc; kara-in the hands; upendra-Lord
>|Upendra; sankha-conch; gada-club; cakra-disc; padma-lotus;
>|kara-in the hands.
2870|TRANSLATION
2871|"Lord Adhoksaja holds the lotus, club, conch and disc. Lord
>|Upendra holds the conch, club, disc and lotus.
2872|Madhya 20.237
2873|TEXT 237
2874|TEXT
2875|ÂýÃÃlþúNø¸S-ó=õþ±NS LÁNýÃà Îø¸±hæÃd h
2876|î±õþ ÷Nî LÁ¿ýÃà ÛNõ aÂS±¿ðÃ-s±õþí N 237 N
2877|hayasirsa-pancaratre kahe sola-jana
2878|tara mate kahi ebe cakradi-dharana
2879|SYNONYMS
2880|hayasirsa-pancaratre-the revealed scripture named the
>|Hayasirsa-pancaratra; kahe-says; sola-jana-sixteen
>|personalities; tara mate-according to this opinion; kahi-I
>|shall describe; ebe-now; cakra-adi-dharana-the holding of
>|weapons, beginning with the disc.
2881|TRANSLATION
2882|"According to the Hayasirsa-pancaratra, there are sixteen
>|personalities. I shall now describe that opinion of how
>|They hold the weapons.
2883|PURPORT
2884|The sixteen personalities are as follows: (1) Vasudeva, (2)
>|Sankarsana, (3) Pradyumna, (4) Aniruddha, (5) Kesava, (6)
>|Narayana, (7) Madhava, (8) Govinda, (9) Visnu, (10)
>|Madhusudana, (11) Trivikrama, (12) Vamana, (13) Sridhara, (
>|14) Hrsikesa, (15) Padmanabha and (16) Damodara.
2885|Madhya 20.238
2886|TEXT 238
2887|TEXT
2888|ÎLÁúõ-ÎtÂNðà ó1/2úºáðñaÂSsõþ h
2889|÷±sõ-ÎtÂNðà aÂSáðñúºó1/2LÁõþ N 238 N
2890|kesava-bhede padma-sankha-gada-cakra-dhara
2891|madhava-bhede cakra-gada-sankha-padma-kara
2892|SYNONYMS
2893|kesava-bhede-according to the different opinion about Lord
>|Kesava; padma-lotus; sankha-conch; gada-club; cakra-and
>|disc; dhara-holding; madhava-bhede-according to the
>|different opinion about the bodily features of Lord Madhava;
>| cakra-disc; gada-club; sankha-conch; padma-lotus; kara-in
>|the hands.
2894|TRANSLATION
2895|"Kesava is described differently as holding the lotus,
>|conch, club and disc, and Madhava is described as holding
>|the disc, club, conch and lotus in His hands.
2896|Madhya 20.239
2897|TEXT 239
2898|TEXT
2899|d±õþ±lþí-ÎtÂNðà d±d± Õ¦a-ÎtÂðÃ-sõþ h
2900|ý×ÃÃîÂI±¿ðÃLÁ ÎtÂðà Ûý×Ãà uõ Õ¦aLÁõþ N 239 N
2901|narayana-bhede nana astra-bheda-dhara
2902|ityadika bheda ei saba astra-kara
2903|SYNONYMS
2904|narayana-bhede-according to the different opinion about the
>|bodily features of Lord Narayana; nana-various; astra-of
>|weapons; bheda-dhara-differences in holding; iti-adika-in
>|this way; bheda-differentiated; ei saba-all these; astra-
>|kara-weapons in the hands.
2905|TRANSLATION
2906|"According to the Hayasirsa Pancaratra, Narayana and others
>|are also presented differently as holding the weapons in
>|different hands.
2907|Madhya 20.240
2908|TEXT 240
2909|TEXT
2910|'¦¤lþS tÂáõ±d' A, Õ±õþ ' hNh ±- ó
>|RÂNø¸±MÃÃ÷' h
2911|Ûý×Ãà ðRÃý×Ãà d±÷ sNõþ õrNæÃfdµd N 240 N
2912|'svayam bhagavan', ara 'lila-purusottama'
2913|ei dui nama dhare vrajendra-nandana
2914|SYNONYMS
2915|svayam bhagavan-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; ara-and;
>| lila-purusottama-the Lord Purusottama of pastimes; ei dui-
>|these two; nama-names; dhare-takes; vrajendra-nandana-Krsna,
>| the son of Nanda Maharaja.
2916|TRANSLATION
2917|"Krsna, the original Supreme Personality of Godhead,
>|indicated as the son of Maharaja Nanda, has two names. One
>|is svayam bhagavan, and the other is lila-purusottama.
2918|Madhya 20.241
2919|TEXT 241
2920|TEXT
2921|óRõþNõþ Õ±õõþíõþ+Nó óRõþNõþ dõNðÃNú h
2922|dõõÓIýÃõþ+Nó dõ÷Ó¿îS óõþLÁ±Nú N 241 N
2923|purira avarana-rupe purira nava-dese
2924|nava-vyuha-rupe nava-murti parakase
2925|SYNONYMS
2926|purira-of Dvaraka Puri; avarana-rupe-as a covering for the
>|four sides; purira nava-dese-in nine different parts of the
>|city; nava-vyuha-rupe-in nine Deities; nava-murti-nine
>|forms; parakase-manifests.
2927|TRANSLATION
2928|"Lord Krsna personally surrounds Dvaraka-puri as its
>|protector. In different parts of the city, in nine places,
>|He expands in nine different forms.
2929|Madhya 20.242
2930|TEXT 242
2931|TEXT
2932|aÂQ±Nõþ± õ±uRNðõ±ðÃI± d±õþ±lþídÔ¿uSýÃÃNLÁN h
2933|ýÃÃlþ¢¶NNõ± ÷ýÃñNS±NnÂl± õrpÁ± Îa¿î dNõ±¿ðÃî±РN 242 N
2934|catvaro vasudevadya
2935| narayana-nrsimhakau
2936|hayagrivo mahakrodo
2937| brahma ceti navoditah
2938|SYNONYMS
2939|catvarah-four principal protectors; vasudeva-adyah-Vasudeva,
>| Sankarsana, Pradyumna and Aniruddha; narayana-including
>|Lord Narayana; nrsimhakau-as well as Lord Nrsimha;
>|hayagrivah-Lord Hayagriva; mahakrodah-Lord Varaha; brahma-
>|Lord Brahma; ca-also; iti-thus; nava-uditah-nine
>|personalities.
2940|TRANSLATION
2941|"'The nine personalities mentioned are Vasudeva,
>|Sankarsana, Pradyumna, Aniruddha, Narayana, Nrsimha,
>|Hayagriva, Varaha and Brahma.'
2942|PURPORT
2943|This verse is found in the Laghu-bhagavatamrta (1.451). The
>|Brahma mentioned herein is not a living entity. Sometimes,
>|when there is a scarcity of living entities to take charge
>|of Brahma's post, Maha-Visnu expands Himself as Lord Brahma.
>| This Brahma is not considered to be a living entity; He is
>|an expansion of Visnu.
2944|Madhya 20.243
2945|TEXT 243
2946|TEXT
2947|›¶LÁ±ú-¿õh±Nuõþ Ûý×Ãà ÆLÁhRD ¿õõõþí h
2948|¦¤±SNúõþ ÎtÂðà ÛNõ qd, ud±îd N 243 N
2949|prakasa-vilasera ei kailun vivarana
2950|svamsera bheda ebe suna, sanatana
2951|SYNONYMS
2952|prakasa-vilasera-of pastime forms and manifestations; ei-
>|this; kailun-I have made; vivarana-description; svamsera-of
>|personal expansions; bheda-the differences; ebe-now; suna-
>|please hear; sanatana-O Sanatana Gosvami.
2953|TRANSLATION
2954|"I have already described the pastime and prakasa forms.
>|Now please hear about the different personal expansions.
2955|Madhya 20.244
2956|TEXT 244
2957|TEXT
2958|u‚ø¸Sí, ÷RuI±¿ðÃLÁ,–ðRÃý×Ãà ÎtÂðà îD±õþ h
2959|u‚ø¸Sí-óRø¸±õî±õþ, hNh±õî±õþ Õ±õþ N 244 N
2960|sankarsana, matsyadika,-dui bheda tanra
2961|sankarsana-purusavatara, lilavatara ara
2962|SYNONYMS
2963|sankarsana-Sankarsana; matsya-adika-and incarnations such
>|as the fish; dui-two; bheda-differentiations; tanra-His;
>|sankarsana-Sankarsana; purusa-avatara-incarnations of Visnu;
>| lila-avatara-pastime incarnations; ara-and.
2964|TRANSLATION
2965|"The first personal expansion is Sankarsana, and the others
>|are incarnations like the fish incarnation. Sankarsana is
>|an expansion of the Purusa, or Visnu. The incarnations such
>|as Matsya, the fish incarnation, appear in different yugas
>|for specific pastimes.
2966|PURPORT
2967|The purusa-avataras are the Lords of the universal creation.
>| These are Karanodakasayi Visnu, Garbhodakasayi Visnu
>|and Ksirodakasayi Visnu. There are also lila-avataras, and
>|these include (1) Catuhsana , or the four Kumaras, (2)
>|Narada, (3) Varaha, (4) Matsya, (5) Yajna, (6) Nara-
>|Narayana, (7) Kardami Kapila, (8) Dattatreya, (9) Hayasirsa,
>| (10) Hamsa, (11) Dhruvapriya, or Prsnigarbha, (12) Rsabha,
>|(13) Prthu, (14) Nrsimha, (15) Kurma, (16) Dhanvantari, (17)
>| Mohini, (18) Vamana, (19) Bhargava Parasurama, (20)
>|Raghavendra, (21) Vyasa, (22) Pralambari Balarama, (23)
>|Krsna, (24) Buddha and (25) Kalki.
2968|These twenty-five Personalities of Godhead are known as
>|lila-avataras. Because they appear in each day of Brahma,
>|or in each kalpa (millennium), they are sometimes known as
>|kalpa-avataras. Of these incarnations, Hamsa and Mohini are
>|neither permanent nor very well known, but They are
>|listed among the prabhava-avataras. Kapila, Dattatreya,
>|Rsabha, Dhanvantari and Vyasa are eternally situated and
>|very widely known. They are also counted among the prabhava
>|incarnations. Kurma, Matsya, Narayana, Varaha, Hayagriva,
>|Prsnigarbha and Baladeva, the killer of Pralambasura, are
>|counted among the vaibhava-avataras.
2969|Madhya 20.245
2970|TEXT 245
2971|TEXT
2972|Õõî±õþ ýÃÃlþ LÔÁNøžõþ ø¸nÂlA¿õs ›¶LÁ±õþ h
2973|óRø¸±õî±õþ ÛLÁ, hNh±õî±õþ Õ±õþ N 245 N
2974|avatara haya krsnera sad-vidha prakara
2975|purusavatara eka, lilavatara ara
2976|SYNONYMS
2977|avatara-incarnations; haya-there are; krsnera-of Lord Krsna;
>| sat-vidha prakara-six kinds; purusa-avatara-incarnations
>|of Visnu; eka-one; lila-avatara-incarnations for the
>|execution of pastimes; ara-also.
2978|TRANSLATION
2979|"There are six types of incarnations [avataras] of Krsna.
>|One comprises the incarnations of Visnu [purusa-avataras],
>|and another comprises the incarnations meant for the
>|performance of pastimes [lila-avataras].
2980|Madhya 20.246
2981|TEXT 246
2982|TEXT
2983|&í±õî±õþ, Õ±õþ ÷i¤(tm)Lõþ±õî±õþ h
2984|lRá±õî±õþ, Õ±õþ úMÃI±Nõú±õî±õþ N 246 N
2985|gunavatara, ara manvantaravatara
2986|yugavatara, ara saktyavesavatara
2987|SYNONYMS
2988|guna-avatara-the incarnations who control the material
>|qualities; ara-also; manu-antara-avatara-the incarnations
>|associated with the reign of each Manu; yuga-avatara-the
>|incarnations according to different yugas; ara-and; sakti-
>|avesa-avatara-empowered incarnations.
2989|TRANSLATION
2990|"There are incarnations that control the material qualities
>|[guna-avataras], incarnations associated with the reign
>|of each Manu [manvantara-avataras], incarnations in
>|different millenniums [yuga-avataras] and incarnations of
>|empowered living entities [saktyavesa-avataras].
2991|PURPORT
2992|The guna-avataras are three-Lord Brahma, Lord Siva and Lord
>|Visnu (SB 10.88.3). The avataras associated with the
>|reign of each Manu, known as manvantara-avataras, are
>|listed as follows in Srimad-Bhagavatam ( Eighth Canto,
>|chapters 1 , 5 and 13): (1) Yajna, (2) Vibhu, (3)
>|Satyasena, (4) Hari, (5) Vaikuntha, (6) Ajita, (7) Vamana, (
>|8) Sarvabhauma, (9) Rsabha, (10) Visvaksena, (11)
>|Dharmasetu, (12) Sudhama, (13) Yogesvara and (14)
>|Brhadbhanu. All together these are fourteen in
>|number, and of these, Yajna and Vamana are also
>|counted among the lila-avataras. All these manvantara
>|incarnations are sometimes called vaibhava-avataras.
2993|The four yuga-avataras are (1) sukla (white) in Satya-
>|yuga ( SB 11.5.21), (2) rakta (red) in Treta-yuga (
>|SB 11.5.24), (3) syama (dark blue) in Dvapara-yuga (
>| SB 11.5.27) and (4) generally krsna (black) but in
>|special cases pita (yellow) as Caitanya Mahaprabhu in
>|Kali-yuga ( SB 11.5.32 and 10.8.13).
2994|The saktyavesa-avataras are categorized into (1) forms of
>|divine absorption (bhagavad-avesa) , such as Kapiladeva
>|or Rsabhadeva , and (2) divinely empowered forms (
>|saktyavesa), of whom seven are foremost: (1) Sesa Naga in
>|the Vaikuntha world, empowered for the personal service of
>|the Supreme Lord (sva-sevana-sakti), (2) Anantadeva,
>|empowered to bear all the planets within the universe (bhu-
>|dharana-sakti), (3) Lord Brahma, empowered with the energy
>|to create the cosmic manifestation (srsti-sakti), (4)
>|Catuhsana, or the Kumaras, specifically empowered to
>|distribute transcendental knowledge (jnana-sakti), (5)
>|Narada Muni, empowered to distribute devotional service (
>|bhakti-sakti), (6) Maharaja Prthu, specifically empowered
>|to rule and maintain the living entities (palana-sakti) and
>|(7) Parasurama, specifically empowered to cut down rogues
>|and demons (dusta-damana-sakti).
2995|Madhya 20.247
2996|TEXT 247
2997|TEXT
2998|õ±hI, ÎóNáG ýÃÃlþ ¿õ¢¶NýÃõþ s÷S h
2999|Ûîõþ+Nó hNh± LÁNõþd õrNæÃfdµd N 247 N
3000|balya, pauganda haya vigrahera dharma
3001|eta-rupe lila karena vrajendra-nandana
3002|SYNONYMS
3003|balya-childhood; pauganda-boyhood; haya-there are;
>|vigrahera-of the Deity; dharma-characteristics; eta-rupe-in
>|so many forms; lila-pastimes; karena-executes; vrajendra-
>|nandana-Krsna, the son of Nanda Maharaja.
3004|TRANSLATION
3005|"Childhood and boyhood are the typical ages of the Deity.
>|Krsna, the son of Maharaja Nanda, performed His pastimes as
>|a child and as a boy.
3006|Madhya 20.248
3007|TEXT 248
3008|TEXT
3009|Õd(tm)L Õõî±õþ LÔÁNøžõþ, d±¿ýÃÃLÁ áíd h
3010|ú±m±-aÂf-dI±lþ LÁ¿õþ ¿ðÃáAðõþúd N 248 N
3011|ananta avatara krsnera, nahika ganana
3012|sakha-candra-nyaya kari dig-darasana
3013|SYNONYMS
3014|ananta-unlimited; avatara-incarnations; krsnera-of Lord
>|Krsna; nahika ganana-there is no possibility of counting;
>|sakha-candra-nyaya-by the example of the moon and the
>|branches of a tree; kari-I make; dik-darasana-a slight
>|indication.
3015|TRANSLATION
3016|"There are innumerable incarnations of Krsna, and there is
>|no possibility of counting them. We can simply indicate
>|them by giving the example of the moon and the branches of
>|a tree.
3017|PURPORT
3018|Although the moon appears to be located in the branches of
>|a tree, it is actually situated very far away. Similarly,
>|none of the avataras, or incarnations, of Lord Krsna are
>|within this material world, but they are visible by the
>|causeless mercy of the Lord. We should not consider them to
>|belong to this material world. As stated by Lord Krsna in
>|the Bhagavad-gita (Bg. 9.11):
3019|avajananti mam mudha manusim tanum asritam
3020|param bhavam ajananto mama bhuta-mahesvaram
3021|"Fools deride Me when I descend in the human
>|form. They do not know My transcendental nature as the
>|Supreme Lord of all that be."
3022|Avataras descend of their own free will, and although they
>|may act like ordinary human beings, they do not belong to
>|this material world. Lord Krsna and His avataras can be
>|understood only by the grace of the Lord.
3023|nayam atma pravacanena labhyo
3024| na medhaya na bahuna srutena
3025|yam evaisa vrnute tena labhyas
3026| tasyaisa atma vivrnute tanum svam
3027|(Katha Upanisad 1.2.23)
3028|"The Supreme Lord is not obtained by means of expert
>|explanations, vast intelligence or even much hearing. He is
>|obtained only by one whom He Himself chooses. To such a
>|person, He manifests His own form."
3029|athapi te deva padambuja-dvaya-
3030| prasada-lesanugrhita eva hi
3031|janati tattvam bhagavan-mahimno
3032| na canya eko 'pi ciram vicinvan
3033|(SB 10.14.29)
3034|"My Lord, if one is favored by even a slight trace of the
>|mercy of Your lotus feet, he can understand the greatness
>|of Your personality. But those who speculate to understand
>|the Supreme Personality of Godhead are unable to know You,
>|even though they continue studying the Vedas for many years.
>|"
3035|Madhya 20.249
3036|TEXT 249
3037|TEXT
3038|Õõî±õþ± ýÃÃIuSNmIlþ± ýÃÃNõþÐ uN¿dNs¿ZSæñРh
3039|ln±•Ã¿õðñ¿udÐ LRÁhI±Ð uõþuÐ uRIÐ uýÃæÚúÐ N 249 N
3040|avatara hy asankhyeya
3041| hareh sattva-nidher dvijah
3042|yatha 'vidasinah kulyah
3043| sarasah syuh sahasrasah
3044|SYNONYMS
3045|avatarah-all the incarnations; hi-certainly; asankhyeyah-
>|beyond counting; hareh-from the Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead; sattva-nidheh-who is the reservoir of spiritual
>|energy; dvijah-O brahmanas; yatha-as; avidasinah-containing
>|a great reservoir of water; kulyah-small rivulets; sarasah-
>|from a lake; syuh-must be; sahasrasah-by hundreds and
>|thousands of times.
3046|TRANSLATION
3047|"'O learned brahmanas, just as hundreds and thousands of
>|small rivulets issue from great reservoirs of water,
>|innumerable incarnations flow from Sri Hari, the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead and the reservoir of all power.'
3048|PURPORT
3049|This verse is quoted from Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.3.26).
3050|Madhya 20.250
3051|TEXT 250
3052|TEXT
3053|›¶nN÷ý×Ãà LÁNõþ LÔÁøž 'óRRø¸±õî±õþ' h
3054|Îuý×ÃÃî óRø¸ ýÃÃlþ ¿S¿õs ›¶LÁ±õþ N 250 N
3055|prathamei kare krsna 'purusavatara'
3056|seita purusa haya trividha prakara
3057|SYNONYMS
3058|prathamei-in the beginning; kare-does; krsna-Lord Krsna;
>|purusa-avatara-the incarnation of the three Visnus (Maha-
>|Visnu, Garbhodakasayi Visnu and Ksirodakasayi Visnu); seita-
>|that; purusa-Visnu; haya-becomes; tri-vidha prakara -
>|three different manifestations.
3059|TRANSLATION
3060|"In the beginning, Krsna incarnates Himself as the purusa-
>|avataras, or Visnu incarnations. These are of three types.
3061|PURPORT
3062|Up to this verse, the many types of expansions have been
>|described. Now the manifestations of the Lord's different
>|potencies will be described.
3063|Madhya 20.251
3064|TEXT 251
3065|TEXT
3066|¿õNøž±d SN¿í õþ+ó±¿í óRø¸±mI±dINn± ¿õðRÃÐ h
3067|ÛLÁc ÷ýÃÃîÂÐ ¦Ú(c)†Ô ¿ZîÂNlþS QGuS¿¦šîÂ÷A h
3068|îÔÂîÂNlþS uõStÓÂS d :±Q± ¿õ÷RaÂINî N 251 N
3069|visnos tu trini rupani
3070| purusakhyany atho viduh
3071|ekam tu mahatah srastr
3072| dvitiyam tv anda-samsthitam
3073|trtiyam sarva-bhuta-stham
3074| tani jnatva vimucyate
3075|SYNONYMS
3076|visnoh-of Lord Visnu; tu-certainly; trini-three; rupani-
>|forms; purusa-akhyani-celebrated as the purusas; atho-how;
>|viduh-they know; ekam-one of them; tu-but; mahatah srastr-
>|the creator of the total material energy; dvitiyam-the
>|second; tu-but; anda-samsthitam-situated within the
>|universe; trtiyam-the third; sarva-bhuta-stham-within the
>|hearts of all living entities; tani-these three; jnatva-
>|knowing; vimucyate-one becomes liberated.
3077|TRANSLATION
3078|"'Visnu has three forms called purusas. The first, Maha-
>|Visnu, is the creator of the total material energy [mahat],
>|the second is Garbhodasayi, who is situated within each
>|universe, and the third is Ksirodasayi, who lives in the
>|heart of every living being. He who knows these three
>|becomes liberated from the clutches of maya.'
3079|PURPORT
3080|This verse appears in the Laghu-bhagavatamrta (Purva-khanda
>|2 .9), where it has been quoted from the Satvata-tantra.
3081|Madhya 20.252
3082|TEXT 252
3083|TEXT
3084|Õd(tm)Lú¿MÃ-÷NsI LÔÁNøžõþ ¿îd ú¿Mà ›¶s±d h
3085|'ý×ÃÃ26ñú¿MÃ', ':±dú¿MÃ', '¿Slþ±ú¿MÃ' d±÷ N 252 N
3086|ananta-sakti-madhye krsnera tina sakti pradhana
3087|'iccha-sakti', 'jnana-sakti' , 'kriya-sakti' nama
3088|SYNONYMS
3089|ananta-sakti-of unlimited potencies; madhye-in the midst;
>|krsnera-of Lord Krsna; tina-three; sakti-potencies;
>|pradhana-are chief; iccha-sakti-willpower; jnana-sakti-the
>|power of knowledge; kriya-sakti-the creative energy; nama-
>|named.
3090|TRANSLATION
3091|"Krsna has unlimited potencies, out of which three are
>|chief-willpower, the power of knowledge and the creative
>|energy.
3092|Madhya 20.253
3093|TEXT 253
3094|TEXT
3095|ý×ÃÃ26ñú¿MÛ¶s±d LÔÁøž–ý×ÃÃ26ñlþ uõSLÁîÂS± h
3096|:±dú¿MÛ¶s±d õ±uRNðõ Õ¿s‡Â±î± N 253 N
3097|iccha-sakti-pradhana krsna-icchaya sarva-karta
3098|jnana-sakti-pradhana vasudeva adhisthata
3099|SYNONYMS
3100|iccha-sakti-of willpower; pradhana-predominator; krsna-Lord
>|Krsna; icchaya-simply by willing; sarva-karta-the creator
>|of everything; jnana-sakti-pradhana-the predominator of the
>|power of knowledge; vasudeva-Lord Vasudeva; adhisthata-
>|reservoir.
3101|TRANSLATION
3102|"The predominator of the willing potency is Lord Krsna, for
>|by His supreme will everything comes into existence. In
>|willing, there is a need for knowledge, and that knowledge
>|is expressed through Vasudeva.
3103|Madhya 20.254
3104|TEXT 254
3105|TEXT
3106|ý×ÃÃ26ñ-:±d-¿Slþ± ¿õd± d± ýÃÃlþ uÔæÃd h
3107|¿îÂNdõþ ¿îdú¿Mà Î÷¿h' ›¶ó=-õþaÂd N 254 N
3108|iccha-jnana-kriya vina na haya srjana
3109|tinera tina-sakti meli' prapanca-racana
3110|SYNONYMS
3111|iccha-jnana-kriya-thinking, feeling, willing, knowledge and
>|activity; vina-without; na-not; haya-there is; srjana-
>|creation; tinera-of the three; tina-sakti-three potencies;
>|meli'-being amalgamated; prapanca-racana-there is the
>|cosmic manifestation.
3112|TRANSLATION
3113|"There is no possibility of creation without thinking,
>|feeling, willing, knowledge and activity. The combination
>|of the supreme will, knowledge and action brings about the
>|cosmic manifestation.
3114|Madhya 20.255
3115|TEXT 255
3116|TEXT
3117|¿Slþ±ú¿MÛ¶s±d u‚ø¸Sí õhõþ±÷ h
3118|›¶±LÔÁî±›¶±LÔÁîÂ-uÔ¿(c)† LÁNõþd ¿d÷S±í N 255 N
3119|kriya-sakti-pradhana sankarsana balarama
3120|prakrtaprakrta-srsti karena nirmana
3121|SYNONYMS
3122|kriya-sakti-pradhana-the predominator of the creative
>|energy; sankarsana-Lord Sankarsana; balarama-Lord Balarama;
>|prakrta-material; aprakrta-spiritual; srsti-worlds; karena-
>|does; nirmana-creation.
3123|TRANSLATION
3124|"Lord Sankarsana is Lord Balarama. Being the predominator
>|of the creative energy, He creates both the material and
>|the spiritual world.
3125|Madhya 20.256
3126|TEXT 256
3127|TEXT
3128|ÕýñNõþõþ Õ¿s‡Â±î± LÔÁNøžõþ ý×ÃÃ26ñlþ h
3129|Îá±Nh±LÁ, ÆõLRÁF uÔNæà ¿aÂ26ÿMÃZ±õþ±lþ N 256 N
3130|ahankarera adhisthata krsnera icchaya
3131|goloka, vaikuntha srje cic-chakti-dvaraya
3132|SYNONYMS
3133|ahankarera-of egotism; adhisthata-the source, or
>|predominating Deity; krsnera-of Lord Krsna; icchaya-by the
>|will; goloka-the supreme spiritual planet, known as Goloka;
>|vaikuntha-other, lower planets, known as Vaikunthas; srje-
>|creates; cit-sakti-dvaraya-by the spiritual energy.
3134|TRANSLATION
3135|"That original Sankarsana [Lord Balarama] is the cause of
>|both the material and the spiritual creation. He is the
>|predominating Deity of egotism, and by the will of Krsna
>|and the power of the spiritual energy, He creates the
>|spiritual world, which consists of the planet Goloka
>|Vrndavana and the Vaikuntha planets.
3136|Madhya 20.257
3137|TEXT 257
3138|TEXT
3139|lðÃI¿ó ÕuÔæÃI ¿dîÂI ¿aÂ26ÿMÿõh±u h
3140|îÂn±¿ó u‚ø¸Sí-ý×ÃÃ26ñlþ î±ýÃñõþ ›¶LÁ±ú N 257 N
3141|yadyapi asrjya nitya cic-chakti-vilasa
3142|tathapi sankarsana-icchaya tahara prakasa
3143|SYNONYMS
3144|yadyapi-although; asrjya-there is no question of creation;
>|nitya-eternal; cit-sakti-vilasa-pastimes of the eternal
>|spiritual energy; tathapi-still; sankarsana-icchaya-by the
>|will of Sankarsana; tahara-of the spiritual world; prakasa-
>|manifestation.
3145|TRANSLATION
3146|"Although there is no question of creation as far as the
>|spiritual world is concerned, the spiritual world is
>|nonetheless manifested by the supreme will of Sankarsana.
>|The spiritual world is the abode of the pastimes of the
>|eternal spiritual energy.
3147|Madhya 20.258
3148|TEXT 258
3149|TEXT
3150|uýÃæÚóSS LÁ÷hS Îá±LRÁh±mIS ÷ýÃÃRóðÃ÷A h
3151|îÂRLÁ¿íSLÁ±õþS îÂX±÷ îÂðÃd(tm)L±Súuyõ÷A N 258 N
3152|sahasra-patram kamalam
3153| gokulakhyam mahat padam
3154|tat-karnikaram tad-dhama
3155| tad anantamsa-sambhavam
3156|SYNONYMS
3157|sahasra-patram-with thousands of petals; kamalam-resembling
>|a lotus flower; gokula-akhyam-named Gokula; mahat padam-the
>|supreme abode; tat-karnikaram-the whorl of that lotus
>|flower; tat-dhama-the abode of the Lord; tat-that; ananta-
>|amsa-from the expansion of the energy of Ananta; sambhavam-
>|creation.
3158|TRANSLATION
3159|"'Gokula, the supreme abode and planet, appears like a
>|lotus flower that has a thousand petals. The whorl of that
>|lotus is the abode of the Supreme Lord, Krsna. This lotus-
>|shaped supreme abode is created by the will of Lord Ananta.'
3160|PURPORT
3161|This verse is quoted from the Brahma-samhita (5.2).
3162|Madhya 20.259
3163|TEXT 259
3164|TEXT
3165|÷±lþ±-Z±Nõþ uÔNæà ÎîDÂNýÃñ õrpÁ±NGõþ áí h
3166|æÃnÂlõþ+ó± ›¶LÔÁ¿î dNýÃà õrpÁ±G-LÁ±õþí N 259 N
3167|maya-dvare srje tenho brahmandera gana
3168|jada-rupa prakrti nahe brahmanda-karana
3169|SYNONYMS
3170|maya-dvare-by the agency of the external energy; srje-
>|creates; tenho-Lord Sankarsana; brahmandera gana-all the
>|groups of universes; jada-rupa-appearing dull; prakrti-the
>|material energy; nahe-is not; brahmanda-karana-the cause of
>|the cosmic manifestation.
3171|TRANSLATION
3172|"By the agency of the material energy, this same Lord
>|Sankarsana creates all the universes. The dull material
>|energy-known in modern language as nature-is not the cause
>|of the material universe.
3173|Madhya 20.260
3174|TEXT 260
3175|TEXT
3176|æÃnÂl ÆýÃÃNî uÔ¿(c)† dNýÃà T«õþú¿Mà ¿õNd h
3177|î±ýÃñNîÂý×Ãà u‚ø¸Sí LÁNõþ ú¿Mõþ Õ±s±Nd N 260 N
3178|jada haite srsti nahe isvara-sakti vine
3179|tahatei sankarsana kare saktira adhane
3180|SYNONYMS
3181|jada haite-from the dull material energy; srsti nahe-the
>|cosmic manifestation is not possible; isvara-sakti vine-
>|without the help of the energy of the Supreme Lord, the
>|Personality of Godhead; tahatei-in the material energy;
>|sankarsana-Lord Sankarsana; kare-does; saktira-of the
>|spiritual energy; adhane-empowering.
3182|TRANSLATION
3183|"Without the Supreme Personality of Godhead's energy, dull
>|matter cannot create the cosmic manifestation. Its power
>|does not arise from the material energy itself but is
>|endowed by Sankarsana.
3184|Madhya 20.261
3185|TEXT 261
3186|TEXT
3187|T«Nõþõþ úNMÃI uÔ¿(c)† LÁõþNlþ ›¶LÔÁ¿î h
3188|ÎhNýÃà Îld Õ¿¢ŸúNMÃI ó±lþ ðñýÃÃ-ú¿Mà N 261 N
3189|isvarera saktye srsti karaye prakrti
3190|lauha yena agni-saktye paya daha-sakti
3191|SYNONYMS
3192|isvarera saktye-by the energy of the Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead; srsti-creation; karaye -does; prakrti-material
>|energy; lauha-iron; yena-as; agni-saktye-by the power of
>|fire; paya-gets; daha-sakti-the power to burn.
3193|TRANSLATION
3194|"Dull matter alone cannot create anything. The material
>|energy produces the creation by the power of the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead. Iron itself has no power to burn,
>|but when iron is placed in fire, it is empowered to burn.
3195|Madhya 20.262
3196|TEXT 262
3197|TEXT
3198|ÛNîÂN ¿ýÃà ¿õ«uI a õNæÃNl±dN
3199|õþ±N÷± ÷RLRÁµÐ óRø¸Ð ›¶s±d÷A h
3200|Õi¤Nlþ tÓÂNîÂø¸R ¿õhŽÂíuI
3201|:±duI ÎaÂú±î ý×ÃÃN÷N óRõþ±NíN N 262 N
3202|etau hi visvasya ca bija-yoni
3203| ramo mukundah purusah pradhanam
3204|anviya bhutesu vilaksanasya
3205| jnanasya cesata imau puranau
3206|SYNONYMS
3207|etau-these two, namely Rama and Krsna; hi-certainly;
>|visvasya-of the universe; ca-and; bija-yoni-both the cause
>|and ingredient; ramah-Balarama; mukundah-Krsna; purusah-the
>|original Maha-Visnu; pradhanam-material energy; anviya-
>|after entering; bhutesu-into the material elements;
>|vilaksanasya-of varieties of manifestation; jnanasya-of
>|knowledge; ca-also; isate-are the controlling power; imau-
>|both of Them; puranau-are the original cause.
3208|TRANSLATION
3209|"'Balarama and Krsna are the original efficient and
>|material causes of the material world. As Maha-Visnu and
>|the material energy, They enter into the material elements
>|and create the diversities by multi-energies. Thus They are
>|the cause of all causes.'
3210|PURPORT
3211|This verse is quoted from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.46.31).
3212|Madhya 20.263
3213|TEXT 263
3214|TEXT
3215|uÔ¿(c)†-ÎýÃÃîR Îlý×Ãà ÷Ó¿îS ›¶óN= ÕõîÂNõþ h
3216|Îuý×Ãà T«õþ÷Ó¿îS 'Õõî±õþ' d±÷ sNõþ N 263 N
3217|srsti-hetu yei murti prapance avatare
3218|sei isvara-murti 'avatara' nama dhare
3219|SYNONYMS
3220|srsti-hetu-for the purpose of creation; yei murti-which
>|form of the Lord; prapance-in the material world; avatare-
>|descends; sei-that; isvara-murti-form of the Lord; avatara-
>|incarnation; nama dhare-takes the name.
3221|TRANSLATION
3222|"The form of the Lord that descends into the material world
>|to create is called an avatara, or incarnation.
3223|Madhya 20.264
3224|TEXT 264
3225|TEXT
3226|÷±lþ±îÂNî óõþNõI±N÷ uõ±õþ Õõ¦š±d h
3227|¿õN« Õõî¿õþ' sNõþ 'Õõî±õþ' d±÷ N 264 N
3228|mayatita paravyome sabara avasthana
3229|visve avatari' dhare 'avatara' nama
3230|SYNONYMS
3231|maya-atita-beyond the material nature; para-vyome-in the
>|spiritual sky; sabara-all of them; avasthana-residence;
>|visve-within the material universe; avatari'-coming down;
>|dhare-take; avatara nama-the name avatara.
3232|TRANSLATION
3233|"All the expansions of Lord Krsna are actually residents of
>|the spiritual world. But when they descend into the
>|material world, they are called incarnations [avataras].
3234|Madhya 20.265
3235|TEXT 265
3236|TEXT
3237|Îuý×Ãà ÷±lþ± ÕõNh±¿LÁNî Mu‚ø¸Sí h
3238|óRø¸õþ+Nó ÕõîÂNíS ýÃÃý×ÃÃh± ›¶n÷ N 265 N
3239|sei maya avalokite sri-sankarsana
3240|purusa-rupe avatirna ha-ila prathama
3241|SYNONYMS
3242|sei maya-that material energy; avalokite-just to glance
>|over; sri-sankarsana-Sankarsana; purusa-rupe-in the
>|original form of Maha-Visnu; avatirna-incarnated; ha-ila-
>|became; prathama-at first.
3243|TRANSLATION
3244|"To glance over that material energy and empower her, Lord
>|Sankarsana first incarnates as Lord Maha-Visnu.
3245|Madhya 20.266
3246|TEXT 266
3247|TEXT
3248|æÃáÔNýÃà ÎóNø¸S õþ+óS tÂáõ±ijýÃÃðñ¿ðÿtÂÐ h
3249|uy²îÂS Îø¸±nÂlúLÁh÷±NðÃN Îh±LÁ¿uuÔŽÂlþ± N 266 N
3250|jagrhe paurusam rupam
3251| bhagavan mahad-adibhih
3252|sambhutam sodasa-kalam
3253| adau loka-sisrksaya
3254|SYNONYMS
3255|jagrhe-accepted; paurusam rupam-the form of the purusa
>|incarnation; bhagavan-the Supreme Personality of Godhead;
>|mahat-adibhih-with the material energy, etc.; sambhutam-
>|created; sodasa-sixteen; kalam-elements; adau-in the
>|beginning; loka-of the material worlds; sisrksaya-with a
>|desire for the creation.
3256|TRANSLATION
3257|"'In the beginning of the creation, the Lord expanded
>|Himself in the form of the purusa incarnation, accompanied
>|by all the ingredients of material creation. First He
>|created the sixteen principal energies suitable for
>|creation. This was for the purpose of manifesting the
>|material universes.'
3258|PURPORT
3259|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.3.1). For an
>|explanation, refer to Adi-lila, Chapter Five, verse 84.
3260|Madhya 20.267
3261|TEXT 267
3262|TEXT
3263|Õ±NðÃI±•Ãõî±õþÐ óRø¸Ð óõþuI LÁ±hÐ ¦¤t±õÐ uðÃuijd( h
3264|^õIS ¿õLÁ±Nõþ± &í ý×Ãÿflþ±¿í ¿õõþ±iA ¦¤õþ±iÂA ¦š±¦§R a¿õþ
>|øRž tÓÂ¥§Ð N 267 N
3265|adyo 'vatarah purusah parasya
3266| kalah svabhavah sad-asan manas ca
3267|dravyam vikaro guna indriyani
3268| virat svarat sthasnu carisnu bhumnah
3269|SYNONYMS
3270|adyah avatarah-the original incarnation; purusah-
>|Karanabdhisayi Visnu; parasya-of the Supreme Lord; kalah-
>|time; svabhavah- space; sat-asat-cause and effect; manah
>|ca-as well as the mind; dravyam-the five elements; vikarah-
>|transformation or the false ego; gunah-modes of nature;
>|indriyani-senses; virat-the universal form; svarat-
>|Garbhodakasayi Visnu; sthasnu-immovable; carisnu-
>|movable; bhumnah-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
3271|TRANSLATION
3272|"'Karanabdhisayi Visnu [Maha-Visnu] is the first
>|incarnation of the Supreme Lord, and He is the master of
>|eternal time, space, cause and effects, the mind, the
>|elements, the material ego, the modes of nature, the senses,
>| the universal form of the Lord, Garbhodakasayi Visnu and
>|the sum total of all living beings, both moving and
>|nonmoving.'
3273|PURPORT
3274|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (2.6.42). For an
>|explanation, refer to Adi-lila, Chapter Five, verse 83.
3275|Madhya 20.268
3276|TEXT 268
3277|TEXT
3278|Îuý×Ãà óRø¸ ¿õõþæñNî LÁNõþd úlþd h
3279|'LÁ±õþí±¿tú±lþN' d±÷ æÃáRLÁ±õþí N 268 N
3280|sei purusa virajate karena sayana
3281|'karanabdhisayi' nama jagat-karana
3282|SYNONYMS
3283|sei purusa-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; virajate-on
>|the border known as Viraja; karena sayana-lies down; karana-
>|abdhi-sayi-Karanabdhisayi; nama-named; jagat-karana-is the
>|original cause of material creation.
3284|TRANSLATION
3285|"That original Personality of Godhead, named Sankarsana,
>|first lies down in the river Viraja, which serves as a
>|border between the material and the spiritual world. As
>|Karanabdhisayi Visnu, He is the original cause of the
>|material creation.
3286|Madhya 20.269
3287|TEXT 269
3288|TEXT
3289|LÁ±õþí±¿t-ó±Nõþ ÷±lþ±õþ ¿dîÂI Õõ¿¦š¿î h
3290|¿õõþæñõþ ó±Nõþ óõþNõI±N÷ d±¿ýÃà á¿î N 269 N
3291|karanabdhi-pare mayara nitya avasthiti
3292|virajara pare paravyome nahi gati
3293|SYNONYMS
3294|karana-abdhi-pare-on one bank of the Causal Ocean; mayara-
>|of the material energy; nitya-eternal; avasthiti-position;
>|virajara pare-on the other bank of the Viraja, or the
>|Causal Ocean; para-vyome-in the spiritual world or sky;
>|nahi-there is not; gati-admission.
3295|TRANSLATION
3296|"The Viraja, or Causal Ocean, is the border between the
>|spiritual and the material world. The material energy is
>|situated on one shore of that ocean, and it cannot enter
>|onto the other shore, which is the spiritual sky.
3297|Madhya 20.270
3298|TEXT 270
3299|TEXT
3300|›¶õîÂSNî lS õþæÃ(tm)¦÷(tm)¦Nlþ±Ð
3301|uNøž ¿÷|S d a LÁ±h¿õS÷Ð h
3302|d lS ÷±lþ± ¿LÁ÷Rî±óNõþ ýÃÃNõþ-
3303|õþdRõrî± lS uRõþ±uRõþ±¿aSÂî±РN 270 N
3304|pravartate yatra rajas tamas tayoh
3305| sattvam ca misram na ca kala-vikramah
3306|na yatra maya kim utapare harer
3307| anuvrata yatra surasurarcitah
3308|SYNONYMS
3309|pravartate-exists; yatra-where; rajah-the mode of passion;
>|tamah-the mode of ignorance; tayoh-of both of them; sattvam
>|ca-and the mode of goodness; misram-mixture; na-not; ca-
>|also; kala-vikramah-the influence of time or annihilation;
>|na-not; yatra-where; maya-external energy; kim-what; uta-to
>|speak; apare-others; hareh-of the Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead; anuvratah-strict followers; yatra-where; sura-by
>|demigods; asura-and by demons; arcitah-being worshiped.
3310|TRANSLATION
3311|"'In the spiritual world, there is neither the mode of
>|passion, the mode of ignorance nor a mixture of both, nor
>|is there adulterated goodness, the influence of time or
>|maya herself. Only the pure devotees of the Lord, who are
>|worshiped both by demigods and by demons, reside in the
>|spiritual world as the Lord's associates.'
3312|PURPORT
3313|This verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (2.9.10) was spoken by
>|Srila Sukadeva Gosvami. He was answering the questions of
>|Pariksit Maharaja, who asked how the living entity falls
>|down into the material world. Sukadeva Gosvami explained
>|the cream of Srimad-Bhagavatam in four verses, which had
>|been explained to Lord Brahma at the end of the severe
>|austerities he performed for one thousand celestial years.
>|At that time, Brahma was shown the spiritual world and its
>|transcendental nature.
3314|Madhya 20.271
3315|TEXT 271
3316|TEXT
3317|÷±lþ±õþ Îl ðRÃý×Ãà õÔ¿MÃÖ'÷±lþ±' Õ±õþ '›¶s±d' h
3318|'÷±lþ±' ¿d¿÷MÃÃNýÃÃîRÂ, ¿õN«õþ nÂ×ó±ðñd '›¶s±d' N 271 N
3319|mayara ye dui vrtti-'maya' ara 'pradhana'
3320|'maya' nimitta-hetu, visvera upadana 'pradhana'
3321|SYNONYMS
3322|mayara-of the material nature; ye-which; dui-two; vrtti-
>|functions; maya-called maya; ara-and; pradhana-ingredients;
>|maya-the word maya ; nimitta-hetu-the efficient cause;
>|visvera-of the material universe; upadana-ingredients;
>|pradhana-is called pradhana.
3323|TRANSLATION
3324|"Maya has two functions. One is called maya, and the other
>|is called pradhana. Maya refers to the efficient cause, and
>|pradhana refers to the ingredients that create the cosmic
>|manifestation.
3325|PURPORT
3326|For a further explanation, see Adi-lila, Chapter Five,
>|verse 58.
3327|Madhya 20.272
3328|TEXT 272
3329|TEXT
3330|Îuý×Ãà óRø¸ ÷±lþ±-ó±Nd LÁNõþ Õõs±d h
3331|›¶LÔÁ¿î Ύ±¿tÂî LÁ¿õþ' LÁNõþ õNNlSõþ Õ±s±d N 272 N
3332|sei purusa maya-pane kare avadhana
3333|prakrti ksobhita kari' kare viryera adhana
3334|SYNONYMS
3335|sei purusa-that Supreme Personality of Godhead; maya-pane-
>|toward maya; kare avadhana-glances; prakrti-the material
>|nature; ksobhita kari'-making agitated; kare-impregnates;
>|viryera-of the semen; adhana-injection.
3336|TRANSLATION
3337|"When the Supreme Personality of Godhead glances over the
>|material energy, she becomes agitated. At that time, the
>|Lord injects the original semen of the living entities.
3338|PURPORT
3339|In the Bhagavad-gita (7.10), Krsna says, bijam mam sarva-
>|bhutanam: "I am the original seed of all existences." This
>|is also confirmed in another verse in the Bhagavad-gita (
>|14.4):
3340|sarva-yonisu kaunteya murtayah sambhavanti yah
3341|tasam brahma mahad yonir aham bija-pradah pita
3342|"It should be understood that all species of life, O son of
>|Kunti, are made possible by birth in this material nature,
>|and that I am the seed-giving father."
3343|For a further explanation, one may refer to the Brahma-
>|samhita ( Bs. 5.10 –13). The Brahma-
>|samhita also states (5.51):
3344|agnir mahi gaganam ambu marud disas ca
3345| kalas tathatma-manasiti jagat-trayani
3346|yasmad bhavanti vibhavanti visanti yam ca
3347| govindam adi-purusam tam aham bhajami
3348|All material elements, as well as the spiritual sparks (
>|individual souls), are emanating from the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead. This is confirmed by the
>|Vedanta-sutra (1.1) : janmady asya yatah [SB 1.1.1]. "The
>|Absolute Truth is He from whom everything emanates." He is
>|the Supreme Truth: satyam param dhimahi . The
>|absolute ultimate truth is Krsna. Om namo bhagavate
>|vasudevaya / janmady asya yato 'nvayad itaratas carthesv
>|abhijnah sva-rat: "The Absolute Truth is a person who is
>|directly and indirectly cognizant of the entire cosmic
>|manifestation."
3349|The Absolute Truth, the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
>|educated Lord Brahma from the heart (SB 1.1.1): tene
>|brahma hrda ya adi-kavaye. Therefore the Absolute Truth
>|cannot be dull matter; the Absolute Truth must be the
>|Supreme Person Himself. Sei purusa maya-pane kare avadhana.
>|Simply by His glance, material nature is impregnated with
>|all living entities. According to their karma and fruitive
>|activity, they emerge in different bodies. That is the
>|explanation given by the Bhagavad-gita (2.13):
3350|dehino 'smin yatha dehe kaumaram yauvanam jara
3351|tatha dehantara -praptir dhiras tatra na muhyati
3352|"As the embodied soul continuously passes, in
>|this body, from boyhood to youth to old age, the soul
>|similarly passes into another body at death. A sober person
>|is not bewildered by such a change."
3353|Madhya 20.273
3354|TEXT 273
3355|TEXT
3356|¦¤±/-¿õNúø¸±t±uõþ+Nó ›¶LÔÁ¿îÂ-¦óúSd h
3357|æÃNõ-õþ+ó 'õNæ' î±Nî ÆLÁh± u÷óSí N 273 N
3358|svanga-visesabhasa-rupe prakrti-sparsana
3359|jiva-rupa 'bija' tate kaila samarpana
3360|SYNONYMS
3361|sva-anga-visesa-abhasa-rupe-in the form of a specific
>|shadow from His personal body; prakrti-sparsana-the Lord
>|glances over the material nature; jiva-rupa-having the form
>|of the sparklike living entities, who are parts and parcels;
>| bija-semen; tate-in that material nature; kaila samarpana-
>|impregnated.
3362|TRANSLATION
3363|"To impregnate with the seeds of the living entities, the
>|Lord Himself does not directly touch the material energy,
>|but by His specific functional expansion He touches the
>|material energy, and thus the living entities, who are His
>|parts and parcels, are impregnated into material nature.
3364|PURPORT
3365|According to Lord Krsna in the Bhagavad-gita (15.7):
3366|mamaivamso jiva-loke jiva-bhutah sanatanah
3367|manah- sasthanindriyani prakrti-sthani karsati
3368|"The living entities in this conditioned
>|world are My eternal fragmental parts. Due to conditioned
>|life, they are struggling very hard with the six senses,
>|which include the mind."
3369|The word prakrti- sparsana is explained in the Caitanya-
>|caritamrta in reference to the way the living entities come
>|in contact with dull matter. The glancing is performed by
>|Maha-Visnu: sa aiksata lokan nu srja iti. (Aitareya
>|Upanisad 1.1.1) In the conditioned stage we impregnate
>|according to the bodily conception-that is, by sexual
>|intercourse-but the Supreme Lord does not need sexual
>|intercourse to impregnate. The impregnation is performed
>|simply by His glance. This is also explained in the Brahma-
>|samhita (5.32):
3370|angani yasya sakalendriya-vrttimanti
3371| pasyanti panti kalayanti ciram jaganti
3372|ananda-cinmaya-sad-ujjvala-vigrahasya
3373| govindam adi-purusam tam aham bhajami
3374|Govinda can impregnate simply by glancing. In other words,
>|His eyes can work as His genitals. He does not need
>|genitals to beget a child. Indeed, Krsna can beget any one
>|of the living entities with any part of His body.
3375|The word svanga-visesabhasa-rupe, indicating the form by
>|which the Lord begets living entities in the material world,
>| is explained herein. He is Lord Siva. In the Brahma-
>|samhita it is stated that Lord Siva, who is another form of
>|Maha-Visnu, is like yogurt. Yogurt is nothing but milk, yet
>|it is not milk. Similarly, Lord Siva is considered the
>|father of this universe, and material nature is considered
>|the mother. The father and mother are known as Lord Siva
>|and goddess Durga. Together, Lord Siva's genitals and
>|the vagina of goddess Durga are worshiped as the siva-linga.
>| This is the origin of the material creation. Thus Lord
>|Siva's position is between that of the living entity and
>|that of the Supreme Lord. In other words, Lord Siva is
>|neither the Supreme Personality of Godhead nor a living
>|entity. He is the form through which the Supreme Lord works
>|to beget living entities within this material world. As
>|yogurt is prepared when milk is mixed with a culture, the
>|form of Lord Siva expands when the Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead is in touch with material nature. The impregnation
>|of material nature by the father, Lord Siva, is wonderful
>|because at one time innumerable living entities are
>|conceived. Bhago jivah sa vijneyah sa canantyaya kalpate (
>|Svetasvatara Upanisad 5.9). These living entities are very,
>|very small :
3376|kesagra-sata-bhagasya satamsa-sadrsatmakah
3377|jivah suksma- svarupo 'yam sankhyatito hi cit-kanah
3378| [Cc . Madhya 19.140]
3379|"If we divide the tip of a hair into a hundred parts and
>|then take one of these parts and divide it again into a
>|hundred parts, that very fine division is the size of but
>|one of the numberless living entities. They are all cit-
>|kana, particles of spirit, not matter."
3380|The innumerable brahmandas, or universes, come from the
>|pores of the Lord's body, and innumerable living entities
>|also come from the pores of the transcendental body of the
>|Lord. This is the process of material creation. Without the
>|living entities, this material nature has no value. Both
>|emanate from the pores of the transcendental body of Lord
>|Maha-Visnu. They are different energies. The material
>|nature is explained as follows by Lord Krsna in the
>|Bhagavad-gita (7.4):
3381|bhumir apo 'nalo vayuh kham mano buddhir eva ca
3382|ahankara itiyam me bhinna prakrtir astadha
3383|"Earth, water , fire , air, ether, mind,
>|intelligence and false ego-all together these eight
>|constitute My separated material energies." Thus the
>|material elements also come from the body of the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead, but they are a different type of
>|energy from the living entities. Although the living
>|entities also come from the Lord's body, they are
>|categorized as a superior energy:
3384|apareyam itas tv anyam prakrtim viddhi me param
3385|jiva
>|-bhutam
>|
>| maha - baho
>|
>|
>| yayedam dharyate
>|jagat
3386|"Besides this inferior nature , O mighty-armed
>|Arjuna, there is another, superior energy of Mine, which
>|comprises the living entities who are exploiting the
>|resources of this material, inferior nature." (Bg. 7.5) The
>|inferior energy, matter, cannot act without the superior
>|energy. All these things are very clearly explained in the
>|Vedas. The materialistic theory that life develops from
>|matter is incorrect. Life and matter come from the supreme
>|living entity; therefore, being the source of both, that
>|supreme living entity, Krsna, is described in the Vedanta-
>|sutra as janmady asya yatah [SB 1.1.1] (1.1), or the
>|original source of everything, sarva-karana-karanam [Bs. 5.
>|1]. This is further explained in the following verse.
3387|Madhya 20.274
3388|TEXT 274
3389|TEXT
3390|Æðõ±R ŽR¿tÂîÂs¿÷SíI±S ¦¤uI±S Îl±NdN óõþÐ óR÷±dA h
3391|Õ±sMÃà õNlSS u±•ÃÃuÓî ÷ýÃÃMÃÃNS ¿ýÃõþ°Ã¬lþ÷A N 274 N
3392|daivat ksubhita-dharminyam
3393| svasyam yonau parah puman
3394|adhatta viryam sasuta
3395| mahat-tattvam hiranmayam
3396|SYNONYMS
3397|daivat-at a time beyond memory; ksubhita-dharminyam-
>|the material nature, which is subjected to agitation;
>|svasyam-which belongs to the Supreme as one of His energies;
>| yonau-in the womb from which the living entity takes his
>|birth; parah puman-the Supreme Brahman, the Personality of
>|Godhead; adhatta-impregnated; viryam- semen; sa-that
>|material nature; asuta-produced; mahat-tattvam-the total
>|material energy; hiranmayam-the original source for the
>|emanation of varieties of material things.
3398|TRANSLATION
3399|"' At a time beyond memory, after agitating the
>|material nature into three qualities, the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead placed the semen of innumerable
>|living entities within the womb of that material nature.
>|Thus material nature gave birth to the total material
>|energy , known as the hiranmaya-mahat-tattva, the original
>|symbolic representation of the cosmic manifestation.'
3400|PURPORT
3401|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (3.26.19). Lord
>|Kapila is explaining to His mother the relationship between
>|the Supreme Personality of Godhead and material nature. He
>|is informing her how the Supreme Personality of Godhead is
>|the original cause of the living entities who are
>|conditioned by material nature. Over and above the twenty-
>|eight elements of the material creation is the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead, the cause of all causes. Life comes
>|not from matter but from life itself. As explained in the
>|Vedas: nityo nityanam cetanas cetananam (Katha Upanisad 2.2.
>|13). The Supreme Lord is the original source of life.
3402|Madhya 20.275
3403|TEXT 275
3404|TEXT
3405|LÁ±hõÔMÃÃI± îR ÷±lþ±lþ±S &í÷lI±÷Ns±ŽÂæÃÐ h
3406|óRNø¸í±RtÓÂNîd õNlS÷±sMÃà õNlSõ±dA N 275 N
3407|kala-vrttya tu mayayam
3408| guna-mayyam adhoksajah
3409|purusenatma-bhutena
3410| viryam adhatta viryavan
3411|SYNONYMS
3412|kala-vrttya-in due course of time, as the immediate cause
>|of creation; tu-but; mayayam-within the material nature;
>|guna-mayyam-full of the three material modes of nature (
>|sattva-guna, rajo-guna and tamo-guna); adhoksajah-the
>|Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is beyond material
>|conceptions; purusena-by the enjoyer of material nature;
>|atma-bhutena-who is an expansion of His personal self;
>|viryam-semen; adhatta-placed; viryavan-the omnipotent.
3413|TRANSLATION
3414|"'In due course of time, the Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead [Maha- Vaikunthanatha], by the agency
>|of an expansion of His personal self [Maha-Visnu],
>| placed the seed of the living entities within the womb of
>|material nature.'
3415|PURPORT
3416|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (3.5.26). This
>|verse tells how the living entities come in contact with
>|material nature. Just as a woman cannot beget children
>|without uniting with a man, material nature cannot beget
>|living entities without being in union with the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead. There is a history of how the
>|Absolute Lord becomes the father of all living entities. In
>|every system of religion, it is accepted that God is the
>|supreme father of all living entities. According to
>|Christianity, the supreme father, God, provides the living
>|entities with all of life's necessities. Therefore they
>|pray, "Give us this day our daily bread." Any religion that
>|does not accept the Supreme Lord as the absolute father is
>|called kaitava-dharma, or a cheating religion. Such
>|religious systems are rejected in Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.1.2):
>| dharmah projjhita-kaitavo 'tra. Only an atheist does not
>|accept the omnipotent supreme father. If one accepts the
>|omnipotent supreme father, he abides by His orders and
>|becomes a religious person.
3417|Madhya 20.276
3418|TEXT 276
3419|TEXT
3420|îÂNõ ÷ýÃÃMÃÃN ÆýÃÃNî ¿S¿õs Õýñõþ h
3421|l±ýÃñ ÆýÃÃNî ÎðõNî¿flþtÓÂNîõþ ›¶a±õþ N 276 N
3422|tabe mahat-tattva haite trividha ahankara
3423|yaha haite devatendriya-bhutera pracara
3424|SYNONYMS
3425|tabe-thereafter; mahat-tattva haite-from the total material
>|energy; tri-vidha-three kinds of; ahankara-egotism; yaha
>|haite-from which; devata-of predominating deities; indriya-
>|of the senses; bhutera-and of material elements; pracara-
>|expansion.
3426|TRANSLATION
3427|"First the total material energy is manifested, and from
>|this arise the three types of egotism, which are the
>|original sources from which all demigods [controlling
>|deities], senses and material elements expand.
3428|PURPORT
3429|The three types of egotism (ahankara) are technically known
>|as vaikarika, taijasa and tamasa. The mahat-tattva is
>|situated within the heart, or citta, and the predominating
>|Deity of the mahat-tattva is Lord Vasudeva (SB 3.26.21).
>| The mahat-tattva is transformed into three divisions: (1)
>|vaikarika, egotism in goodness (sattvika-ahankara), from
>|which is manifested the eleventh sense organ, the mind,
>|whose predominating Deity is Aniruddha ( SB
>| 3.26.27 –28); (2) taijasa, or egotism in passion (rajasa-
>|ahankara), from which are manifested the active and
>|knowledge-acquiring senses , along with the
>|intelligence, whose predominating Deity is Lord Pradyumna (
>|SB 3.26.29 –31); and (3) tamasa, or egotism in
>|ignorance, from which sound vibration (sabda-tanmatra)
>|expands. From sound vibration, the sky (akasa) is
>|manifested , and then the senses, beginning with the sense
>| of hearing, are also manifested ( SB 3.26.32). Of
>|these three types of egotism, Lord Sankarsana is the
>|predominating Deity. In the philosophical discourse known
>|as the Sankhya-karika, it is stated , sattvika ekadasakah
>|pravartate vaikrtad ahankarat-bhutades tan-matram tamasa-
>|taijasady-ubhayam.
3430|Madhya 20.277
3431|TEXT 277
3432|TEXT
3433|uõS îÂN ¿÷¿h' uÔ¿æÃh õrpÁ±NGõþ áí h
3434|Õd(tm)L õrpÁ±G, î±õþ d±¿ýÃÃLÁ áíd N 277 N
3435|sarva tattva mili' srjila brahmandera gana
3436|ananta brahmanda, tara nahika ganana
3437|SYNONYMS
3438|sarva tattva-all different elements; mili'-combining;
>|srjila-created; brahmandera gana-all the universes; ananta
>|brahmanda-those universes are unlimited in number; tara
>|nahika ganana-there is no possibility of counting them.
3439|TRANSLATION
3440|"Combining all the different elements, the Supreme Lord
>|created all the universes. Those universes are unlimited in
>|number; there is no possibility of counting them.
3441|Madhya 20.278
3442|TEXT 278
3443|TEXT
3444|ý×DÃÃNýÃñ ÷ýÃÃR¦Ú(c)†± óRø¸–'÷ýÃñ¿õøRž' d±÷ h
3445|Õd(tm)L õrpÁ±G îD±õþ Îh±÷LÓÁNó s±÷ N 278 N
3446|inho mahat-srasta purusa-'maha-visnu' nama
3447|ananta brahmanda tanra loma-kupe dhama
3448|SYNONYMS
3449|inho-He; mahat-srasta-the creator of the mahat-tattva, or
>|total material energy; purusa-the person; maha-visnu nama-
>|called Lord Maha-Visnu; ananta-unlimited; brahmanda-
>|universes; tanra-of His body; loma-kupe-within the hair
>|holes; dhama-are situated.
3450|TRANSLATION
3451|"The first form of Lord Visnu is called Maha-Visnu. He is
>|the original creator of the total material energy. The
>|innumerable universes emanate from the pores of His body.
3452|Madhya 20.279–280
3453|TEXTS 279–280
3454|TEXT
3455|áõ±NŽÂ nÂ׿nÂllþ± ÆlNrà ÎõþíR Õ±Nu l±lþ h
3456|óRø¸-¿d«±u-uýÃà õrpÁ±G õ±¿ýÃõþ±lþ N 279 N
3457|óRdõþ¿ó ¿d«±u-uýÃÃ l±lþ ÕtÂI(tm)Lõþ h
3458|Õd(tm)L U«lS îD±õþ, uõ–÷±lþ±-ó±õþ N 280 N
3459|gavakse udiya yaiche renu ase yaya
3460|purusa-nisvasa-saha brahmanda bahiraya
3461|punarapi nisvasa-saha yaya abhyantara
3462|ananta aisvarya tanra, saba-maya-para
3463|SYNONYMS
3464|gavakse-from a hole at the top of a wall; udiya-floating;
>|yaiche-as; renu-atomic particles; ase yaya-come and go;
>|purusa-nisvasa-saha-with the exhaling of Maha-Visnu;
>|brahmanda-the universes; bahiraya-come outside; punarapi-
>|again; nisvasa-saha-by His inhalation; yaya-go; abhyantara-
>|within; ananta-unlimited; aisvarya-opulences; tanra-of Him;
>|saba-everything; maya-para-beyond the material conception.
3465|TRANSLATION
3466|"These universes are understood to be floating in the air
>|that Maha-Visnu exhales. They are like atomic particles
>|that float in sunshine and pass through the holes of a
>|screen. All these universes are thus created by the
>|exhalation of Maha-Visnu, and when Maha-Visnu inhales, they
>|re- enter His body. The unlimited opulences of Maha-
>|Visnu are completely beyond material conception.
3467|Madhya 20.281
3468|TEXT 281
3469|TEXT
3470|lÍuILÁ-¿d«¿uîÂLÁ±h÷n±õh¥¤I
3471|æÃNõ¿(tm)L Îh±÷¿õhæñ æÃáðÃGd±n±Ð h
3472|¿õøRž÷SýÃñdA u ý×ÃÃýÃà luI LÁh±¿õNúNø¸±
3473|Î᱿õµ÷±¿ðóRø¸S îÂ÷ýÃÃS tÂæñ¿÷ N 281 N
3474|yasyaika-nisvasita-kalam athavalambya
3475| jivanti loma- vila-ja jagad-anda-nathah
3476|visnur mahan sa iha yasya kala-viseso
3477| govindam adi-purusam tam aham bhajami
3478|SYNONYMS
3479|yasya-whose; eka-one; nisvasita-of breath; kalam-time; atha-
>|thus; avalambya-taking shelter of; jivanti-live; loma-
>|vila-jah-grown from the hair holes; jagat-anda-nathah-
>|the masters of the universes (the Brahmas); visnuh mahan-
>|the Supreme Lord Maha-Visnu; sah-that; iha-here; yasya-
>|whose; kala-visesah-particular plenary portion or expansion;
>| govindam-Lord Govinda; adi-purusam-the original person;
>|tam-Him; aham-I; bhajami-worship.
3480|TRANSLATION
3481|"'The Brahmas and other lords of the mundane worlds appear
>|from the pores of Maha-Visnu and remain alive for the
>|duration of His one exhalation. I adore the primeval Lord,
>|Govinda, of whom Maha-Visnu is a portion of a plenary
>|portion.'
3482|PURPORT
3483|This is a quotation from the Brahma-samhita (5.48) . For an
>|explanation, refer to Adi-lila, Chapter Five, verse 71.
3484|Madhya 20.282
3485|TEXT 282
3486|TEXT
3487|u÷(tm)¦ õrpÁ±GáNíõþ ý×DÃÃNýÃñ Õ(tm)LlS±÷N h
3488|LÁ±õþí±Ã¿tú±lþN–uõ æÃáNîõþ ¦¤±÷N N 282 N
3489|samasta brahmanda-ganera inho antaryami
3490|karanabdhisayi-saba jagatera svami
3491|SYNONYMS
3492|samasta brahmanda-ganera-of the aggregate of the brahmandas,
>| or universes; inho-that Lord Maha-Visnu; antaryami-the
>|Supersoul; karana-abdhi-sayi-Lord Maha-Visnu, lying on the
>|Causal Ocean; saba jagatera-of all the universes; svami-the
>|Supreme Lord.
3493|TRANSLATION
3494|"Maha-Visnu is the Supersoul of all the universes. Lying on
>|the Causal Ocean, He is the master of all material worlds.
3495|Madhya 20.283
3496|TEXT 283
3497|TEXT
3498|Ûý×ÃÃî LÁ¿ýÃÃhRD ›¶n÷ óRNø¸õþ îÂN h
3499|¿ZîÂNlþ óRNø¸õþ ÛNõ qdýÃà ÷ýÃÃN N 283 N
3500|eita kahilun prathama purusera tattva
3501|dvitiya purusera ebe sunaha mahattva
3502|SYNONYMS
3503|eita-thus; kahilun-I have explained; prathama purusera-of
>|the first incarnation of the Personality of Godhead; tattva-
>|the truth; dvitiya purusera-of the second incarnation of
>|the Personality of Godhead; ebe-now; sunaha-please hear;
>|mahattva-glories.
3504|TRANSLATION
3505|"I have thus explained the truth of the first Personality
>|of Godhead, Maha-Visnu. I shall now explain the glories of
>|the second Personality of Godhead.
3506|Madhya 20.284
3507|TEXT 284
3508|TEXT
3509|Îuý×Ãà óRÂø¸ Õd(tm)L-ÎLÁ±¿i õrpÁ±G uÔ¿æÃlþ± h
3510|ÛÍLÁLÁ-÷ÓNîSÂI ›¶Nõ¿úh± õU ÷Ó¿îS ýÃÃÛž± N 284 N
3511|sei purusa ananta-koti brahmanda srjiya
3512|ekaika-murtye pravesila bahu murti hana
3513|SYNONYMS
3514|sei purusa-that Personality of Godhead, Maha-Visnu; ananta-
>|koti brahmanda-millions and trillions of brahmandas, or
>|universes; srjiya-after creating; eka-eka-in each one of
>|them; murtye-in a form; pravesila-entered; bahu murti hana-
>|becoming many forms.
3515|TRANSLATION
3516|"After creating the total number of universes, which are
>|unlimited, Maha-Visnu expanded Himself into unlimited
>|forms and entered into each of them.
3517|Madhya 20.285
3518|TEXT 285
3519|TEXT
3520|›¶Nõú LÁ¿õþlþ± ÎðÃNm, uõ–ÕgLÁ±õþ h
3521|õþ¿ýÃÃNî d±¿ýÃÃLÁ ¦š±d, LÁ¿õþh± ¿õa±õþ N 285 N
3522|pravesa kariya dekhe, saba-andhakara
3523|rahite nahika sthana, karila vicara
3524|SYNONYMS
3525|pravesa kariya-after entering; dekhe-He sees; saba-
>|everywhere; andhakara-complete darkness; rahite-to remain
>|there; nahika sthana-there was no place; karila vicara-then
>|He considered.
3526|TRANSLATION
3527|"When Maha-Visnu entered each of the limitless universes,
>|He saw that there was darkness all around and that there
>|was no place to stay. He therefore began to consider the
>|situation.
3528|Madhya 20.286
3529|TEXT 286
3530|TEXT
3531|¿dæñ/-Φ¤ðÃæÃNh õrpÁ±G±sS t¿õþh h
3532|Îuý×Ãà æÃNh Îúø¸-úlI±lþ úlþd LÁ¿õþh N 286 N
3533|nijanga-sveda-jale brahmandardha bharila
3534|sei jale sesa-sayyaya sayana karila
3535|SYNONYMS
3536|nija-anga-from His own personal body; sveda-jale-by
>|emitting the water of perspiration; brahmanda-ardha-half of
>|the universe; bharila-filled; sei jale-on that water; sesa-
>|sayyaya-on the bed of Lord Sesa; sayana karila-lay down.
3537|TRANSLATION
3538|"With the perspiration produced from His own body, the Lord
>|filled half the universe with water. He then lay down on
>|that water, on the bed of Lord Sesa.
3539|Madhya 20.287
3540|TEXT 287
3541|TEXT
3542|îD±õþ d±¿tó1/2 ÆýÃÃNî nÂ׿êÂh ÛLÁ ó1/2 h
3543|Îuý×Ãà óN1/2 ýÃÃý×ÃÃh õrpÁ±õþ æÃij-u1/2 N 287 N
3544|tanra nabhi-padma haite uthila eka padma
3545|sei padme ha-ila brahmara janma-sadma
3546|SYNONYMS
3547|tanra nabhi-padma haite-from His lotus navel; uthila-grew;
>|eka-one; padma-lotus flower; sei padme-on that lotus flower;
>| ha-ila-there was; brahmara-of Lord Brahma; janma-sadma-the
>|place of generation.
3548|TRANSLATION
3549|"A lotus flower then sprouted from the lotus navel of that
>|Garbhodakasayi Visnu. That lotus flower became Lord Brahma'
>|s birthplace.
3550|Madhya 20.288
3551|TEXT 288
3552|TEXT
3553|Îuý×Ãà ó1/2d±Nh ýÃÃý×ÃÃh ÎaÂNV tRÂõd h
3554|ÎîDÂNýÃñ 'õrpÁ±' ýÃÃÛž± uÔ¿(c)† LÁ¿õþh uÔæÃd N 288 N
3555|sei padma-nale ha-ila caudda bhuvana
3556|tenho 'brahma' hana srsti karila srjana
3557|SYNONYMS
3558|sei padma-nale-within the stem of that lotus; ha-ila-was
>|manifested; caudda-fourteen; bhuvana-planetary systems;
>|tenho-He; brahma-Lord Brahma; hana-having become; srsti-the
>|material creation; karila srjana-created.
3559|TRANSLATION
3560|"In the stem of that lotus flower, the fourteen worlds were
>|generated. Then He became Lord Brahma and manifested the
>|entire universe.
3561|Madhya 20.289
3562|TEXT 289
3563|TEXT
3564|'¿õøRž'-õþ+ó ýÃÃÛž± LÁNõþ æÃáR ó±hNd h
3565|&í±îÂNî ¿õøRž–¦óúS d±¿ýÃà ÷±lþ±-uNd N 289 N
3566|'visnu'-rupa hana kare jagat palane
3567|gunatita visnu-sparsa nahi maya-sane
3568|SYNONYMS
3569|visnu-rupa-Lord Krsna in His form as Visnu; hana-becoming;
>|kare-does; jagat palane-maintenance of the material world;
>|guna-atita-beyond the material qualities, transcendental;
>|visnu-Lord Visnu; sparsa-touching; nahi-there is not; maya-
>|sane-with maya, the material energy.
3570|TRANSLATION
3571|"In this way, the Supreme Personality of Godhead in His
>|form of Visnu maintains the entire material world. Since He
>|is always beyond the material qualities, the material
>|nature cannot touch Him.
3572|PURPORT
3573|The influence of the material energy cannot touch Lord
>|Visnu as she touches Lord Brahma and Lord Siva. Therefore
>|it is said that Lord Visnu is transcendental to the
>|material qualities. The incarnations of the material
>|qualities-Lord Siva and Lord Brahma-are under the
>|jurisdiction of the external energy. Lord Visnu, however,
>|is different. In the mantras of the Rg Veda it is said, om
>|tad visnoh paramam padam (Rg Veda-samhita 1.22.20). The
>|words paramam padam indicate that He is transcendental to
>|the material qualities. Because Lord Visnu is not within
>|the jurisdiction of the material qualities, He is always
>|superior to the living entities who are controlled by the
>|material energy. This is one of the differences between the
>|Supreme Lord and the living entities. Lord Brahma is a very
>|powerful living entity, and Lord Siva is even more powerful.
>| Therefore Lord Siva is not accepted as a living entity,
>|but at the same time he is not considered to be on the
>|level of Lord Visnu.
3574|Madhya 20.290
3575|TEXT 290
3576|TEXT
3577|'^'õþ+ó s¿õþ LÁNõþ æÃáR uSýÃñõþ h
3578|uÔ¿(c)†, ¿¦šA¿îÂ, ›¶hlþ ýÃÃlþ ý×ÃÃ26ñlþ lD±ýÃñõþ N 290 N
3579|'rudra'-rupa dhari kare jagat samhara
3580|srsti, sthiti, pralaya haya icchaya yanhara
3581|SYNONYMS
3582|rudra-rupa dhari-accepting the form of Lord Siva; kare-
>|performs; jagat samhara-dissolution of the universal
>|creation; srsti-creation; sthiti-maintenance; pralaya-and
>|dissolution; haya-take place; icchaya-by the will; yanhara-
>|of whom.
3583|TRANSLATION
3584|"The Supreme Lord in His form of Rudra [Lord Siva]
>|brings about the dissolution of this material creation. In
>|other words, only by His will are there creation,
>|maintenance and dissolution of the whole cosmic
>|manifestation.
3585|Madhya 20.291
3586|TEXT 291
3587|TEXT
3588|õrpÁ±, ¿õøRž, ¿úõ–îD±õþ &í-Õõî±õþ h
3589|uÔ¿(c)†-¿¦š¿îÂ-›¶hNlþõþ ¿îÂNdõþ Õ¿sLÁ±õþ N 291 N
3590|brahma, visnu, siva-tanra guna-avatara
3591|srsti-sthiti-pralayera tinera adhikara
3592|SYNONYMS
3593|brahma-Lord Brahma; visnu-Lord Visnu; siva-Lord Siva; tanra-
>|of Garbhodakasayi Visnu; guna-avatara-incarnations of the
>|material qualities; srsti-sthiti-pralayera-of the three
>|functions, namely creation, maintenance and dissolution;
>|tinera adhikara-there is control by the three deities (Lord
>|Brahma, Lord Visnu and Lord Siva).
3594|TRANSLATION
3595|"Brahma, Visnu and Siva are His three incarnations of the
>|material qualities. Creation, maintenance and destruction
>|respectively are under the charge of these three
>|personalities.
3596|Madhya 20.292
3597|TEXT 292
3598|TEXT
3599|¿ýÃõþíIátSÂ-Õ(tm)LlS±÷N–áNtS±ðÃLÁú±lþN h
3600|'uýÃæÚúNø¸S±¿ðÃ' LÁ¿õþ' ÎõNðà lD±Nõþ á±ý×Ãà N 292 N
3601|hiranyagarbha-antaryami-garbhodakasayi
3602|'sahasra-sirsadi' kari' vede yanre gai
3603|SYNONYMS
3604|hiranyagarbha-named Hiranyagarbha; antaryami-the Supersoul;
>|garbha-udaka-sayi-Lord Garbhodakasayi Visnu; sahasra-sirsa-
>|adi kari'-by the Vedic hymns beginning with sahasra-sirsa (
>|Rg Veda-samhita 10.90.1); vede yanre gai -unto whom the
>|Vedas pray.
3605|TRANSLATION
3606|"Garbhodakasayi Visnu, known within the universe as
>|Hiranyagarbha and the antaryami, or Supersoul, is glorified
>|in the Vedic hymns, beginning with the hymn that starts
>|with the word 'sahasra-sirsa. '
3607|Madhya 20.293
3608|TEXT 293
3609|TEXT
3610|Ûý×Ãà îÂ' ¿ZîÂNlþ–óRø¸-õrpÁ±NGõþ T«õþ h
3611|÷±lþ±õþ 'Õ±|lþ' ýÃÃlþ, îõR ÷±lþ±-ó±õþ N 293 N
3612|ei ta' dvitiya-purusa-brahmandera isvara
3613|mayara 'asraya' haya, tabu maya-para
3614|SYNONYMS
3615|ei ta'-in this way; dvitiya-purusa-the second Personality
>|of Godhead; brahmandera isvara-the master of the universe;
>|mayara-of the external, material energy; asraya haya-
>|becomes the shelter; tabu-still; maya-para-is beyond the
>|touch of the material energy.
3616|TRANSLATION
3617|"This second Personality of Godhead, known as
>|Garbhodakasayi Visnu, is the master of each and every
>|universe and the shelter of the external energy.
>|Nonetheless, He remains beyond the touch of the external
>|energy.
3618|Madhya 20.294
3619|TEXT 294
3620|TEXT
3621|îÔÂîÂNlþ-óRø¸ ¿õøRž–'&í-Õõî±õþ' h
3622|ðRÃý×Ãà Õõî±õþ-¿tÂîõþ áíd± îD±ýÃñõþ N 294 N
3623|trtiya-purusa visnu-'guna-avatara'
3624|dui avatara-bhitara ganana tanhara
3625|SYNONYMS
3626|trtiya-purusa-the third Personality; visnu-Lord Visnu; guna-
>|avatara-the incarnation of the material quality of goodness;
>| dui avatara-bhitara-within the two incarnations; ganana
>|tanhara-He is designated.
3627|TRANSLATION
3628|"The third expansion of Visnu is Ksirodakasayi Visnu,
>|who is the incarnation of the quality of goodness. He is to
>|be counted within both types of incarnations [purusa-
>|avataras and guna-avataras].
3629|Madhya 20.295
3630|TEXT 295
3631|TEXT
3632|¿õõþ±iA õI¿(c)†-æÃNNõõþ ÎîDÂNýÃñ Õ(tm)LlS±÷N h
3633|ŽÂNNõþ±ðÃLÁú±lþN ÎîDÂNýÃñ–ó±hdLÁîS±, ¦¤±÷N N 295 N
3634|virat vyasti-jivera tenho antaryami
3635|ksirodakasayi tenho-palana-karta, svami
3636|SYNONYMS
3637|virat-the universal form; vyasti-jivera-of all other living
>|entities; tenho-He; antaryami-the Supersoul; ksira-udaka-
>|sayi-Lord Visnu who lies down on the ocean of milk; tenho-
>|He; palana-karta-the maintainer; svami-the master.
3638|TRANSLATION
3639|"Ksirodakasayi Visnu is the universal form of the Lord
>|and is the Supersoul within every living entity. He is
>|known as Ksirodakasayi because He is the Lord who lies
>|on the ocean of milk. He is the maintainer and master of
>|the universe.
3640|Madhya 20.296
3641|TEXT 296
3642|TEXT
3643|óRø¸±õî±Nõþõþ Ûý×Ãà ÆLÁhRD ¿dõþ+óí h
3644|hNh±õî±õþ ÛNõ qd, ud±îd N 296 N
3645|purusavatarera ei kailun nirupana
3646|lilavatara ebe suna, sanatana
3647|SYNONYMS
3648|purusa-avatarera-of all the purusa-avataras; ei-this;
>|kailun nirupana-I have described; lila-avatara-incarnations
>|for pastimes; ebe-now; suna-please hear; sanatana-O
>|Sanatana.
3649|TRANSLATION
3650|"O Sanatana, I have definitively described the three purusa-
>|avataras of Visnu. Now please hear from Me about the
>|pastime incarnations.
3651|Madhya 20.297
3652|TEXT 297
3653|TEXT
3654|hNh±õî±õþ LÔÁNøžõþ d± Âl±lþ áíd h
3655|›¶s±d LÁ¿õþlþ± LÁ¿ýÃà ¿ðÃáAðõþúd N 297 N
3656|lilavatara krsnera na yaya ganana
3657|pradhana kariya kahi dig-darasana
3658|SYNONYMS
3659|lila-avatara-incarnations for pastimes; krsnera-of Lord
>|Krsna; na yaya ganana-are not countable; pradhana kariya-
>|chiefly; kahi-let Me describe; dik-darasana-by a sample
>|indication.
3660|TRANSLATION
3661|"No one can count the innumerable pastime incarnations of
>|Lord Krsna, but I shall describe the principal ones.
3662|Madhya 20.298
3663|TEXT 298
3664|TEXT
3665|÷RuI, LÓÁ÷S, õþâRd±n, dÔ¿uSýÃÃ, õ±÷d h
3666|õõþ±ýÃñ¿ðÖÎhm± lD±õþ d± l±lþ áíd N 298 N
3667|matsya, kurma, raghunatha, nrsimha, vamana
3668|varahadi-lekha yanra na yaya ganana
3669|SYNONYMS
3670|matsya-the fish incarnation; kurma-the tortoise incarnation;
>| raghunatha-Lord Ramacandra; nrsimha-the man-lion
>|incarnation; vamana-the dwarf incarnation; varaha-adi-the
>|hog incarnation and others; lekha-describing; yanra-of
>|which incarnations; na yaya ganana-cannot be counted.
3671|TRANSLATION
3672|"Some of the pastime incarnations are the fish incarnation,
>|the tortoise incarnation, Lord Ramacandra, Lord Nrsimha,
>|Lord Vamana and Lord Varaha. There is no end to them.
3673|Madhya 20.299
3674|TEXT 299
3675|TEXT
3676|÷RuI±«LÁ26ódÔ¿uSýÃÃ-õõþ±ýÃÃ-ýÃÃSu-
3677|õþ±æÃdI¿õ›¶¿õõRNsø¸R LÔÁî±õî±õþÐ h
3678|QS ó±¿u d¿¦atRÂõd= îÂn±sRNdú
3679|t±õþS tRÂNõ± ýÃõþ lðÓÃMÃÃ÷ õµdS Îî N 299 N
3680|matsyasva-kacchapa-nrsimha-varaha-hamsa-
3681| rajanya-vipra-vibudhesu krtavatarah
3682|tvam pasi nas tri-bhuvanam ca tathadhunesa
3683| bharam bhuvo hara yaduttama vandanam te
3684|SYNONYMS
3685|matsya-in the form of a fish; asva- in the form of a horse;
>| kacchapa- in the form of a tortoise; nrsimha- in the form
>|of Lord Nrsimhadeva; varaha- in the form of a boar; hamsa-
>|in the form of a swan; rajanya- in the form of Lord
>|Ramacandra; vipra- in the form of Lord Parasurama;
>|vibudhesu-and in the form of Vamanadeva; krta-avatarah-who
>|have accepted incarnation; tvam-You; pasi-please protect;
>|nah-us demigods; tri-bhuvanam ca-and the three worlds;
>|tatha-as well; adhuna-now; isa-O Lord; bharam-the burden;
>|bhuvah-of the universe; hara-kindly take away; yadu-uttama-
>|O best of the Yadu dynasty; vandanam te-to You we offer our
>|prayers.
3686|TRANSLATION
3687|"'O Lord of the universe, best of the Yadu dynasty, we are
>|offering our prayers unto You mainly to diminish the heavy
>|burden of the universe. Indeed, You diminished this burden
>|formerly by incarnating in the form of a fish, a horse [
>|Hayagriva], a tortoise, a lion [Lord Nrsimha], a boar [Lord
>|Varaha] and a swan. You also incarnated as Lord Ramacandra,
>|Parasurama and Vamana , the dwarf. You have always
>|protected us demigods and the universe in this way. Now
>|please continue.'
3688|PURPORT
3689|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.2.40).
3690|Madhya 20.300
3691|TEXT 300
3692|TEXT
3693|hNh±õî±Nõþõþ ÆLÁhRD ¿ðÃáAðõþúd h
3694|&í±õî±Nõþõþ ÛNõ qd ¿õõõþí N 300 N
3695|lilavatarera kailun dig-darasana
3696|gunavatarera ebe suna vivarana
3697|SYNONYMS
3698|lila-avatarera-of the incarnations of pastimes; kailun-I
>|have done; dik-darasana-indicating the direction only; guna-
>|avatarera-of incarnations of the material qualities; ebe-
>|now; suna vivarana-hear the description.
3699|TRANSLATION
3700|"I have given a few examples of pastime incarnations. Now I
>|will describe the guna-avataras, the incarnations of the
>|material qualities. Please listen.
3701|Madhya 20.301
3702|TEXT 301
3703|TEXT
3704|õrpÁ±, ¿õøRž, ¿úõ,–¿îd &í Õõî±õþ h
3705|¿S&í Õ/NLÁ¿õþ' LÁNõþ uÔ(c)†I±¿ðÃõIõýÃñõþ N 301 N
3706|brahma, visnu, siva,-tina guna avatara
3707|tri-guna angikari' kare srsty-adi-vyavahara
3708|SYNONYMS
3709|brahma, visnu, siva-Lord Brahma, Lord Visnu and Lord Siva;
>|tina-three; guna avatara-the incarnations of the material
>|qualities; tri-guna-the three qualities of material nature;
>|angikari'-accepting; kare-does; srsti-adi-vyavahara-
>|transactions in reference to the creation, maintenance and
>|dissolution.
3710|TRANSLATION
3711|"There are three functions within this material world.
>|Everything here is created, everything is maintained for
>|some time, and everything is finally dissolved. The Lord
>|therefore incarnates Himself as the controllers of the
>|three qualities-sattva-guna, rajo-guna and tamo-guna [
>|goodness, passion and ignorance]. Thus the transactions of
>|the material world take place.
3712|Madhya 20.302
3713|TEXT 302
3714|TEXT
3715|t¿Mÿ÷|LÔÁîóRNíI ÎLÁ±d æÃNNõ±MÃÃ÷ h
3716|õþNæñ&Ní ¿õt±¿õî LÁ¿õþ' îÂD±õþ ÷d N 302 N
3717|bhakti-misra-krta-punye kona jivottama
3718|rajo-gune vibhavita kari' tanra mana
3719|SYNONYMS
3720|bhakti-misra-krta-punye-because of pious activities mixed
>|with devotional service; kona-someone; jiva-uttama-the best
>|of the living entities; rajah-gune-by the mode of passion;
>|vibhavita-influenced; kari'-making; tanra-his; mana-mind.
3721|TRANSLATION
3722|"Because of his past pious activities mixed with devotional
>|service, the first-class living entity is influenced by the
>|mode of passion within his mind.
3723|Madhya 20.303
3724|TEXT 303
3725|TEXT
3726|áNtS±ðÃLÁú±¿lþZ±õþ± ú¿Mà u=±¿õþ' h
3727|õI¿(c)† uÔ¿(c)† LÁNõþ LÔÁøž õrpÁ±-õþ+ó s¿õþ' N 303 N
3728|garbhodakasayi-dvara sakti sancari'
3729|vyasti srsti kare krsna brahma-rupa dhari'
3730|SYNONYMS
3731|garbha-udaka-sayi-dvara-by Lord Garbhodakasayi Visnu; sakti
>|sancari'-giving him special powers; vyasti-total; srsti-
>|creation; kare-does; krsna-Lord Krsna; brahma-rupa dhari'-
>|accepting the form of Lord Brahma.
3732|TRANSLATION
3733|"Such a devotee is empowered by Garbhodakasayi Visnu. In
>|this way, an incarnation of Krsna in the form of Brahma
>|engineers the total creation of the universe.
3734|PURPORT
3735|The Garbhodakasayi Visnu purusa-avatara expansion of Lord
>|Visnu accepts the material modes-sattva-guna, rajo-guna and
>|tamo-guna-and thus incarnates as Lord Visnu, Brahma and
>|Siva. These are incarnations of the material qualities.
>|Among the many superior living entities qualified with
>|pious activities and devotional service, one, called Lord
>|Brahma, is infused with the quality of passion by the
>|supreme will of Garbhodakasayi Visnu. Thus Lord Brahma
>|becomes the incarnation of the creative energy of the Lord.
3736|Madhya 20.304
3737|TEXT 304
3738|TEXT
3739|t±¦¤±dA ln±¬uLÁNhø¸R ¿dNæÃø¸R ÎîÂæÃÐ
3740|¦¤NlþS ¿LÁlþR ›¶LÁiÂlþîÂI¿ó îÂZðÃS h
3741|õrpÁ± l Ûø¸ æÃáðÃG¿õs±dLÁîS±
3742|Î᱿õµ÷±¿ðóRø¸S îÂ÷ýÃÃS tÂæñ¿÷ N 304 N
3743|bhasvan yathasma-sakalesu nijesu tejah
3744| sviyam kiyat prakatayaty api tadvad atra
3745|brahma ya esa jagad-anda-vidhana-karta
3746| govindam adi-purusam tam aham bhajami
3747|SYNONYMS
3748|bhasvan-the illuminating sun; yatha-as; asma-sakalesu-in
>|various types of precious stones; nijesu-his own; tejah-
>|brilliance; sviyam-his own; kiyat-to some extent;
>|prakatayati-manifests; api-also; tadvat-similarly; atra-
>|here; brahma-Lord Brahma; yah-who is; esah-the Lord; jagat-
>|anda-vidhana-karta-becomes the chief of the universe;
>|govindam adi-purusam-Lord Govinda, the original Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead; tam-Him; aham-I; bhajami-worship.
3749|TRANSLATION
3750|"'The sun manifests his brilliance in a gem, although it
>|is stone. Similarly, the original Personality of Godhead,
>|Govinda, manifests His special power in a pious living
>|entity. Thus the living entity becomes Brahma and manages
>|the affairs of the universe. Let me worship Govinda, the
>|original Personality of Godhead.'
3751|PURPORT
3752|This is a quotation from the Brahma-samhita (5.49).
3753|Madhya 20.305
3754|TEXT 305
3755|TEXT
3756|ÎLÁ±d LÁNŠ l¿ðà Îl±áI æÃNõ d±¿ýÃà ó±lþ h
3757|Õ±óNd T«õþ îÂNõ ÕSNú 'õrpÁ±' ýÃÃlþ N 305 N
3758|kona kalpe yadi yogya jiva nahi paya
3759|apane isvara tabe amse 'brahma' haya
3760|SYNONYMS
3761|kona kalpe-in some lifetime of Brahma; yadi-if; yogya-
>|suitable; jiva-living entity; nahi-not; paya-is available;
>|apane-personally; isvara-the Supreme Lord; tabe-then; amse-
>|by His plenary expansion; brahma haya-becomes Lord Brahma.
3762|TRANSLATION
3763|"If in a kalpa a suitable living entity is not available to
>|take charge of Brahma's post, the Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead Himself personally expands and becomes Lord Brahma.
3764|PURPORT
3765|One day of Brahma consists of the four yugas multiplied a
>|thousand times-or, according to solar calculations, 4,320,
>|000,000 years-and such also is the duration of his night.
>|One year of Brahma's life consists of 360 such days and
>|nights, and Brahma lives for one hundred such years. Such
>|is the life of a Brahma.
3766|Madhya 20.306
3767|TEXT 306
3768|TEXT
3769|luI±¿ã¸âró‚æõþNæñ•¿mhNh±LÁó±Íh-
3770|Î÷NShRIMÃÃÍ÷sSÔîÂ÷Ró±¿uîÂ-îÂNnSîÂNnS÷A h
3771|õrpÁ± tÂNõ±•ýÃÃ÷¿ó luI LÁh±Ð LÁh±lþ±Ð
3772|MN(±ZNýÃÃ÷ ¿aõþ÷uI dÔó±udS -Á N 306 N
3773|yasyanghri-pankaja-rajo 'khila-loka-palair
3774| mauly-uttamair dhrtam upasita-tirtha-tirtham
3775|brahma bhavo 'ham api yasya kalah kalayah
3776| sris codvahema ciram asya nrpasanam kva
3777|SYNONYMS
3778|yasya-whose; anghri-pankaja-lotuslike feet; rajah-the dust;
>|akhila-loka-of the universal planetary systems; palaih-by
>|the masters; mauli-uttamaih-with valuable turbans on their
>|heads; dhrtam-accepted; upasita-worshiped; tirtha-tirtham-
>|the sanctifier of the holy places; brahma-Lord Brahma;
>|bhavah-Lord Siva; aham api-even I; yasya-of whom; kalah-
>|portions; kalayah-of a plenary portion; srih-the goddess of
>|fortune; ca-and; udvahema-we carry; ciram-eternally; asya-
>|of Him; nrpa-asanam-the throne of a king; kva-where.
3779|TRANSLATION
3780|"'What is the value of a throne to Lord Krsna? The masters
>|of the various planetary systems accept the dust of His
>|lotus feet on their crowned heads. That dust makes the holy
>|places sacred, and even Lord Brahma, Lord Siva, Laksmi and
>|I myself, who are all portions of His plenary portion,
>|eternally carry that dust on our heads.'
3781|PURPORT
3782|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.68.37). When
>|the Kauravas flattered Baladeva so that He would become
>|their ally and spoke ill of Sri Krsna, Lord Baladeva became
>|angry and spoke this verse.
3783|Madhya 20.307
3784|TEXT 307
3785|TEXT
3786|¿dæñSú-LÁh±lþ LÔÁøž îÂN÷±-&í Õ/NLÁ¿õþ' h
3787|uSýÃñõþ±NnS ÷±lþ±-uN/ ^-õþ+ó s¿õþ N 307 N
3788|nijamsa-kalaya krsna tamo-guna angikari'
3789|samhararthe maya-sange rudra-rupa dhari
3790|SYNONYMS
3791|nija-amsa-of His personal plenary expansion; kalaya-by an
>|expansion known as kala; krsna-Lord Krsna; tamah-guna-the
>|material mode of darkness; angikari'-accepting; samhara-
>|arthe-for the purpose of dissolution; maya-sange-in
>|association with the external energy; rudra-rupa-the form
>|of Rudra; dhari-assumes.
3792|TRANSLATION
3793|"Lord Krsna, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, expands a
>|portion of His plenary portion and, accepting the
>|association of the material mode of ignorance, assumes the
>|form of Rudra to dissolve the cosmic manifestation.
3794|PURPORT
3795|This is a description of the Rudra form, which is another
>|expansion of Krsna. Only visnu-murtis are expansions of
>|Krsna's personal and plenary portions. Maha-Visnu, who lies
>|on the Causal Ocean, is an expansion of Sankarsana. When
>|Garbhodakasayi Visnu accepts the material modes of nature
>|for the purpose of dissolving the cosmic manifestation, His
>|form is called Rudra. As already explained, Lord Visnu is
>|the controller of maya. How, then, can He associate with
>|maya? The conclusion is that the incarnation of Lord Siva
>|or Lord Brahma indicates the absence of the supreme power
>|of Visnu. When the supreme power is not there, it is
>|possible to associate with maya, the external energy. Lord
>|Brahma and Lord Siva are to be considered creations of maya.
3796|Madhya 20.308
3797|TEXT 308
3798|TEXT
3799|÷±lþ±u/-¿õLÁ±õþN ^–¿tÂi§±¿tÂi§ õþ+ó h
3800|æÃNõîÂN dNýÃÃ, dNýÃà LÔÁNøžõþ '¦¤õþ+ó' N 308 N
3801|maya-sanga-vikari rudra-bhinnabhinna rupa
3802|jiva-tattva nahe, nahe krsnera 'svarupa'
3803|SYNONYMS
3804|maya-sanga-by association with maya; vikari-transformed;
>|rudra-the form of Rudra; bhinna-abhinna rupa-having
>|different types of forms; jiva-tattva nahe-still he is not
>|called jiva-tattva; nahe-nor; krsnera-of Lord Krsna;
>|svarupa -personal form.
3805|TRANSLATION
3806|"Rudra, Lord Siva, has various forms, which are
>|transformations brought about by association with maya.
>|Although Rudra is not on a level with the jiva-tattvas, he
>|still cannot be considered a personal expansion of Lord
>|Krsna.
3807|PURPORT
3808|Rudra is simultaneously one with and different from the
>|visnu-tattva. Due to his association with maya, he is
>|different from the visnu-tattva, but at the same time he is
>|an expansion of Krsna's personal form. This situation is
>|called bhedabheda-tattva or acintya-bhedabheda-tattva,
>|simultaneously one and different.
3809|Madhya 20.309
3810|TEXT 309
3811|TEXT
3812|ðRÃ* Îld Õ¥¡Nl±Ná ðÿsõþ+ó sNõþ h
3813|ðRÃ*±(tm)Lõþ õd dNýÃÃ, ðRÃ* ÆýÃÃNî d±Nõþ N 309 N
3814|dugdha yena amla-yoge dadhi-rupa dhare
3815|dugdhantara vastu nahe, dugdha haite nare
3816|SYNONYMS
3817|dugdha-milk; yena-as; amla-yoge-in association with a sour
>|substance; dadhi-rupa-the form of yogurt; dhare-takes;
>|dugdha-antara-something other than milk; vastu-substance;
>|nahe-is not; dugdha-milk; haite-to be; nare-is not able.
3818|TRANSLATION
3819|"Milk is transformed into yogurt when it associates with a
>|yogurt culture. Thus yogurt is nothing but milk, but still
>|it is not milk.
3820|PURPORT
3821|Of the three deities supervising the creation, maintenance
>|and dissolution of the universe, Lord Visnu is never
>|separate from the original Visnu. However, Lord Siva and
>|Brahma, due to their association with maya, are different
>|from Visnu. Visnu cannot be transformed into any form of
>|material energy. Whenever there is association with maya,
>|the personality involved must be different from Lord Visnu.
>|Therefore Lord Siva and Lord Brahma are called guna-
>|avataras, for they associate with the material qualities.
>|The conclusion is that Rudra is not exactly Lord
>|Visnu but rather a transformation of Visnu.
>|Therefore, he does not come within the category of the
>|visnu-tattvas. Thus he is inconceivably one with Visnu and
>|different from Him. The example given in this verse is very
>|clear. Milk is compared to Visnu. As soon as milk touches a
>|sour substance, it becomes yogurt, or Lord Siva. Although
>|yogurt is constitutionally milk , it cannot be used in
>|place of milk.
3822|Madhya 20.310
3823|TEXT 310
3824|TEXT
3825|ŽÂNõþS ln± ðÿs ¿õLÁ±õþ¿õNúø¸Nl±á±R
3826|uSæñlþNî d îR îÂîÂÐ óÔná¿(tm)¦ ÎýÃÃNî±Рh
3827|lÐ úyRî±÷¿ó îÂn± u÷RÍó¿î LÁ±lS±ðAÃ
3828|Î᱿õµ÷±¿ðóRø¸S îÂ÷ýÃÃS tÂæñ¿÷ N 310 N
3829|ksiram yatha dadhi vikara-visesa-yogat
3830| sanjayate na tu tatah prthag asti hetoh
3831|yah sambhutam api tatha samupaiti karyad
3832| govindam adi-purusam tam aham bhajami
3833|SYNONYMS
3834|ksiram-milk; yatha-as; dadhi-yogurt; vikara-visesa-with a
>|special transforming agent; yogat-by mixing; sanjayate-is
>|transformed into; na-not; tu-but; tatah-from the milk;
>|prthak-separated; asti-is; hetoh-which is the cause; yah-
>|who; sambhutam-the nature of Lord Siva; api-even though;
>|tatha-as; samupaiti-accepts; karyat-for the matter of some
>|particular business; govindam-unto Govinda, the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead; adi-purusam-the original person;
>|tam-unto Him; aham-I; bhajami-offer my respectful
>|obeisances.
3835|TRANSLATION
3836|"'Milk changes into yogurt when mixed with a yogurt
>|culture, but actually it is constitutionally nothing but
>|milk. Similarly, Govinda, the Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead, assumes the form of Lord Siva [Sambhu] for the
>|special purpose of material transactions. I offer my
>|obeisances at His lotus feet.'
3837|PURPORT
3838|This is a quotation from the Brahma-samhita (5.45).
3839|Madhya 20.311
3840|TEXT 311
3841|TEXT
3842|'¿úõ'–÷±lþ±ú¿MÃu/N, îÂN÷±&í±Nõú h
3843|÷±lþ±îÂNîÂ, &í±îÂNî '¿õøRž'–óõþN÷ú N 311 N
3844|'siva'-maya-sakti-sangi, tamo-gunavesa
3845|mayatita, gunatita 'visnu'-paramesa
3846|SYNONYMS
3847|siva-Lord Siva; maya-sakti-sangi-an associate of the
>|external energy; tamah-guna-avesa-absorbed by the quality
>|of ignorance; maya-atita-transcendental to the external
>|energy; guna-atita-transcendental to the qualities of
>|matter; visnu-Visnu; parama-isa-the Supreme Lord.
3848|TRANSLATION
3849|"Lord Siva is an associate of the external energy;
>|therefore he is absorbed in the material quality of
>|darkness. Lord Visnu is transcendental to maya and the
>|qualities of maya. Therefore He is the Supreme Personality
>|of Godhead.
3850|PURPORT
3851|Visnu is beyond the range of the material manifestation,
>|and He is not within the control of the material energy. He
>|is the supreme independent Personality of Godhead. This is
>|admitted even by Sankaracarya: narayanah paro '
>|vyaktat (Gita-bhasya). In his constitutional form, Siva is
>|a maha-bhagavata, a supreme devotee of the Lord, but
>|because he accepts maya's association-especially the
>|quality of ignorance-he is not free from maya's influence.
>|Such an intimate association is completely absent in the
>|Supreme Personality of Godhead, Visnu. Lord Siva accepts
>|maya, but in the presence of Lord Visnu, maya does not
>|exist. Consequently Lord Siva has to be considered a
>|product of maya. When Lord Siva is free from maya's
>|influence, he is in the position of a maha-bhagavata, a
>|supreme devotee of Lord Visnu. Vaisnavanam yatha sambhuh.
3852|Madhya 20.312
3853|TEXT 312
3854|TEXT
3855|¿úõÐ ú¿MÃlRMÃÐ ú«R ¿S¿hN/± &íuSõÔîÂÐ h
3856|ÆõLÁ±¿õþLÁÍ(tm)¦æÃu( î±÷uN(îÂIýÃÃS ¿Ss± N 312 N
3857|sivah sakti-yuktah sasvat
3858| tri-lingo guna-samvrtah
3859|vaikarikas taijasas ca
3860| tamasas cety aham tridha
3861|SYNONYMS
3862|sivah-Lord Siva; sakti-yuktah-associated with material
>|nature; sasvat-eternally; tri-lingah-in three features;
>|guna-samvrtah-covered by the modes of nature; vaikarikah-
>|one is called vaikarika; taijasah ca-another is called
>|taijasa; tamasah ca-as well as tamasa; iti-thus; aham-
>|egotism; tri-dha-three kinds.
3863|TRANSLATION
3864|"'The truth about Lord Siva is that he is always covered
>|with three material coverings-vaikarika, taijasa and tamasa.
>| Because of these three modes of material nature, he always
>|associates with the external energy and egotism itself.'
3865|PURPORT
3866|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.88.3).
3867|Madhya 20.313
3868|TEXT 313
3869|TEXT
3870|ýÃÿõþ¿ýSÃà ¿dáRSíÐ u±ŽÂ±R óRø¸Ð ›¶LÔÁNîÂÐ óõþÐ h
3871|u uõSðÔÃáRó^(c)†± îÂS tÂæÿi§áRSNí± tÂNõR N 313 N
3872|harir hi nirgunah saksat
3873| purusah prakrteh parah
3874|sa sarva-drg upadrasta
3875| tam bhajan nirguno bhavet
3876|SYNONYMS
3877|harih-the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Visnu; hi-
>|certainly; nirgunah-transcendental to all material
>|qualities; saksat-directly; purusah-the supreme enjoyer;
>|prakrteh-material nature; parah-beyond; sah-He; sarva-drk-
>|the seer of everything; upadrasta-the overseer of
>|everything; tam-Him; bhajan-by worshiping; nirgunah-
>|transcendental to material qualities; bhavet-one becomes.
3878|TRANSLATION
3879|"'Sri Hari, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, is
>|situated beyond the range of material nature; therefore He
>|is the supreme transcendental person. He can see everything
>|inside and outside; therefore He is the supreme overseer of
>|all living entities. If someone takes shelter at His lotus
>|feet and worships Him, he also attains a transcendental
>|position.'
3880|PURPORT
3881|This is also a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.88.5).
3882|Madhya 20.314
3883|TEXT 314
3884|TEXT
3885|ó±hd±nS ¦¤±Sú ¿õøRžõþ+Nó Õõî±õþ h
3886|uNáRí ^(c)†±, î±Nî áRí÷±lþ±-ó±õþ N 314 N
3887|palanartha svamsa visnu-rupe avatara
3888|sattva-guna drasta, tate guna-maya-para
3889|SYNONYMS
3890|palana-artha-for maintenance; svamsa-personal plenary
>|expansion; visnu-rupe-in the form of Lord Visnu; avatara-
>|incarnation; sattva-guna-of the mode of goodness; drasta-
>|director; tate-therefore; guna-maya-para-transcendental to
>|the material modes of nature.
3891|TRANSLATION
3892|"For the maintenance of the universe, Lord Krsna descends
>|as His personal plenary expansion in the form of Visnu. He
>|is the director of the mode of goodness; therefore He is
>|transcendental to the material energy.
3893|Madhya 20.315
3894|TEXT 315
3895|TEXT
3896|¦¤õþ+ó–U«lSóÓíS, LÔÁøžu÷ ›¶±lþ h
3897|LÔÁøž ÕSúN, ÎîDÂNýÃñ ÕSú, ÎõNðà ÎýÃÃd á±lþ N 315 N
3898|svarupa-aisvarya-purna, krsna-sama praya
3899|krsna amsi, tenho amsa, vede hena gaya
3900|SYNONYMS
3901|svarupa -personal expansion; aisvarya-purna-full of
>|all opulences; krsna-sama-equal to Krsna; praya-almost;
>|krsna amsi-Krsna is the Supreme Personality of Godhead;
>|tenho-Lord Visnu; amsa-personal expansion; vede-the Vedas;
>|hena-thus; gaya-sing.
3902|TRANSLATION
3903|"Lord Visnu is in the category of svamsa because He has
>|opulences almost equal to Krsna's. Krsna is the original
>|person, and Lord Visnu is His personal expansion. This is
>|the verdict of all Vedic literatures.
3904|PURPORT
3905|Although an incarnation of the material energy, Lord Brahma
>|is nonetheless the director of the material mode of passion.
>| Similarly, Lord Siva, although simultaneously one with and
>|different from Lord Krsna, is still the incarnation of the
>|mode of darkness. However, Lord Visnu is Krsna's personal
>|expansion; therefore He is the director of the mode of
>|goodness and is always transcendentally situated, beyond
>|the jurisdiction of the modes of material nature. Lord
>|Visnu is the original personal expansion of Krsna, and
>|Krsna is the original source of all incarnations. As far as
>|power is concerned, Lord Visnu is as powerful as Lord Krsna
>|because He possesses all the opulences.
3906|Madhya 20.316
3907|TEXT 316
3908|TEXT
3909|ðÃNó±¿aSÂNõþõ ¿ýÃà ðÃú±(tm)Lõþ÷tRÂINóîÂI
3910|ðÃNó±lþNî ¿õõÔîÂNýÃÃîRÂu÷±ds÷S± h
3911|l(tm)¦±ðÔÃNáõ ¿ýÃà a ¿õøRžîÂlþ± ¿õt±¿îÂ
3912|Î᱿õµ÷±¿ðóRø¸S îÂ÷ýÃÃS tÂæñ¿÷ N 316 N
3913|diparcir eva hi dasantaram abhyupetya
3914| dipayate vivrta-hetu-samana-dharma
3915|yas tadrg eva hi ca visnutaya vibhati
3916| govindam adi-purusam tam aham bhajami
3917|SYNONYMS
3918|dipa-arcih-the flame of a lamp; eva-as; hi-certainly; dasa-
>|antaram-another lamp; abhyupetya-expanding; dipayate-
>|illuminates; vivrta-hetu-with its expanded cause; samana-
>|dharma-equally powerful; yah-who; tadrk-similarly; eva-
>|certainly; hi-certainly; ca-also; visnutaya-by His
>|expansion as Lord Visnu; vibhati-illuminates; govindam-to
>|Lord Krsna; adi-purusam-the supreme original person; tam-to
>|Him; aham-I; bhajami-offer my worshipful respect.
3919|TRANSLATION
3920|"'When the flame of one candle is expanded to another
>|candle and placed in a different position, it burns
>|separately, and its illumination is as powerful as the
>|original candle 's. Similarly, the Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead, Govinda, expands Himself in different forms as
>|Visnu, who is equally luminous, powerful and opulent. Let
>|me worship that Supreme Personality of Godhead, Govinda.'
3921|PURPORT
3922|This is a quotation from the Brahma-samhita (5.46).
3923|Madhya 20.317
3924|TEXT 317
3925|TEXT
3926|õrpÁ±, ¿úõ–Õ±:±LÁ±õþN tÂMÃ-Õõî±õþ h
3927|ó±hd±NnS ¿õøRž–LÔÁNøžõþ ¦¤õþ+ó-Õ±LÁ±õþ N 317 N
3928|brahma, siva-ajna-kari bhakta-avatara
3929|palanarthe visnu-krsnera svarupa-akara
3930|SYNONYMS
3931|brahma-Lord Brahma; siva-Lord Siva; ajna-kari-order-
>|carriers; bhakta-avatara-incarnations of devotees; palana-
>|arthe-for maintenance; visnu-Lord Visnu; krsnera-of Lord
>|Krsna; svarupa-akara-in the form of a personal feature.
3932|TRANSLATION
3933|"The conclusion is that Lord Brahma and Lord Siva are
>|simply devotee incarnations who carry out orders. However,
>|Lord Visnu, the maintainer, is the personal feature of Lord
>|Krsna.
3934|Madhya 20.318
3935|TEXT 318
3936|TEXT
3937|uÔæñ¿÷ î ¿i§lRNMñ•ÃÃýÃÃS ý Ãà Nõþ± ýÃ
>|õþ¿î îÂZúÐ h
3938|¿õ«S óRø¸õþ+Nóí ó¿õþó±¿î ¿Sú¿MÃsÔLAÁ N 318 N
3939|srjami tan-niyukto 'ham
3940| haro harati tad-vasah
3941|visvam purusa-rupena
3942| paripati tri-sakti-dhrk
3943|SYNONYMS
3944|srjami-create; tat-niyuktah-engaged by Him; aham-I; harah-
>|Lord Siva; harati-annihilates; tat-vasah-under His control;
>|visvam-the whole universe; purusa-rupena-in the form of
>|Lord Visnu; paripati-maintains; tri-sakti-dhrk-the
>|controller of the three modes of material nature.
3945|TRANSLATION
3946|"[ Lord Brahma said : ] 'I am engaged by the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead to create. Following His orders,
>|Lord Siva dissolves everything. The Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead in His form of Ksirodakasayi Visnu maintains
>|all the affairs of material nature. Thus the supreme
>|controller of the three modes of material nature is Lord
>|Visnu. '
3947|PURPORT
3948|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (2.6.32). Lord
>|Brahma gave this information to Devarsi Narada when he was
>|receiving instructions from Lord Brahma to understand the
>|Supreme Personality of Godhead, Paramatma. After describing
>|the universal form of the Lord, Lord Brahma explained that
>|his position and Lord Siva's position are controlled by
>|Lord Visnu.
3949|Madhya 20.319
3950|TEXT 319
3951|TEXT
3952|÷i¤(tm)Lõþ±õî±õþ ÛNõ qd, ud±îd h
3953|ÕuSmI áíd îD±õþ, qdýÃà LÁ±õþí N 319 N
3954|manvantaravatara ebe suna, sanatana
3955|asankhya ganana tanra, sunaha karana
3956|SYNONYMS
3957|manu-antara-avatara-the incarnations who appear
>|during the reign of each Manu; ebe-now; suna-hear; sanatana-
>|O Sanatana Gosvami; asankhya-unlimited; ganana-counting;
>|tanra-of them; sunaha-just hear; karana-the cause.
3958|TRANSLATION
3959|"O Sanatana, now just hear about the incarnations who
>|appear during the reign of each Manu [manvantara-avataras].
>|They are unlimited, and no one can count them. Just hear of
>|their source.
3960|Madhya 20.320
3961|TEXT 320
3962|TEXT
3963|õrpÁ±õþ ÛLÁ ¿ðÃNd ýÃÃlþ ÎaÂNV ÷i¤(tm)Lõþ h
3964|ÎaÂNV Õõî±õþ î±ýÃÃD± LÁNõþd T«õþ N 320 N
3965|brahmara eka-dine haya caudda manvantara
3966|caudda avatara tahan karena isvara
3967|SYNONYMS
3968|brahmara eka-dine-in one day of Brahma; haya-there are;
>|caudda-fourteen; manu-antara-changes of Manu; caudda-
>|fourteen; avatara-incarnations; tahan-in that time; karena-
>|manifests; isvara-the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
3969|TRANSLATION
3970|"In one day of Brahma, there are fourteen changes of the
>|Manus, and during the reign of each of those fourteen
>|Manus , an incarnation is manifested by the
>|Supreme Personality of Godhead.
3971|PURPORT
3972|From this verse it can be calculated that in
>|one month (30 days) of Brahma 's life there are
>|420 manvantara-avataras and
>| that in one year (360 days) of his life
>|there are 5,040 manvantara incarnations. Thus for the one
>|hundred years of Brahma's life, there is a total of 504,000
>|manvantara-avataras . In addition, the Manus themselves are
>|considered partial incarnations of the Supreme Personality
>|of Godhead.
3973|Madhya 20.321
3974|TEXT 321
3975|TEXT
3976|ÎaÂNV ÛLÁ ¿ðÃNd, ÷±Nu a±¿õþúî ¿õú h
3977|õrpÁ±õþ õRuNõþ ó=uýÃÃ¦Ú a¿~ú N 321 N
3978|caudda eka dine, mase cari-sata bisa
3979|brahmara vatsare panca-sahasra callisa
3980|SYNONYMS
3981|caudda-14; eka dine-in one day; mase-in one month; cari-
>|sata bisa-420; brahmara vatsare-in one year of Brahma;
>|panca-sahasra callisa-5,040 avataras.
3982|TRANSLATION
3983|"There are 14 manvantara-avataras in one day of Brahma, 420
>|in one month, and 5,040 in one year.
3984|Madhya 20.322
3985|TEXT 322
3986|TEXT
3987|úNîÂLÁ õRuõþ ýÃÃlþ 'æÃNõd' õrpÁ±õþ
>|h
3988|ó=hŽÂ a±¿õþuýÃÃ¦Ú ÷i¤(tm)Lõþ±õî±õþ N 322 N
3989|sateka vatsara haya 'jivana' brahmara
3990|panca-laksa cari-sahasra manvantaravatara
3991|SYNONYMS
3992|sateka vatsara haya-there are one hundred years; jivana-the
>|duration of life; brahmara-of Brahma; panca-laksa-500,000;
>|cari-sahasra-4,000; manu-antara-avatara-incarnations who
>|appear during the reign of each Manu.
3993|TRANSLATION
3994|"During the hundred years of Brahma's life, there are 504,
>|000 manvantara-avataras.
3995|Madhya 20.323
3996|TEXT 323
3997|TEXT
3998|Õd(tm)L õrpÁ±NG UNrà LÁõþýÃà áíd h
3999|÷ýÃñ¿õøRž ÛLÁ«±Nu õrpÁ±õþ æÃNõd N 323 N
4000|ananta brahmande aiche karaha ganana
4001|maha-visnu eka-svase brahmara jivana
4002|SYNONYMS
4003|ananta brahmande-in innumerable universes; aiche-in that
>|way; karaha ganana-just try to count; maha-visnu-Lord Maha-
>|Visnu; eka-svase-by one exhalation; brahmara jivana-the
>|duration of life of one Brahma.
4004|TRANSLATION
4005|"The number of manvantara-avataras for only one universe
>|has been given. One can only imagine how many manvantara-
>|avataras exist in the innumerable universes. And all these
>|universes and Brahmas exist only during one exhalation of
>|Maha-Visnu.
4006|Madhya 20.324
4007|TEXT 324
4008|TEXT
4009|÷ýÃñ¿õøRžõþ ¿d«±Nuõþ d±¿ýÃÃLÁ ólS(tm)L h
4010|ÛLÁ ÷i¤(tm)Lõþ±õî±Nõþõþ ÎðÃm Îhm±õþ Õ(tm)L N 324 N
4011|maha-visnura nisvasera nahika paryanta
4012|eka manvantaravatarera dekha lekhara anta
4013|SYNONYMS
4014|maha-visnura-of Lord Maha-Visnu; nisvasera-of the
>|exhalations; nahika paryanta-there is no limit; eka
>|manvantara-avatarera-of only one feature of the Lord,
>|namely the manvantara-avataras; dekha-just see; lekhara
>|anta-it is beyond the power of writing.
4015|TRANSLATION
4016|"There is no limit to the exhalations of Maha-Visnu. Just
>|see how impossible it is to speak or write of only the
>|manvantara- avataras !
4017|Madhya 20.325
4018|TEXT 325
4019|TEXT
4020|¦¤±lþStRÂNõ 'l:', ¦¤±Nõþ±¿aÂNø¸ '¿õtRÂ' d±÷ h
4021|ÞMÃÃN÷ 'uîÂINud', î±÷Nu 'ýÃÿõþ' Õ¿tÂs±d N 325 N
4022|svayambhuve 'yajna', svarocise 'vibhu' nama
4023|auttame 'satyasena', tamase 'hari' abhidhana
4024|SYNONYMS
4025|svayambhuve-in the Svayambhuva-manvantara; yajna-the
>|avatara named Yajna; svarocise-in the Svarocisa-manvantara;
>|vibhu-the avatara Vibhu; nama-named; auttame-in the Auttama-
>|manvantara; satyasena-the avatara named Satyasena; tamase-
>|in the Tamasa-manvantara; hari-Hari; abhidhana-named.
4026|TRANSLATION
4027|"In the Svayambhuva-manvantara, the avatara is named Yajna.
>| In the Svarocisa-manvantara, he is named Vibhu. In the
>|Auttama-manvantara, He is named Satyasena, and in the
>|Tamasa-manvantara , He is named Hari.
4028|Madhya 20.326
4029|TEXT 326
4030|TEXT
4031|ÆõþõNî ' ÆõLRÁF' , a±ŽRÂNø¸ ' Õ
>|¿æÃîÂ', Æõõ¦¤Nî ' õ±÷d' h
4032|u±õNíSI 'u±õSNtÂN÷', ðÃŽÂu±õNíSI 'HÂø¸tÂ' áíd N 326 N
4033|raivate 'vaikuntha', caksuse 'ajita', vaivasvate 'vamana'
4034|savarnye 'sarvabhauma', daksa-savarnye 'rsabha' ganana
4035|SYNONYMS
4036|raivate-in the Raivata-manvantara; vaikuntha-the avatara
>|named Vaikuntha; caksuse-in the Caksusa-manvantara; ajita-
>|the avatara named Ajita; vaivasvate-in the Vaivasvata-
>|manvantara; vamana-the avatara named Vamana; savarnye-in
>|the Savarnya-manvantara; sarvabhauma-the avatara named
>|Sarvabhauma; daksa-savarnye-in the Daksa-savarnya-
>|manvantara; rsabha-the avatara named Rsabha; ganana-named.
4037|TRANSLATION
4038|"In the Raivata-manvantara, the avatara is named Vaikuntha,
>| and in the Caksusa-manvantara, He is named Ajita. In the
>|Vaivasvata-manvantara, He is named Vamana, and in the
>|Savarnya-manvantara, He is named Sarvabhauma. In the Daksa-
>|savarnya-manvantara, he is named Rsabha.
4039|Madhya 20.327
4040|TEXT 327
4041|TEXT
4042|õrpÁu±õNíSI '¿õø¸3LAÁNud', 's÷SNuîRÂ' s÷Su±õNíSI h
4043|^u±õNíSI 'uRs±÷±', 'Îl±Ná«õþ' Îðõu±õNíIS N 327 N
4044|brahma-savarnye 'visvaksena', 'dharmasetu' dharma-savarnye
4045|rudra-savarnye 'sudhama', 'yogesvara' deva-savarnye
4046|SYNONYMS
4047|brahma-savarnye-in the Brahma-savarnya-manvantara;
>|visvaksena-the avatara named Visvaksena; dharmasetu-the
>|avatara named Dharmasetu; dharma-savarnye-in the Dharma-
>|savarnya-manvantara; rudra-savarnye-in the Rudra-savarnya-
>|manvantara; sudhama-the avatara named Sudhama; yogesvara-
>|the avatara named Yogesvara; deva-savarnye-in the Deva-
>|savarnya-manvantara.
4048|TRANSLATION
4049|"In the Brahma-savarnya-manvantara, the avatara is named
>|Visvaksena, and in the Dharma-savarnya, he is named
>|Dharmasetu. In the Rudra-savarnya he is named Sudhama, and
>|in the Deva-savarnya, he is named Yogesvara.
4050|Madhya 20.328
4051|TEXT 328
4052|TEXT
4053|ý×ÃÃfu±õNíSI 'õÔýÃÃ3/4ñdR' Õ¿tÂs±d h
4054|Ûý×Ãà ÎaÂNV ÷i¤(tm)LNõþ ÎaÂNV 'Õõî±õþ' d±÷ N 328 N
4055|indra-savarnye 'brhadbhanu' abhidhana
4056|ei caudda manvantare caudda 'avatara' nama
4057|SYNONYMS
4058|indra-savarnye-in the Indra-savarnya-manvantara; brhadbhanu-
>|the avatara named Brhadbhanu; abhidhana-named; ei caudda
>|manvantare-in the fourteen manvantaras; caudda-fourteen;
>|avatara-of the incarnations; nama-different names.
4059|TRANSLATION
4060|"In the Indra-savarnya-manvantara, the avatara is named
>|Brhadbhanu. These are the names of the fourteen avataras in
>|the fourteen manvantaras.
4061|PURPORT
4062|Srila Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Thakura, in his Anubhasya,
>|gives a list of Manus and their fathers' names: (1)
>|Svayambhuva Manu, the son of Lord Brahma; (2) Svarocisa,
>|the son of Svarocis, or Agni, the predominating deity of
>|fire; (3) Uttama, the son of King Priyavrata; (4) Tamasa,
>|the brother of Uttama; (5) Raivata, the twin brother of
>|Tamasa; (6) Caksusa, the son of the demigod Caksus; (7)
>|Vaivasvata, the son of Vivasvan, the sun-god (whose name is
>|mentioned in the Bhagavad-gita [4.1 ]); (8) Savarni, a
>|son born to the sun-god and his wife Chaya; (9) Daksa-
>|savarni, the son of the demigod Varuna; (10) Brahma-savarni,
>| the son of Upasloka; (11 –14) Rudra-savarni, Dharma-
>|savarni, Deva-savarni and Indra-savarni, the sons of Rudra,
>|Ruci, Satyasaha and Bhuti respectively.
4063|Madhya 20.329
4064|TEXT 329
4065|TEXT
4066|lRá±õî±õþ ÛNõ qd, ud±îd h
4067|uîÂI-ÎSî±-Z±óõþ-LÁ¿h-lRNáõþ áíd N 329 N
4068|yugavatara ebe suna, sanatana
4069|satya-treta-dvapara-kali-yugera ganana
4070|SYNONYMS
4071|yuga-avatara-incarnation of millenniums; ebe-now; suna-hear;
>| sanatana-O Sanatana Gosvami; satya-treta-dvapara-kali-
>|yugera-of Satya-yuga, Treta-yuga, Dvapara-yuga and Kali-
>|yuga; ganana-the chronological order.
4072|TRANSLATION
4073|"O Sanatana, now hear from Me about the yuga-avataras, the
>|incarnations for the millenniums. First of all, there are
>|four yugas-Satya-yuga, Treta-yuga, Dvapara-yuga and Kali-
>|yuga.
4074|Madhya 20.330
4075|TEXT 330
4076|TEXT
4077|qLvÁ-õþMÃ-LÔÁøž-óNî–SN÷ a±¿õþ õíS h
4078|a±¿õþ õíS s¿õþ' LÔÁøž LÁNõþd lRás÷S N 330 N
4079|sukla-rakta-krsna-pita-krame cari varna
4080|cari varna dhari' krsna karena yuga-dharma
4081|SYNONYMS
4082|sukla-white; rakta-red; krsna-black; pita-yellow; krame-one
>|after another; cari varna-four colors; cari varna dhari'-
>|accepting these four colors; krsna-Lord Krsna; karena yuga-
>|dharma-manifests His pastimes in different millenniums.
4083|TRANSLATION
4084|"In the four yugas-Satya, Treta, Dvapara and Kali-the Lord
>|incarnates in four colors: white, red, black and yellow
>|respectively. These are the colors of the incarnations in
>|different millenniums.
4085|Madhya 20.331
4086|TEXT 331
4087|TEXT
4088|Õ±udA õíS±¦aNlþ± ýÃÃIuI áÔÃÃNÃÃdRlRáS îdÓÐ h
4089|qNLvÁ± õþMÃ(tm)¦n± óNî ý×ÃÃðñdNS LÔÁøžî±S áîÂÐ N 331 N
4090|asan varnas trayo hy asya
4091| grhnato 'nu-yugam tanuh
4092|suklo raktas tatha pita
4093| idanim krsnatam gatah
4094|SYNONYMS
4095|asan-there were; varnah-colors; trayah-three; hi-certainly;
>|asya-of your son; grhnatah-accepting; anu-yugam-according
>|to the millennium; tanuh-body; suklah-white; raktah-red;
>|tatha-as well as; pitah-yellow; idanim-just now; krsnatam
>|gatah-He has assumed a blackish hue.
4096|TRANSLATION
4097|"'This child formerly had three colors according to the
>|prescribed color for different millenniums. Formerly He was
>|white, red and yellow, and now He has assumed a blackish
>|color.'
4098|PURPORT
4099|This verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.8.13) was spoken by
>|Garga Muni when performing the name-giving ceremony
>|for Krsna at the house of Nanda Maharaja. The following two
>|verses are also from Srimad-Bhagavatam (11.5.21, 24).
4100|Madhya 20.332
4101|TEXT 332
4102|TEXT
4103|LÔÁNî qLvÁ(îRÂõS±UæSÿiÂNh± õ{èh±¥¤õþÐ h
4104|LÔÁøž±¿æÃNd±óõN±dA ¿õwðAÃðÃGLÁ÷GhÓ N 332 N
4105|krte suklas catur-bahur
4106| jatilo valkalambarah
4107|krsnajinopavitaksan
4108| bibhrad danda-kamandalu
4109|SYNONYMS
4110|krte-in Satya-yuga; suklah-having a white color and
>|bearing the name Sukla; catuh-bahuh-having four arms;
>|jatilah-with a bunch of hair; valkala-ambarah-wearing a
>|garment made of tree bark; krsna-ajina-black-colored
>|antelope skin; upavita-sacred thread; aksan-a garland of
>|beads for chanting; bibhrat-carried; danda-kamandalu-a rod
>|and waterpot.
4111|TRANSLATION
4112|"'In Satya-yuga the Lord appeared in a body colored
>|white , with four arms and matted hair. He wore tree bark
>|and bore a black antelope skin. He wore a sacred thread and
>|a garland of rudraksa beads. He carried a rod and a
>|waterpot, and He was a brahmacari.'
4113|Madhya 20.333
4114|TEXT 333
4115|TEXT
4116|ÎSî±lþ±S õþMõNíS±•ÃÃNuN aÂîRÂõS±U¿¦aN÷mhÐ h
4117|¿ýÃõþíINLÁú¦alI±R± ¦ÚRÃLAÁ¦ÚRõ±ðRÃIóhŽÂíÐ N 333 N
4118|tretayam rakta-varno 'sau
4119| catur-bahus tri-mekhalah
4120|hiranya-kesas trayy-atma
4121| sruk- sruvady -upalaksanah
4122|SYNONYMS
4123|tretayam-in Treta-yuga; rakta-varnah-of a reddish color;
>| asau-He; catuh-bahuh-with four arms; tri-mekhalah-having
>|three circles on the abdomen; hiranya-kesah-hair colored
>|like gold; trayi-atma-whose form manifests the Vedas; sruk-
>|sruva-adi-upalaksanah-decorated with the sacrificial spoon,
>|ladle and so on.
4124|TRANSLATION
4125|"'In Treta-yuga, the Lord appeared in a body that had
>|a reddish hue and four arms. There were three distinctive
>|lines on His abdomen, and His hair was golden. His form
>|manifested the Vedic knowledge, and He bore the symbols of
>|a sacrificial spoon, ladle and so on.'
4126|Madhya 20.334
4127|TEXT 334
4128|TEXT
4129|uîÂIlRNá s÷S-sI±d LÁõþ±lþ 'qLvÁ'-÷Ó¿îS s¿õþ' h
4130|LÁðS÷NLÁ õõþ ¿ðÃh± ÎlDNýÃñ LÔÁó± LÁ¿õþ' N 334 N
4131|satya-yuge dharma-dhyana karaya 'sukla'-murti dhari'
4132|kardamake vara dila yenho krpa kari'
4133|SYNONYMS
4134|satya-yuge-in the millennium of Satya-yuga; dharma-dhyana-
>|religious principles and meditation; karaya-induces; sukla-
>|whitish; murti-form; dhari'-accepting; kardamake-to Kardama
>|Muni; vara dila-gave benedictions; yenho-who; krpa kari'-
>|out of causeless mercy.
4135|TRANSLATION
4136|"As the white incarnation, the Lord taught religion and
>|meditation. He offered benedictions to Kardama Muni, and in
>|this way He showed His causeless mercy.
4137|PURPORT
4138|Kardama Muni was one of the prajapatis. He married Devahuti,
>| the daughter of Manu, and their son was Kapiladeva. The
>|Supreme Lord was very pleased with Kardama Muni's
>|austerities, and He appeared before Kardama Muni in a
>|whitish body. This happened in the Satya-yuga millennium,
>|when people were accustomed to practicing meditation.
4139|Madhya 20.335
4140|TEXT 335
4141|TEXT
4142|LÔÁøž-'sI±d' LÁNõþ Îh±LÁ :±d-Õ¿sLÁ±õþN h
4143|ÎSî±õþ s÷S 'l:' ÂLÁõþ±lþ 'õþMÃ'-õíS s¿õþ' N 335 N
4144|krsna-'dhyana' kare loka jnana-adhikari
4145|tretara dharma 'yajna' karaya 'rakta'-varna dhari'
4146|SYNONYMS
4147|krsna-dhyana-meditation upon Krsna; kare-perform; loka-the
>|people; jnana-adhikari-who are advanced in spiritual
>|knowledge; tretara-of Treta-yuga; dharma-the
>|occupational duty; yajna-performance of sacrifices; karaya-
>|induces; rakta-varna dhari'-assuming a reddish color.
4148|TRANSLATION
4149|"In Satya-yuga the people were generally advanced in
>|spiritual knowledge and could meditate upon Krsna very
>|easily. The people's occupational duty in Treta-yuga was to
>|perform great sacrifices. This was induced by the
>|Personality of Godhead in His reddish incarnation.
4150|Madhya 20.336
4151|TEXT 336
4152|TEXT
4153|'LÔÁøžóðñaSÂd' ýÃÃlþ Z±óNõþõþ s÷S h
4154|'LÔÁøž'-õNíS LÁõþ±lþ Îh±NLÁ LÔÁøž±aSÂd-LÁ÷S N 336 N
4155|'krsna-padarcana' haya dvaparera dharma
4156|'krsna'-varne karaya loke krsnarcana-karma
4157|SYNONYMS
4158|krsna-pada-arcana-worshiping the lotus feet of Krsna; haya-
>|is; dvaparera-of Dvapara millennium; dharma-the
>|occupational duty; krsna-varne-in a blackish color; karaya-
>|induces; loke-to the people; krsna-arcana-karma-the
>|activities of worshiping Lord Krsna.
4159|TRANSLATION
4160|"In Dvapara-yuga the people's occupational duty was to
>|worship the lotus feet of Krsna. Therefore Lord Krsna,
>|appearing in a blackish body, personally induced people to
>|worship Him.
4161|Madhya 20.337
4162|TEXT 337
4163|TEXT
4164|Z±óNõþ tÂáõ±dA úI±÷Ð óNîõ±u± ¿dæñlþRsÐ h
4165|MõRu±¿ðÿtõþÍ‚( hŽÂÍíóh¿ŽÂîÂÐ N 337 N
4166|dvapare bhagavan syamah
4167| pita-vasa nijayudhah
4168|sri-vatsadibhir ankais ca
4169| laksanair upalaksitah
4170|SYNONYMS
4171|dvapare-in Dvapara-yuga; bhagavan-the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead; syamah-blackish; pita-vasah-having
>|yellow clothes; nija-own; ayudhah-having weapons; sri-vatsa-
>|adibhih-such as Srivatsa; ankaih-by bodily markings; ca-and;
>| laksanaih-by external characteristics such as the
>|Kaustubha jewel; upalaksitah-characterized.
4172|TRANSLATION
4173|"'In Dvapara-yuga the Personality of Godhead appears
>|in a blackish hue. He is dressed in yellow, He holds His
>|own weapons, and He is decorated with the Kaustubha jewel
>|and the mark of Srivatsa. That is how His symptoms are
>|described.'
4174|PURPORT
4175|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (11.5.27). The
>|syama color is not exactly blackish. Srila Bhaktisiddhanta
>|Sarasvati Thakura compares it to the color of the atasi
>|flower. It is not that Lord Krsna Himself appears in a
>|blackish color in all the Dvapara-yugas. In other Dvapara-
>|yugas, previous to Lord Krsna's appearance, the Supreme
>|Lord appeared in a greenish body by His own personal
>|expansion. This is mentioned in the Visnu Purana, Hari-
>|vamsa and Mahabharata.
4176|Madhya 20.338
4177|TEXT 338
4178|TEXT
4179|d÷N(tm)¦ õ±uRNðõ±lþ d÷Ð u‚ø¸Sí±lþ a h
4180|›¶ðRÃI¥§±lþ±¿dX±lþ îRÂtÂIS tÂáõNî d÷Ð N 338 N
4181|namas te vasudevaya
4182| namah sankarsanaya ca
4183|pradyumnayaniruddhaya
4184| tubhyam bhagavate namah
4185|SYNONYMS
4186|namah-let me offer my respectful obeisances; te-unto You;
>|vasudevaya-Lord Vasudeva; namah-respectful obeisances;
>|sankarsanaya ca-also to Lord Sankarsana; pradyumnaya-to
>|Lord Pradyumna; aniruddhaya-unto Aniruddha; tubhyam-unto
>|You; bhagavate-unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead;
>|namah-my respectful obeisances.
4187|TRANSLATION
4188|"'I offer my respectful obeisances unto the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead, expanded as Vasudeva, Sankarsana,
>|Pradyumna and Aniruddha.'
4189|PURPORT
4190|This is a prayer from Srimad-Bhagavatam (11.5.29) spoken by
>|Karabhajana Muni when he was questioned by Maharaja Nimi,
>|the King of Videha, about the incarnations in specific
>|yugas and their method of worship. Karabhajana Muni was one
>|of the nine Yogendras, and he met the King to inform him
>|about future incarnations.
4191|Madhya 20.339
4192|TEXT 339
4193|TEXT
4194|Ûý×Ãà ÷NLa Z±óNõþ LÁNõþ LÔÁøž±aSÂd h
4195|'LÔÁøžd±÷-uSLÁNîSÂd'–LÁ¿hlRNáõþ s÷S N 339 N
4196|ei mantre dvapare kare krsnarcana
4197|'krsna-nama-sankirtana'-kali-yugera dharma
4198|SYNONYMS
4199|ei mantre-by this mantra; dvapare-in the Age of Dvapara;
>|kare-perform; krsna-arcana-the worship of Lord Krsna; krsna-
>|nama-sankirtana-chanting of the holy name of Lord Krsna;
>|kali-yugera dharma-the occupational duty in the Age of Kali.
4200|TRANSLATION
4201|"By this mantra, the people worship Lord Krsna in
>|Dvapara-yuga. In Kali-yuga the occupational duty of
>|the people is to chant congregationally the holy name of
>|Krsna.
4202|PURPORT
4203|As stated in Srimad-Bhagavatam (12.3.51):
4204|kaler dosa-nidhe rajann asti hy eko mahan gunah
4205|kirtanad eva krsnasya mukta -bandhah param vrajet
4206|"My dear King, although Kali-yuga is full of
>|faults, there is still one good quality about this age. It
>|is that simply by chanting the Hare Krsna maha-mantra, one
>|can become free from material bondage and be promoted to
>|the transcendental kingdom." Thus in Kali-yuga one worships
>|Lord Krsna by chanting Hare Krsna, Hare Krsna, Krsna Krsna,
>|Hare Hare/ Hare Rama, Hare Rama, Rama Rama, Hare Hare. To
>|propagate this movement, Lord Krsna personally appeared as
>|Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu. That is described in the
>|following verse.
4207|Madhya 20.340
4208|TEXT 340
4209|TEXT
4210|'óNîÂ'- õíS s¿õþ' îÂNõ ÆLÁh± ›¶õîSÂd
>|h
4211|Λ¶÷t¿Mà ¿ðÃh± Îh±NLÁ hÛž± tÂMÃáí N 340 N
4212|'pita'-varna dhari' tabe kaila pravartana
4213|prema-bhakti dila loke lana bhakta-gana
4214|SYNONYMS
4215|pita-varna dhari'-assuming the color yellow; tabe-
>|thereafter; kaila pravartana-introduced the sankirtana
>|movement; prema-bhakti dila-He distributed love of Krsna;
>|loke-to the people in general; lana bhakta-gana-accompanied
>|by His devotees.
4216|TRANSLATION
4217|"In the Age of Kali, Lord Krsna
>|assumes a golden color and, accompanied by His personal
>|devotees, introduces hari-nama-sankirtana, the chanting of
>|the Hare Krsna mantra . By this process
>| He delivers love for Krsna to the general populace.
4218|Madhya 20.341
4219|TEXT 341
4220|TEXT
4221|s÷S ›¶õîSÂd LÁNõþ õrNæÃfdµd h
4222|Λ¶N÷ á±lþ d±Na Îh±LÁ LÁNõþ u‚NîSÂd N 341 N
4223|dharma pravartana kare vrajendra-nandana
4224|preme gaya nace loka kare sankirtana
4225|SYNONYMS
4226|dharma pravartana kare-introduces a particular type of
>|religious activity; vrajendra-nandana-Krsna Himself; preme-
>|in love; gaya-chants; nace-dances; loka-all people; kare-
>|perform; sankirtana-congregational chanting.
4227|TRANSLATION
4228|"Lord Krsna, the son of Nanda Maharaja, personally
>|introduces the occupational duty of the Age of Kali. He
>|personally chants and dances in ecstatic love, and thus the
>|entire world chants congregationally.
4229|Madhya 20.342
4230|TEXT 342
4231|TEXT
4232|LÔ ÁøžõíSS ¿Q ø¸±•ÃÃLÔÁøžS u±N/±ó±/±¦
>|aó±ø¸SðÃ÷A h
4233|lÍ:Ð u‚NîSÂd-›¶±ÍlþlSæÿ(tm)L ¿ýÃà uRN÷suÐ N 342 N
4234|krsna-varnam tvisakrsnam
4235| sangopangastra-parsadam
4236|yajnaih sankirtana-prayair
4237| yajanti hi su-medhasah
4238|SYNONYMS
4239|krsna-varnam-repeating the syllables krs-na; tvisa-with a
>|luster; akrsnam-not black (golden); sa-anga-with associates;
>| upa-anga-servitors; astra-weapons; parsadam-
>|confidential companions; yajnaih-by sacrifice; sankirtana-
>|prayaih-consisting chiefly of congregational chanting;
>|yajanti-they worship; hi-certainly; su-medhasah-intelligent
>|persons.
4240|TRANSLATION
4241|"'In the Age of Kali, intelligent persons perform
>|congregational chanting to worship the incarnation of
>|Godhead who constantly sings the name of Krsna. Although
>|His complexion is not blackish, He is Krsna Himself. He is
>|accompanied by His associates, servants, weapons and
>|confidential companions.'
4242|PURPORT
4243|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (11.5.32). See
>|also Adi-lila, Chapter Three, text 52.
4244|Madhya 20.343
4245|TEXT 343
4246|TEXT
4247|Õ±õþ ¿îdlRNá sI±d±¿ðÃNî Îlý×Ãà ôÂh ýÃÃlþ h
4248|LÁ¿hlRNá LÔÁøžd±N÷ Îuý×Ãà ôÂh ó±lþ N 343 N
4249|ara tina-yuge dhyanadite yei phala haya
4250|kali-yuge krsna-name sei phala paya
4251|SYNONYMS
4252|ara tina-yuge-in the three other yugas; dhyana-adite-by
>|processes beginning with meditation; yei-whatever; phala-
>|result; haya-there is; kali-yuge-in this Age of Kali; krsna-
>|name-by chanting the Hare Krsna maha-mantra; sei phala paya-
>|one gets the same achievement.
4253|TRANSLATION
4254|"In the other three yugas-Satya, Treta and Dvapara-people
>|perform different types of spiritual activities. Whatever
>|results they achieve in that way, they can achieve in Kali-
>|yuga simply by chanting the Hare Krsna maha-mantra.
4255|Madhya 20.344
4256|TEXT 344
4257|TEXT
4258|LÁNhNðÃS±ø¸¿dNs õþ±æÃi§¿(tm)¦ ÎýÃÃINLÁ± ÷ýÃñdA &íÐ h
4259|LÁNîSÂd±Nðõ LÔÁøžuI ÷RMõgÐ óõþS õrNæÃR N 344 N
4260|kaler dosa-nidhe rajann
4261| asti hy eko mahan gunah
4262|kirtanad eva krsnasya
4263| mukta-bandhah param vrajet
4264|SYNONYMS
4265|kaleh-of the Age of Kali; dosa-nidhe-in the ocean of faults;
>| rajan-O King; asti-there is; hi-certainly; ekah-one; mahan-
>|very great; gunah-good quality; kirtanat-by chanting; eva-
>|certainly; krsnasya-of the holy name of Krsna; mukta-
>|bandhah-liberated from material bondage; param-to the
>|transcendental, spiritual kingdom; vrajet-one can go.
4266|TRANSLATION
4267|"'My dear King, although Kali-yuga is full of faults,
>|there is still one good quality about this age. It is that
>|simply by chanting the Hare Krsna maha-mantra, one can
>|become free from material bondage and be promoted to the
>|transcendental kingdom. '
4268|PURPORT
4269|As mentioned above , this verse is Srimad-Bhagavatam
>|12.3.51 .
4270|Madhya 20.345
4271|TEXT 345
4272|TEXT
4273|LÔÁNî lXI±lþNî± ¿õøRžS ÎSî±lþ±S læÃNî± ÷ÍmÐ h
4274|Z±óNõþ ó¿õþaÂlS±lþ±S LÁNhN îÂX¿õþLÁNîSÂd±R N 345 N
4275|krte yad dhyayato visnum
4276| tretayam yajato makhaih
4277|dvapare paricaryayam
4278| kalau tad dhari-kirtanat
4279|SYNONYMS
4280|krte-in Satya-yuga; yat-which; dhyayatah-from
>|meditation; visnum-on Lord Visnu; tretayam-in Treta-
>|yuga; yajatah-from worshiping; makhaih-by performing
>|sacrifices; dvapare-in the age of Dvapara; paricaryayam-by
>|worshiping the lotus feet of Krsna; kalau-in the Age of
>|Kali; tat-that same result (can be achieved); hari-kirtanat-
>|simply by chanting the Hare Krsna maha-mantra.
4281|TRANSLATION
4282|"'Whatever result was obtained in Satya-yuga by meditating
>|on Visnu, in Treta-yuga by performing sacrifices and in
>|Dvapara-yuga by serving the Lord's lotus feet can also be
>|obtained in Kali-yuga simply by chanting the Hare Krsna
>|maha-mantra.'
4283|PURPORT
4284|This verse is quoted from Srimad-Bhagavatam (12.3.52). At
>|the present moment in Kali-yuga there are many false
>|meditators who concoct some imaginary form and try to
>|meditate upon it. It has become fashionable to meditate,
>|but people know nothing about the object of meditation.
>|That is explained here. Yad dhyayato visnum. One has to
>|meditate upon Lord Visnu or Lord Krsna. Without referring
>|to the sastras, so-called meditators aim at impersonal
>|objects. Lord Krsna has condemned them in the Bhagavad-gita
>|(12.5):
4285|kleso 'dhikataras tesam avyaktasakta-cetasam
4286|avyakta hi gatir duhkham dehavadbhir avapyate
4287|"For those whose minds are attached to the
>|unmanifested, impersonal feature of the Supreme,
>|advancement is very troublesome. To make progress in that
>|discipline is always difficult for those who are embodied."
>|Not knowing how to meditate, foolish people simply suffer,
>|and there is no benefit derived from their spiritual
>|activities.
4288|The same idea expressed in this verse from
>|Srimad-Bhagavatam can be found in the following verse from
>|the Visnu Purana (6.2.17), Padma Purana (Uttara-khanda 72.
>|25) and Brhan-naradiya Purana (38.97).
4289|Madhya 20.346
4290|TEXT 346
4291|TEXT
4292|sI±lþdA LÔÁNî læÃdA lÍ:N¦aî±lþ±S Z±óNõþ•ÃaSÂlþdA h
4293|lðñN›Ÿ±¿î îÂðñN›Ÿ±¿î LÁNhN u‚NîSÂI ÎLÁúõ÷A N 346 N
4294|dhyayan krte yajan yajnais
4295| tretayam dvapare 'rcayan
4296|yad apnoti tad apnoti
4297| kalau sankirtya kesavam
4298|SYNONYMS
4299|dhyayan-meditating; krte-in Satya-yuga; yajan-
>|worshiping; yajnaih-by the performance of great sacrifices;
>|tretayam-in Treta-yuga; dvapare-in Dvapara-yuga;
>|arcayan-worshiping the lotus feet; yat-whatever; apnoti-is
>|achieved; tat-that; apnoti-is obtained; kalau-in the Age of
>|Kali; sankirtya-simply by chanting; kesavam-the pastimes
>|and qualities of Lord Kesava.
4300|TRANSLATION
4301|"'Whatever is achieved by meditation in Satya-yuga, by the
>|performance of yajna in Treta-yuga or by the worship of
>|Krsna's lotus feet in Dvapara-yuga is also obtained in the
>|Age of Kali simply by chanting the glories of Lord
>|Kesava.'
4302|Madhya 20.347
4303|TEXT 347
4304|TEXT
4305|LÁ¿hS ut±æÃlþ(tm)LI±lS± &í:±Ð u±õþt±¿ádÐ h
4306|lS u‚NîSÂNdÍdõ uõS¦¤±NnS±•Ã¿tÂhtÂINî N 347 N
4307|kalim sabhajayanty arya
4308| guna-jnah sara-bhaginah
4309|yatra sankirtanenaiva
4310| sarva-svartho 'bhilabhyate
4311|SYNONYMS
4312|kalim-Kali-yuga; sabhajayanti-worship; aryah-advanced
>|people; guna-jnah-appreciating this good quality of Kali-
>|yuga; sara-bhaginah-persons who accept the essence of life;
>|yatra-in which age; sankirtanena-simply by performing the
>|sankirtana-yajna, the chanting of the Hare Krsna mantra;
>|eva-certainly; sarva-sva-arthah-all interests of life;
>|abhilabhyate-are achieved.
4313|TRANSLATION
4314|"'Those who are advanced and highly qualified and are
>|interested in the essence of life know the good qualities
>|of Kali-yuga. Such people worship the Age of Kali because
>|in this age
>|one can advance in spiritual knowledge and attain life's
>|goal simply by chanting the Hare Krsna maha-mantra.'
4315|PURPORT
4316|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (11.5.36) spoken
>|by the great sage Karabhajana Rsi, one of the nine
>|Yogendras. The sage was informing Maharaja Nimi about the
>|people's duty to worship the Supreme Personality of Godhead
>|according to different processes in different yugas.
4317|Madhya 20.348
4318|TEXT 348
4319|TEXT
4320|óÓõSõR ¿h¿m lNõ &í±õî±õþáí h
4321|ÕuSmI uSmI± îD±õþ, d± ýÃlþ áíd N 348 N
4322|purvavat likhi yabe gunavatara-gana
4323|asankhya sankhya tanra, na haya ganana
4324|SYNONYMS
4325|purva-vat-as previously; likhi-I write; yabe-when; guna-
>|avatara-gana-incarnations of the material modes of nature;
>|asankhya-innumerable; sankhya-counting; tanra-of them; na
>|haya ganana-not actually countable.
4326|TRANSLATION
4327|"As stated before when I described the incarnations of the
>|material modes [guna-avataras], one should consider that
>|these incarnations also are unlimited and that no one can
>|count them.
4328|Madhya 20.349
4329|TEXT 349
4330|TEXT
4331|a±¿õþlRá±õî±Nõþ Ûý×Ãà îÂ' áíd h
4332|q¿d' t¿/ LÁ¿õþ' îD±Nõþ óRNrà ud±îd N 349 N
4333|cari-yugavatare ei ta' ganana
4334|suni' bhangi kari' tanre puche sanatana
4335|SYNONYMS
4336|cari-yuga-avatare-of the incarnations in the four different
>|yugas; ei ta' ganana-such enumeration; suni'-hearing;
>|bhangi kari'-giving a hint; tanre-unto Lord Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu; puche-inquired; sanatana-Sanatana Gosvami.
4337|TRANSLATION
4338|"Thus I have given a description of the incarnations of the
>|four different yugas." After hearing all this, Sanatana
>|Gosvami gave an indirect hint to the Lord.
4339|Madhya 20.350
4340|TEXT 350
4341|TEXT
4342|õþ±æÃ÷LaN ud±îd–õRNXI õÔýÃæó¿î h
4343|›¶tRÂõþ LÔÁó±Nî óRNrà ÕuN‚±aÂ-÷¿î N 350 N
4344|raja-mantri sanatana-buddhye brhaspati
4345|prabhura krpate puche asankoca-mati
4346|SYNONYMS
4347|raja-mantri sanatana-Sanatana Gosvami was formerly an
>|intelligent minister for Nawab Hussain Shah; buddhye-in
>|intelligence; brhaspati-exactly like Brhaspati, the priest
>|in the heavenly kingdom; prabhura krpate-because of the
>|unlimited mercy of the Lord; puche-inquires; asankoca-mati-
>|without hesitation.
4348|TRANSLATION
4349|Sanatana Gosvami had been a minister under Nawab Hussain
>|Shah, and he was undoubtedly as intelligent as Brhaspati,
>|the chief priest of the heavenly kingdom. Due to the Lord's
>|unlimited mercy, Sanatana Gosvami questioned Him without
>|hesitation.
4350|Madhya 20.351
4351|TEXT 351
4352|TEXT
4353|'Õ¿î ŽRÂ^ æÃNõ ÷R¿Ûž dNaÂ, dNa±a±õþ h
4354|ÎLÁ÷Nd æñ¿dõ LÁ¿hNî ÎLÁ±dA Õõî±õþ·' 351 N
4355|'ati ksudra jiva muni nica, nicacara
4356|kemane janiba kalite kon avatara?'
4357|SYNONYMS
4358|ati-very; ksudra-unimportant, insignificant; jiva-living
>|entity; muni-I; nica-low; nica-acara-having very abominable
>|behavior; kemane-how; janiba-shall I know; kalite-in this
>|age; kon avatara-who is the incarnation.
4359|TRANSLATION
4360|Sanatana Gosvami said, "I am a very insignificant living
>|entity. I am low and poorly behaved. How can I understand
>|who is the incarnation for this Age of Kali?"
4361|PURPORT
4362|This verse is very important in reference to the
>|incarnations of God. At present there are especially many
>|rascals prevalent in India who proclaim themselves
>|incarnations of God or goddesses. Thus they are fooling and
>|bluffing foolish people. On behalf of the general populace,
>|Sanatana Gosvami presented himself as a foolish, lowborn,
>|poorly behaved person, although he was a most exalted
>|personality. Inferior people cannot accept the real God,
>|yet they are very eager to accept an imitation God who can
>|simply bluff foolish people. All this is going on in this
>|Age of Kali. To guide these foolish people, Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu answers the question as follows.
4363|Madhya 20.352
4364|TEXT 352
4365|TEXT
4366|›¶tR LÁNýÃÃ,–"ÕdI±õî±õþ ú±¦a-Z±Nõþ æñ¿d h
4367|LÁ¿hNî Õõî±õþ ÆîÂNrà ú±¦aõ±NLÁI ÷±¿d N 352 N
4368|prabhu kahe,-"anyavatara sastra-dvare jani
4369|kalite avatara taiche sastra-vakye mani
4370|SYNONYMS
4371|prabhu kahe-Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu said; anya-avatara-
>|the incarnations in other yugas; sastra-dvare jani-one has
>|to accept by reference to the sastras; kalite-in this Age
>|of Kali; avatara-incarnation; taiche-similarly; sastra-
>|vakye mani-one has to accept according to the description
>|of revealed scriptures.
4372|TRANSLATION
4373|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu replied, "As in other ages an
>|incarnation is accepted according to the directions of the
>|sastras, in this Age of Kali an incarnation of God should
>|be accepted in that way.
4374|PURPORT
4375|According to Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, this is the way an
>|incarnation should be accepted. Srila Narottama dasa
>|Thakura says, sadhu-sastra-guru-vakya, cittete kariya aikya.
>| One should accept a thing as genuine by studying the words
>|of saintly people, the spiritual master and the sastra. The
>|actual center is the sastra, the revealed scripture. If a
>|spiritual master does not speak according to the revealed
>|scripture, he is not to be accepted. Similarly, if a
>|saintly person does not speak according to the sastra, he
>|is not a saintly person. The sastra is the center for all.
>|Unfortunately, at the present moment, people do not refer
>|to the sastras; therefore they accept rascals as
>|incarnations, and consequently they have made incarnations
>|into a very cheap thing. Intelligent people who follow Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu's instructions and the instructions of
>|the acarya, the bona fide spiritual master, will not accept
>|a pretender as an incarnation of God. In Kali-yuga, the
>|only incarnation is Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu. Imitation
>|incarnations take advantage of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu. The
>|Lord appeared within the past five hundred years, played as
>|the son of a brahmana from Nadia and introduced the
>|sankirtana movement. Imitating Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu and
>|ignoring the sastra, rascals present themselves as
>|incarnations and introduce their rascaldom as a religious
>|process. As we have repeatedly said, religion can be given
>|only by the Supreme Personality of Godhead. From the
>|discussions in the Caitanya-caritamrta, we can understand
>|that in different ages the Supreme Lord introduces
>|different systems and different religious duties. In this
>|Age of Kali, the only incarnation of Krsna is Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu, and He introduced the religious duty of Kali-
>|yuga, the chanting of the Hare Krsna maha-mantra: Hare
>|Krsna, Hare Krsna, Krsna Krsna, Hare Hare/ Hare Rama,
>|Hare Rama, Rama Rama, Hare Hare.
4376|Madhya 20.353
4377|TEXT 353
4378|TEXT
4379|uõS: ÷R¿dõþ õ±LÁI–ú±¦a-'óõþ÷±í' h
4380|Õ±÷±-uõ± æÃNNõõþ ýÃÃlþ ú±¦aZ±õþ± ':±d' N 353 N
4381|sarvajna munira vakya-sastra-'paramana'
4382|ama-saba jivera haya sastra-dvara 'jnana'
4383|SYNONYMS
4384|sarva-jna munira vakya-the words of the omniscient muni (
>|Vyasadeva); sastra-paramana-evidence of revealed scriptures;
>| ama-saba-all of us; jivera-of the conditioned souls; haya-
>|there is; sastra-dvara-through the medium of revealed
>|scriptures; jnana-knowledge.
4385|TRANSLATION
4386|"The Vedic literatures composed by the omniscient Mahamuni
>|Vyasadeva are evidence of all spiritual existence. Only
>|through these revealed scriptures can all conditioned souls
>|attain knowledge.
4387|PURPORT
4388|Foolish people try to concoct knowledge by manufacturing
>|something in their brains. That is not the real way of
>|knowledge. Knowledge is sabda-pramana, evidence from the
>|Vedic literature. Srila Vyasadeva is called Mahamuni. He is
>|also known as Vedavyasa because he has compiled so many
>|sastras. He has divided the Vedas into four divisions-Sama,
>|Rg, Yajur and Atharva. He has expanded the Vedas into
>|eighteen Puranas and has summarized Vedic knowledge in the
>|Vedanta-sutra. He also compiled the Mahabharata, which is
>|accepted as the fifth Veda. The Bhagavad-gita is contained
>|within the Mahabharata. Therefore the Bhagavad-gita is
>|also Vedic literature (smrti). Some of the Vedic
>|literatures are called srutis, and some are called smrtis.
>|Srila Rupa Gosvami recommends in the Bhakti-rasamrta-sindhu
>|(1.2.101):
4389|sruti-smrti-puranadi-pancaratra-vidhim vina
4390|aikantiki harer bhaktir utpatayaiva kalpate
4391| [Brs. 1.2.101]
4392|Unless one refers to sastra (sruti, smrti and
>|puranadi), one's spiritual activity simply disturbs society.
>| There is no king or government to check people, and
>|therefore society has fallen into a chaotic condition as
>|far as spiritual understanding is concerned. Taking
>|advantage of this chaotic condition, many rascals have
>|appeared and proclaimed themselves incarnations of God. As
>|a result, the entire population is indulging in sinful
>|activities such as illicit sex, intoxication, gambling and
>|meat-eating. Out of many sinful people, many so-called
>|incarnations of God are emerging. This is a very
>|regrettable situation, especially in India.
4393|Madhya 20.354
4394|TEXT 354
4395|TEXT
4396|Õõî±õþ d±¿ýÃà LÁNýÃÖ'Õ±¿÷ Õõî±õþ' h
4397|÷R¿d uõ æñ¿d' LÁNõþ hŽÂí-¿õa±õþ N 354 N
4398|avatara nahi kahe-'ami avatara'
4399|muni saba lani' kare laksana-vicara
4400|SYNONYMS
4401|avatara-the actual incarnation of Godhead; nahi-never; kahe-
>|says; ami avatara-I am an incarnation; muni-the great sage
>|Mahamuni Vyasadeva; saba jani'-knowing all (past, present
>|and future); kare laksana-vicara-describes the symptoms of
>|the avataras.
4402|TRANSLATION
4403|"An actual incarnation of God never says 'I am God ' or '
>|I am an incarnation of God.' The great sage Vyasadeva,
>|knowing all, has already recorded the characteristics of
>|the avataras in the sastras.
4404|PURPORT
4405|In this verse it is clearly stated that a real incarnation
>|of God never claims to be a real incarnation. According to
>|the symptoms described in the sastra, one can understand
>|who is an avatara and who is not.
4406|Madhya 20.355
4407|TEXT 355
4408|TEXT
4409|luI±õî±õþ± :±lþN(tm)L úõþN¿õþø3¸úõþN¿õþíÐ h
4410|ÆîÂÍ(tm)¦õþîRÂhI±¿îÂúÍlþõ¹ÍlSNðSÿýÃÃø¸3u/ÍîÂÐ N 355 N
4411|yasyavatara jnayante
4412| sariresv asaririnah
4413|tais tair atulyatisayair
4414| viryair dehisv asangataih
4415|SYNONYMS
4416|yasya-whose; avatarah-incarnations; jnayante-can be known;
>|saririsu-among the living entities; asaririnah-of the Lord,
>|who has no material body; taih taih-all those; atulya-
>|incomparable; atisayaih-extraordinary; viryaih-by prowess;
>|dehisu-among the living entities; asangataih-impossible.
4417|TRANSLATION
4418|"'The Lord does not have a material body, yet He descends
>|among human beings in His transcendental body as an
>|incarnation. Therefore it is very difficult for us to
>|understand who is an incarnation. Only by His extraordinary
>|prowess and uncommon activities, which are impossible for
>|embodied living entities, can one partially understand the
>|incarnation of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.'
4419|PURPORT
4420|This is a quotation from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.10.34).
4421|Madhya 20.356
4422|TEXT 356
4423|TEXT
4424|'¦¤õþ+ó'-hŽÂí, Õ±õþ 'îÂi¦š-hŽÂí' h
4425|Ûý×Ãà ðRÃý×Ãà hŽÂNí 'õd' æñNd ÷R¿dáí N 356 N
4426|'svarupa'-laksana, ara 'tatastha-laksana'
4427|ei dui laksane 'vastu' jane muni-gana
4428|SYNONYMS
4429|svarupa-laksana-the personal characteristics; ara-and;
>|tatastha-laksana-the marginal characteristics; ei dui
>|laksane-by these two symptoms; vastu-an object; jane-know;
>|muni-gana-the great sages.
4430|TRANSLATION
4431|"By two symptoms-personal characteristics and marginal
>|characteristics-the great sages can understand an object.
4432|Madhya 20.357
4433|TEXT 357
4434|TEXT
4435|Õ±LÔÁ¿îÂ, ›¶LÔÁ¿îÂ, ¦¤õþ+ó,–¦¤õþ+ó-hŽÂí h
4436|LÁ±lSZ±õþ± :±d,–Ûý×Ãà îÂi¦š-hŽÂí N 357 N
4437|akrti, prakrti, svarupa,-svarupa-laksana
4438|karya-dvara jnana,-ei tatastha-laksana
4439|SYNONYMS
4440|akrti-bodily features; prakrti-nature; svarupa-form;
>|svarupa-laksana-personal symptoms; karya-dvara-by
>|activities; jnana-knowledge; ei-this; tatastha-laksana-the
>|marginal symptoms.
4441|TRANSLATION
4442|"Bodily features, nature and form are the personal
>|characteristics. Knowledge of His activities provides the
>|marginal characteristics.
4443|Madhya 20.358
4444|TEXT 358
4445|TEXT
4446|t±áõî±õþNy õI±u ÷/h±aõþNí h
4447|'óõþN÷«õþ' ¿dõþ+¿óh Ûý×Ãà ðRý×Ãà hŽÂNí N 358 N
4448|bhagavatarambhe vyasa mangalacarane
4449|'paramesvara' nirupila ei dui laksane
4450|SYNONYMS
4451|bhagavata-arambhe-in the beginning of Srimad-Bhagavatam;
>|vyasa-the great author Vyasadeva; mangala-acarane-in the
>|auspicious invocation; parama-isvara-the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead; nirupila-has described; ei dui
>|laksane-by these two characteristics, namely svarupa (
>|personal) and tatastha (marginal) symptoms.
4452|TRANSLATION
4453|"In the auspicious invocation at the beginning of Srimad-
>|Bhagavatam, Srila Vyasadeva has described the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead by these symptoms.
4454|Madhya 20.359
4455|TEXT 359
4456|TEXT
4457|ÂæÃij±ðÃIuI lNÃi¤lþ±¿ðÃîõþîÂ(±NnSø3¸¿tÂ:Ð ¦¤õþ±iAÂ
4458|ÎîÂNd õrpÁ ý+ðñ l Õ±¿ðÃLÁõNlþ ÷RýÃÃI¿(tm)L lR uÓõþlþÐ h
4459|ÎîÂNæñõ±¿õþ÷ÔðñS ln± ¿õ¿d÷Nlþ± lS ¿SuNáS±•Ã÷Ôø¸±
4460|s±¥§± Φ¤d uðñ ¿dõþ(tm)¦LRÁýÃÃLÁS uîÂIS óõþS sN÷¿ýÃà N 359
>|N
4461|janmady asya yato 'nvayad itaratas carthesv abhijnah svarat
4462| tene brahma hrda ya adi-kavaye muhyanti yat surayah
4463|tejo-vari-mrdam yatha vinimayo yatra tri-sargo 'mrsa
4464| dhamna svena sada nirasta-kuhakam satyam param dhimahi
4465|SYNONYMS
4466|janma-adi-creation, maintenance and dissolution; asya-of
>|this (the universe); yatah-from whom; anvayat-directly from
>|the spiritual connection; itaratah-indirectly from the lack
>|of material contact; ca-also; arthesu-in all affairs;
>|abhijnah-perfectly cognizant; sva-rat-independent; tene-
>|imparted; brahma-the Absolute Truth; hrda-through the heart;
>| yah-who; adi-kavaye-unto Lord Brahma; muhyanti-are
>|bewildered; yat-in whom; surayah-great personalities like
>|Lord Brahma and other demigods or great brahmanas; tejah-
>|vari-mrdam-of fire, water and earth; yatha-as; vinimayah-
>|the exchange; yatra-in whom; tri-sargah-the material
>|creation of three modes; amrsa-factual; dhamna-with the
>|abode; svena-His own personal; sada-always; nirasta-kuhakam-
>|devoid of all illusion; satyam-the truth; param-absolute;
>|dhimahi-let us meditate upon.
4467|TRANSLATION
4468|"' O my Lord , Sri Krsna, son of
>|Vasudeva, O all-pervading Personality of
>|Godhead , I offer my respectful obeisances unto You. I
>|meditate upon Lord Sri Krsna because He is the
>|Absolute Truth and the primeval cause of all causes
>|of the creation, sustenance
>| and destruction of the manifested universes.
>|He is
>|directly and indirectly conscious of all manifestations ,
>|and He is independent because there is no other cause
>|beyond Him. It is He only who first imparted the Vedic
>|knowledge unto the heart of Brahmaji, the original living
>|being. By Him even the great sages and demigods
>|are placed into illusion, as one is bewildered
>|by the illusory representations of water seen in fire,
>| or land seen on water. Only because of Him do the
>|material universes, temporarily manifested by the
>|reactions of the three modes of nature, appear factual,
>|although they are unreal. I therefore meditate
>|upon Him, Lord Sri Krsna, who is eternally existent in
>|the transcendental abode , which is forever free from
>|the illusory representations of the material world. I
>|meditate upon Him, for He is the Absolute Truth.'
4469|PURPORT
4470|This verse, quoted from Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.1.1), links
>|the Srimad-Bhagavatam with the Vedanta-sutra with the words
>|janmady asya yatah. It is stated that the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead, Vasudeva, is the Absolute Truth
>|beyond the material creation. This has been accepted by all
>|acaryas. Even Sankaracarya, the most elevated impersonalist,
>| says in the beginning of his commentary on the Bhagavad-
>|gita: narayanah paro 'vyaktat. When this material creation
>|is not yet manifested from the mahat-tattva, it is called
>|avyakta, and when it is demonstrated from that total energy,
>| it is called vyakta. Narayana, the Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead, is beyond this vyakta-avyakta, manifested and
>|unmanifested material nature. This is the chief
>|qualification of the Supreme Personality of Godhead when He
>|assumes a particular incarnation. Krsna tells Arjuna that
>|although they both took birth many, many times before ,
>|Krsna remembers everything about His previous appearances
>|but Arjuna does not remember. Since Krsna is beyond the
>|cosmic creation, He is in the exalted position of being
>|able to remember everything in the past. Everything within
>|the cosmic creation has a material body, but Krsna, being
>|beyond the material cosmic creation, always has a spiritual
>|body. He imparted Vedic knowledge into the heart of Brahma.
>|Although Brahma is the most important and exalted
>|personality within this universe, he could not remember
>|what he did in his past life. Krsna had to remind him
>|through the heart. When Lord Brahma was thus inspired, he
>|was able to create the entire universe. Remembering
>|everything about the past and inspiring Lord Brahma to
>|create are vivid examples of the characteristics called
>|svarupa-laksana and tatastha-laksana.
4471|Madhya 20.360
4472|TEXT 360
4473|TEXT
4474|Ûý×Ãà αNLÁ'óõþS'-úNs 'LÔÁøž'-¿dõþ+óí h
4475|'uîÂIS' úNs LÁNýÃà îD±õþ ¦¤õþ+ó-hŽÂí N 360 N
4476|ei sloke 'param'-sabde 'krsna'-nirupana
4477|'satyam' sabde kahe tanra svarupa-laksana
4478|SYNONYMS
4479|ei sloke-in this verse; param-sabde-by the word param, or
>|supreme; krsna-of Lord Krsna; nirupana-there is an
>|indication; satyam sabde-by the word satyam, or Absolute
>|Truth; kahe-indicates; tanra-His; svarupa-laksana-personal
>|characteristics.
4480|TRANSLATION
4481|"In this invocation from Srimad-Bhagavatam, the word 'param
>|' indicates Lord Krsna, the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
>|and the word 'satyam ' indicates His personal
>|characteristics.
4482|Madhya 20.361
4483|TEXT 361
4484|TEXT
4485|¿õ«uÔ(c)†I±¿ðà ÆLÁh, Îõðà õrpÁ±NLÁ ónÂl±ý×ÃÃh h
4486|ÕnS±¿tÂ:î±, ¦¤õþ+óúNMÃI ÷±lþ± ðÓõþ ÆLÁh N 361 N
4487|visva-srsty-adi kaila, veda brahmake padaila
4488|arthabhijnata, svarupa-saktye maya dura kaila
4489|SYNONYMS
4490|visva-srsti-adi-creation, maintenance and dissolution of
>|the cosmic manifestation; kaila-performed; veda-the Vedic
>|knowledge; brahmake-unto Lord Brahma; padaila-instructed;
>|artha-abhijnata-having full knowledge of past, present and
>|future; svarupa-saktye-by His personal energy; maya-the
>|illusory energy; dura kaila-separated.
4491|TRANSLATION
4492|"In that same verse it is stated that the Lord is the
>|creator, maintainer and annihilator of the cosmic
>|manifestation and that He enabled Lord Brahma to create
>|the universe by infusing him with the knowledge of the
>|Vedas. It is also stated that the Lord has full knowledge ,
>|directly and indirectly, that He knows past, present and
>|future , and that His personal energy is separate from maya,
>| the illusory energy.
4493|Madhya 20.362
4494|TEXT 362
4495|TEXT
4496|Ûý×Ãà uõ LÁ±lS–îD±õþ îÂi¦š-hŽÂí h
4497|ÕdI Õõî±õþ UNrà æñNd ÷R¿dáí N 362 N
4498|ei saba karya-tanra tatastha-laksana
4499|anya avatara aiche jane muni-gana
4500|SYNONYMS
4501|ei saba karya-all these activities; tanra-His; tatastha-
>|laksana-marginal characteristics; anya avatara-another
>|incarnation; aiche-in that same way; jane-know; muni-gana-
>|the great saintly persons like Vyasadeva.
4502|TRANSLATION
4503|"All these activities are His marginal characteristics.
>|Great saintly persons understand the incarnations of the
>|Supreme Personality of Godhead by the indications of the
>|two characteristics known as svarupa and tatastha. All the
>|incarnations of Krsna should be understood in this way.
4504|Madhya 20.363
4505|TEXT 363
4506|TEXT
4507|Õõî±õþ-LÁ±Nh ýÃÃlþ æÃáNî Îá±aõþ h
4508|Ûý×Ãà ðRÃý×Ãà hŽÂNí ÎLÁýÃà æñdNlþ T«õþ N" 363 N
4509|avatara-kale haya jagate gocara
4510|ei dui laksane keha janaye isvara"
4511|SYNONYMS
4512|avatara-kale-at the time of incarnation; haya-there is;
>|jagate-in the world; gocara-information; ei dui laksane-by
>|these two characteristics, namely svarupa and tatastha;
>|keha-some persons; janaye-know; isvara-the incarnation of
>|the Supreme Lord.
4513|TRANSLATION
4514|"At the time of Their appearance, the incarnations of the
>|Lord are known in the world because people can consult the
>|sastras to understand an incarnation's chief
>|characteristics, known as svarupa and tatastha. In this way
>|the incarnations become known to great saintly persons."
4515|Madhya 20.364
4516|TEXT 364
4517|TEXT
4518|ud±îd LÁNýÃÃ,–"l±Nî T«õþ-hŽÂí h
4519|óNîõíS, LÁ±lS–Λ¶÷ðñd-u‚NîSÂd N 364 N
4520|sanatana kahe,-"yate isvara-laksana
4521|pita-varna, karya-prema-dana-sankirtana
4522|SYNONYMS
4523|sanatana kahe-Sanatana said; yate-in whom; isvara-laksana-
>|the characteristics of the Lord are found; pita-varna-
>|yellowish color; karya-activities; prema-dana-distributing
>|love of Godhead; sankirtana-and chanting
>|the holy name of the Lord congregationally.
4524|TRANSLATION
4525|Sanatana Gosvami said, "The color of the personality in
>|whom the characteristics of the Lord are found is yellowish.
>| His activities include the distribution of love of Godhead
>|and the chanting of the holy names of the Lord.
4526|Madhya 20.365
4527|TEXT 365
4528|TEXT
4529|LÁ¿hLÁ±Nh Îuý×Ãà 'LÔÁøž±õî±õþ' ¿d(lþ h
4530|uRðÔÃnÂl LÁ¿õþlþ± LÁýÃÃ, l±nÂ×LÁ uSúlþ N" 365 N
4531|kali-kale sei 'krsnavatara' niscaya
4532|sudrdha kariya kaha, yauka samsaya"
4533|SYNONYMS
4534|kali-kale-in the Age of Kali; sei-that personality; krsna-
>|avatara-the incarnation of Krsna; niscaya-certainly; su-
>|drdha kariya-firmly; kaha-kindly inform me; yauka samsaya-
>|so that all doubts may go away.
4535|TRANSLATION
4536|"The incarnation of Krsna for this age is indicated by
>|these symptoms. Please confirm this definitely so that all
>|my doubts will go away."
4537|PURPORT
4538|Sanatana Gosvami wanted to confirm the fact that Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu is the incarnation of Krsna for this
>|age. According to the sastra, in Kali-yuga the Lord would
>|assume a golden or yellow color and would distribute love
>|of Krsna and the sankirtana movement. In accordance with
>|the sastra and saintly persons, these characteristics were
>|vividly displayed by Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, and it was
>|therefore clear that Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu was an
>|incarnation of Krsna. He was confirmed by the sastras, and
>|His characteristics were accepted by saintly people. Since
>|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu could not escape Sanatana Gosvami's
>|argument, He remained silent on this point and thereby
>|indirectly accepted Sanatana's statement. By this we can
>|clearly understand that Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu was the
>|direct incarnation of Lord Krsna.
4539|Madhya 20.366
4540|TEXT 366
4541|TEXT
4542|›¶tR LÁNýÃÃ,–aÂîRÂõþ±¿h rñnÂl, ud±îd h
4543|úMÃI±Nõú±õî±Nõþõþ qd ¿õõõþí N 366 N
4544|prabhu kahe,-caturali chada, sanatana
4545|saktyavesavatarera suna vivarana
4546|SYNONYMS
4547|prabhu kahe-Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu replied; caturali-very
>|intelligent argument; chada-give up; sanatana-O Sanatana;
>|sakti-avesa-avatarera-of the especially empowered
>|incarnations; suna-hear; vivarana-the description.
4548|TRANSLATION
4549|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu replied, "O Sanatana, you must give
>|up your intelligent tricks. Now just try to understand the
>|description of the saktyavesa- avataras.
4550|Madhya 20.367
4551|TEXT 367
4552|TEXT
4553|úMÃI±Nõú±õî±õþ LÔÁNøžõþ ÕuSmI áíd h
4554|¿ðÃáAðõþúd LÁ¿õþ ÷RmI ÷RmI æÃd N 367 N
4555|saktyavesavatara krsnera asankhya ganana
4556|dig-darasana kari mukhya mukhya jana
4557|SYNONYMS
4558|sakti-avesa-avatara-incarnations especially empowered by
>|the Lord; krsnera-of Lord Krsna; asankhya ganana-unlimited
>|and innumerable; dik-darasana kari-let Me describe some of
>|them; mukhya mukhya jana-who are counted as the chief.
4559|TRANSLATION
4560|"There are unlimited saktyavesa-avataras of Lord Krsna. Let
>|Me describe the chief among them.
4561|Madhya 20.368
4562|TEXT 368
4563|TEXT
4564|úMÃI±Nõú ðRÃý×Ãõþ+ó–'÷RmI', 'ÎáNí' Îðÿm h
4565|u±ŽÂ±RúNMÃI 'Õõî±õþ', Õ±t±Nu '¿õtÓ¿îÂ' ¿h¿m N 368 N
4566|saktyavesa dui-rupa-'mukhya', 'gauna' dekhi
4567|saksat-saktye 'avatara', abhase 'vibhuti' likhi
4568|SYNONYMS
4569|sakti-avesa-empowered incarnations; dui-rupa-two categories;
>| mukhya-primary; gauna-secondary; dekhi-I see; saksat-
>|saktye-when there is direct power; avatara-they are called
>|incarnations; abhase-when there is indication; vibhuti
>|likhi-they are called vibhuti, or possessing special favor.
4570|TRANSLATION
4571|"Empowered incarnations are of two types-primary and
>|secondary. The primary ones are directly empowered by the
>|Supreme Personality of Godhead and are called incarnations
>|. The secondary ones are indirectly empowered by
>|the Supreme Personality of Godhead and are called vibhuti.
4572|Madhya 20.369
4573|TEXT 369
4574|TEXT
4575|'udLÁ±¿ðÃ', 'd±õþðÃ', 'óÔnR', 'óõþqõþ±÷' h
4576|æÃNõõþ+ó 'õrpÁ±õþ' Õ±Nõú±õî±õþ-d±÷ N 369 N
4577|'sanakadi', 'narada', 'prthu' 'parasurama'
4578|jiva-rupa 'brahmara' avesavatara-nama
4579|SYNONYMS
4580|sanaka-adi-the four Kumaras; narada-Narada; prthu-Maharaja
>|Prthu; parasurama-Parasurama; jiva-rupa-as the living
>|entity; brahmara-of Lord Brahma; avesa-avatara-nama-all of
>|them are called empowered incarnations.
4581|TRANSLATION
4582|"Some saktyavesa-avataras are the four Kumaras, Narada,
>|Maharaja Prthu and Parasurama. When a living being is
>|empowered to act as Lord Brahma, he is also considered a
>|saktyavesa-avatara.
4583|Madhya 20.370
4584|TEXT 370
4585|TEXT
4586|ÆõLRÁNF 'Îúø¸'–sõþ± sõþNlþ 'Õd(tm)L' h
4587|Ûý×Ãà ÷RmI±Nõú±õî±õþ-¿õ(tm)¦±Nõþ d±¿ýÃà Õ(tm)L N 370 N
4588|vaikunthe 'sesa'-dhara dharaye 'ananta'
4589|ei mukhyavesavatara-vistare nahi anta
4590|SYNONYMS
4591|vaikunthe-in the spiritual world; sesa-Lord Sesa; dhara
>|dharaye-carries innumerable planets; ananta-Ananta; ei-
>|these; mukhya-avesa-avatara-primary directly empowered
>|incarnations; vistare-in expanding them; nahi-there is not;
>|anta-limit.
4592|TRANSLATION
4593|"Lord Sesa in the spiritual world of Vaikuntha and, in the
>|material world, Lord Ananta, who carries innumerable
>|planets on His hoods, are two primary empowered
>|incarnations. There is no need to count the others, for
>|they are unlimited.
4594|Madhya 20.371
4595|TEXT 371
4596|TEXT
4597|udLÁ±NðÃI ':±d'-ú¿MÃ, d±õþNðà ú¿Mà 't¿MÃ' h
4598|õrpÁ±lþ 'uÔ¿(c)†'-ú¿MÃ, ÕdN(tm)L 'tÓÂ-s±õþí'-ú¿Mà N 371 N
4599|sanakadye 'jnana'-sakti, narade sakti 'bhakti'
4600|brahmaya 'srsti'-sakti, anante 'bhu-dharana'-sakti
4601|SYNONYMS
4602|sanaka-adye-in the four Kumaras; jnana-sakti-the power of
>|knowledge; narade-in Narada Muni; sakti-the power; bhakti-
>|of devotional service; brahmaya-in Lord Brahma; srsti-sakti-
>|the power of creation; anante-in Lord Ananta; bhu-dharana-
>|sakti-the power to carry the planets.
4603|TRANSLATION
4604|"The power of knowledge was invested in the four Kumaras,
>|and the power of devotional service was invested in Narada.
>|The power of creation was invested in Lord Brahma, and the
>|power to carry innumerable planets was invested in Lord
>|Ananta.
4605|Madhya 20.372
4606|TEXT 372
4607|TEXT
4608|ÎúNø¸ '¦¤-Îuõd'-ú¿MÃ, óÔnRNî 'ó±hd' h
4609|óõþqõþ±N÷ 'ðRÃ(c)†d±úLÁ-õNlSu=±õþí' N 372 N
4610|sese 'sva-sevana'-sakti, prthute 'palana'
4611|parasurame 'dusta-nasaka-virya-sancarana'
4612|SYNONYMS
4613|sese-in Lord Sesa; sva-sevana sakti-the power to serve the
>|Lord personally; prthute-in King Prthu; palana-the power to
>|rule; parasurame-in Parasurama; dusta-nasaka-virya-the
>|extraordinary power to kill rogues and miscreants;
>|sancarana-empowering.
4614|TRANSLATION
4615|"The Supreme Personality of Godhead invested the power of
>|personal service in Lord Sesa, and He invested the power to
>|rule the earth in King Prthu. Lord Parasurama received the
>|power to kill rogues and miscreants.
4616|PURPORT
4617|Krsna says in the Bhagavad-gita ( 4.8) , paritranaya
>|sadhunam vinasaya ca duskrtam. Sometimes the Lord invests
>|His power to rule in a king like Prthu and enables such a
>|king to kill rogues and miscreants. He also invests His
>|power in incarnations like Parasurama.
4618|Madhya 20.373
4619|TEXT 373
4620|TEXT
4621|:±dúMÃI±¿ðÃLÁhlþ± lS±¿õN(c)†± æÃd±ðSÃdÐ h
4622|î ձNõú± ¿dáðÃIN(tm)L æÃNõ± Ûõ ÷ýÃÃMÃÃ÷±Ð N 373 N
4623|jnana-sakty-adi-kalaya
4624| yatravisto janardanah
4625|ta avesa nigadyante
4626| jiva eva mahattamah
4627|SYNONYMS
4628|jnana-sakti-adi-kalaya-by portions of the potencies of
>|knowledge, devotional service, creation, personal service,
>|ruling over the material world, carrying the different
>|planets, and killing the rogues and miscreants; yatra-
>|wherever; avistah-is entered; janardanah-the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead, Visnu; te-they; avesah-empowered;
>|nigadyante-are called; jivah-living entities; eva-although;
>|mahat-tamah-most exalted devotees.
4629|TRANSLATION
4630|"'Whenever the Lord is present in someone by portions of
>|His various potencies, the living entity representing the
>|Lord is called a saktyavesa-avatara-that is, an
>|incarnation invested with special power.'
4631|PURPORT
4632|This verse is found in the Laghu-bhagavatamrta (1.18).
4633|Madhya 20.374
4634|TEXT 374
4635|TEXT
4636|'¿õtÓ¿îÂ' LÁ¿ýÃÃNlþ ÆlNrà áNî±-ÛLÁ±ðÃNú h
4637|æÃáR õI±¿óh LÔÁøžúMÃI±t±u±NõNú N 374 N
4638|'vibhuti' kahiye yaiche gita-ekadase
4639|jagat vyapila krsna-sakty-abhasavese
4640|SYNONYMS
4641|vibhuti-specific power; kahiye-we say; yaiche-just like;
>|gita-of the Bhagavad-gita; ekadase-in the Eleventh Chapter;
>|jagat-throughout the whole universe; vyapila-He expanded;
>|krsna-sakti-abhasa-avese-by the reflection of His power.
4642|TRANSLATION
4643|"As explained in the Eleventh Chapter of the Bhagavad-gita,
>|Krsna has spread Himself all over the universe in many
>|personalities through specific powers, known as vibhuti.
4644|PURPORT
4645|The expansion of specific maya powers is explained in
>|Srimad-Bhagavatam (2.7.39).
4646|Madhya 20.375
4647|TEXT 375
4648|TEXT
4649|lðAÃlðAÿõtÓ¿îÂ÷R uNS M÷ðÓÿæSÃîÂN÷õ õ± h
4650|îÂMÃÃNðõ±õá26à QS ÷÷ ÎîÂNæñ•ÃÃSúuyõ÷A N 375 N
4651|yad yad vibhutimat sattvam
4652| srimad urjitam eva va
4653|tat tad evavagaccha tvam
4654| mama tejo -'msa-sambhavam
4655|SYNONYMS
4656|yat yat-whatever and wherever; vibhuti-mat-
>|extraordinarily opulent; sattvam -living entity;
>|sri-mat-full of wealth; urjitam-full of power; eva-
>|certainly; va-or; tat tat-there; eva-certainly; avagaccha-
>|should know; tvam-you; mama-of Me; tejah-of power; amsa-of
>|a part; sambhavam-exhibition.
4657|TRANSLATION
4658|"'Know that all opulent, beautiful and glorious
>|creations spring from but a spark of My splendor. '
4659|PURPORT
4660|This is a statement made by Krsna in the Bhagavad-gita (10.
>|41).
4661|Madhya 20.376
4662|TEXT 376
4663|TEXT
4664|Õnõ± õUÍdNîd ¿LÁS :±Nîd îõ±æSRÃd h
4665|¿õ(c)†tÂI±ýÃÿ÷ðÃS LÔÁR¦§N÷LÁ±SNúd ¿¦šNî± æÃáR N 376 N
4666|atha va bahunaitena
4667| kim jnatena tavarjuna
4668|vistabhyaham idam krtsnam
4669| ekamsena sthito jagat
4670|SYNONYMS
4671|atha va-or; bahuna-much; etena-with this; kim-what use;
>|jnatena-being known; tava-by you; arjuna-O Arjuna;
>|vistabhya-pervading; aham-I; idam-this; krtsnam-entire; eka-
>|amsena-with one portion; sthitah-situated; jagat-universe.
4672|TRANSLATION
4673|"'But what need is there, Arjuna, for all this detailed
>|knowledge? With a single fragment of Myself I pervade and
>|support this entire universe.'
4674|PURPORT
4675|This is also a statement made by Krsna in the Bhagavad-gita
>|(10.42).
4676|Madhya 20.377
4677|TEXT 377
4678|TEXT
4679|Ûý×ÃÃî LÁ¿ýÃÃhRD úMÃI±Nõú-Õõî±õþ h
4680|õ±hI-ÎóNáG-sN÷Sõþ qdýÃà ¿õa±õþ N 377 N
4681|eita kahilun sakty-avesa-avatara
4682|balya-pauganda-dharmera sunaha vicara
4683|SYNONYMS
4684|eita-thus; kahilun-I have explained; sakti-avesa-avatara-
>|the incarnations specifically empowered; balya-in childhood;
>| pauganda-in boyhood; dharmera-of the characteristics;
>|sunaha-now hear; vicara-the consideration.
4685|TRANSLATION
4686|"Thus I have explained specifically empowered incarnations.
>|Now please hear about the characteristics of Lord Krsna's
>|childhood, boyhood and youth.
4687|Madhya 20.378
4688|TEXT 378
4689|TEXT
4690|¿LÁNú±õþNúmõþ-s÷¹ õrNæÃfdµd h
4691|›¶LÁiÂhNh± LÁ¿õþõ±Nõþ lNõ LÁNõþ ÷d N 378 N
4692|kisora-sekhara-dharmi vrajendra-nandana
4693|prakata-lila karibare yabe kare mana
4694|SYNONYMS
4695|kisora-sekhara-topmost of youth; dharmi-whose natural
>|position; vrajendra-nandana-the son of Maharaja Nanda;
>|prakata-lila-manifested pastimes; karibare-to perform; yabe-
>|when; kare-makes; mana-mind.
4696|TRANSLATION
4697|"As the son of Maharaja Nanda, Lord Krsna is by nature the
>|paragon of kisora [youth]. He chooses to exhibit His
>|pastimes at that age.
4698|Madhya 20.379
4699|TEXT 379
4700|TEXT
4701|Õ±NðÃN ›¶LÁi LÁõþ±lþ ÷±î±-¿óî±–tÂMÃáNí h
4702|ó±Nrà ›¶LÁi ýÃÃlþ æÃij±¿ðÃLÁ-hNh±SN÷ N 379 N
4703|adau prakata karaya mata-pita-bhakta-gane
4704|pache prakata haya janmadika-lila-krame
4705|SYNONYMS
4706|adau-first; prakata-manifest; karaya-He makes; mata-pita-
>|His mother and father; bhakta-gane-similar devotees; pache-
>|after that; prakata haya-are manifested; janma-adika-
>|lila-krame-such pastimes as birth, in order.
4707|TRANSLATION
4708|"Before His personal appearance, the Lord causes some of
>|His devotees to appear as His mother, father and intimate
>|associates. He then appears later as if He were taking
>|birth and growing from a baby to a child and gradually into
>|a youth.
4709|Madhya 20.380
4710|TEXT 380
4711|TEXT
4712|õlþNu± ¿õ¿õsNQ•Ã¿ó uõSt¿Mõþu±|lþÐ h
4713|s÷¹ ¿LÁNú±õþ Ûõ±S ¿dîÂIhNh±-¿õh±uõ±dA N 380 N
4714|vayaso vividhatve 'pi
4715| sarva-bhakti-rasasrayah
4716|dharmi kisora evatra
4717| nitya-lila- vilasavan
4718|SYNONYMS
4719|vayasah-of age; vividhatve-in varieties; api-although;
>|sarva-of all kinds; bhakti-rasa-asrayah-the shelter of
>|devotional service; dharmi-whose constitutional nature;
>|kisorah-in the age before youth; eva-certainly; atra-in
>|this; nitya-lila-of eternal pastimes; vilasa-van-the
>|supreme enjoyer.
4720|TRANSLATION
4721|"'The Supreme Personality of Godhead is eternally enjoying
>|Himself, and He is the shelter of all kinds of devotional
>|service. Although His ages are various, His age known as
>|kisora [pre-youth] is best of all.'
4722|PURPORT
4723|This verse is found in the Bhakti-rasamrta-sindhu (2.1.63).
4724|Madhya 20.381
4725|TEXT 381
4726|TEXT
4727|óÓîd±-õs±¿ðà lî hNh± ŽÂNí ŽÂNí h
4728|uõ hNh± ¿dîÂI ›¶LÁi LÁNõþ ÕdRSN÷ N 381 N
4729|putana-vadhadi yata lila ksane ksane
4730|saba lila nitya prakata kare anukrame
4731|SYNONYMS
4732|putana-vadha-adi-killing of the demons like Putana; yata-
>|all; lila-pastimes; ksane ksane-one moment after another;
>|saba lila-all these pastimes; nitya-eternally; prakata-
>|manifesting; kare-does; anukrame-one after another.
4733|TRANSLATION
4734|"When Lord Krsna appears, from moment to moment He exhibits
>|His different pastimes, beginning with the killing of
>|Putana. All these pastimes are eternally being demonstrated
>|one after another.
4735|Madhya 20.382
4736|TEXT 382
4737|TEXT
4738|Õd(tm)L õrpÁ±G, î±õþ d±¿ýÃÃLÁ áíd h
4739|ÎLÁ±d hNh± ÎLÁ±d õrpÁ±NG ýÃÃlþ ›¶LÁiÂd N 382 N
4740|ananta brahmanda, tara nahika ganana
4741|kona lila kona brahmande haya prakatana
4742|SYNONYMS
4743|ananta brahmanda-innumerable universes; tara-of which;
>|nahika ganana-there is no counting; kona lila-some pastimes;
>| kona brahmande-in some universe; haya-there is; prakatana-
>|manifestation.
4744|TRANSLATION
4745|"The consecutive pastimes of Krsna are being manifested
>|in one of the innumerable universes moment after moment.
>|There is no possibility of counting the universes, but in
>|any case some pastime of the Lord is being manifested at
>|every moment in one universe or another.
4746|Madhya 20.383
4747|TEXT 383
4748|TEXT
4749|Ûý×ÃÃ÷î uõ hNh±–Îld á/±s±õþ h
4750|Îu-Îu hNh± ›¶LÁi LÁNõþ õrNæÃfLRÁ÷±õþ N 383 N
4751|ei-mata saba lila-yena ganga-dhara
4752|se-se lila prakata kare vrajendra-kumara
4753|SYNONYMS
4754|ei-mata-in this way; saba lila-all pastimes; yena-like;
>|ganga-dhara-the flowing of the water of the Ganges; se-se-
>|those; lila-pastimes; prakata kare-demonstrates; vrajendra-
>|kumara-the son of Maharaja Nanda.
4755|TRANSLATION
4756|"Thus the Lord's pastimes are like the flowing Ganges water.
>| In this way all the pastimes are manifested by the son of
>|Nanda Maharaja.
4757|Madhya 20.384
4758|TEXT 384
4759|TEXT
4760|SN÷ õ±hI-ÎóNáG-ÆLÁNú±õþî±-›¶±¿5 h
4761|õþ±u-Õ±¿ðà hNh± LÁNõþ, ÆLÁNú±Nõþ ¿dîÂI¿¦š¿î N 384 N
4762|krame balya-pauganda-kaisorata-prapti
4763|rasa-adi lila kare, kaisore nitya-sthiti
4764|SYNONYMS
4765|krame-gradually; balya-childhood; pauganda-boyhood;
>|kaisorata-youth; prapti-development; rasa-dancing with the
>|gopis; adi-and others; lila-pastimes; kare-performs;
>|kaisore-in His age of pre-youth; nitya-sthiti-eternally
>|existing.
4766|TRANSLATION
4767|"Lord Krsna exhibits His pastimes of childhood, boyhood and
>|pre-youth. When He reaches pre-youth, He continues to exist
>|eternally to perform His rasa dance and other pastimes.
4768|PURPORT
4769|The comparison made here is very interesting. Krsna does
>|not grow like an ordinary human being, even though He
>|exhibits His pastimes of childhood, boyhood and pre-youth.
>|When He reaches the age of pre-youth, kaisora, He does not
>|grow any older. He simply remains in His kaisora age. He is
>|therefore described in the Brahma-samhita (5.33) as nava-
>|yauvana:
4770|advaitam acyutam anadim ananta-rupam
4771| adyam purana-purusam nava-yauvanam ca
4772|vedesu durlabham adurlabham atma-bhaktau
4773| govindam adi-purusam tam aham bhajami
4774|This nava-yauvana, or pre-youth, is the eternal
>|transcendental form of Krsna. Krsna never grows older than
>|nava-yauvana.
4775|Madhya 20.385
4776|TEXT 385
4777|TEXT
4778|'¿dîÂIhNh±' LÔÁNøžõþ uõSú±N¦a LÁlþ h
4779|õR¿sÁNî d± ó±Nõþ hNh± ÎLÁ÷Nd '¿dîÂI' ýÃÃlþ N 385 N
4780|'nitya-lila' krsnera sarva-sastre kaya
4781|bujhite na pare lila kemane 'nitya' haya
4782|SYNONYMS
4783|nitya-lila-eternal pastimes; krsnera-of Lord Krsna; sarva-
>|sastre kaya-described in every sastra; bujhite na pare-not
>|able to understand; lila-pastimes; kemane-how; nitya haya-
>|are eternal.
4784|TRANSLATION
4785|"Descriptions of Krsna's eternal pastimes are in all the
>|revealed scriptures. But one cannot understand how they are
>|continuing eternally.
4786|Madhya 20.386
4787|TEXT 386
4788|TEXT
4789|ðÔÃ(c)†±(tm)L ¿ðÃlþ± LÁ¿ýÃà îÂNõ Îh±LÁ l¿ðà æñNd h
4790|LÔÁøžhNh±–¿dîÂI, ÎæÃI±¿îÂ(S-›¶÷±Ní N 386 N
4791|drstanta diya kahi tabe loka yadi jane
4792|krsna-lila-nitya, jyotiscakra-pramane
4793|SYNONYMS
4794|drstanta diya-giving an example; kahi-let Me say; tabe-then;
>| loka-people; yadi-if; jane-can understand; krsna-lila-
>|pastimes of Lord Krsna; nitya-eternal; jyotih-cakra-of the
>|zodiac; pramane-by evidence.
4795|TRANSLATION
4796|"Let me give an example by which people may understand Lord
>|Krsna's eternal pastimes. An example can be found in the
>|zodiac.
4797|Madhya 20.387
4798|TEXT 387
4799|TEXT
4800|ÎæÃI±¿îÂ(NS uÓlS Îld ¿ôÂNõþ õþ±¿S-¿ðÃNd h
4801|u5ZÂN󱥤R¿s h¿ã¸â' ¿ôÂNõþ SN÷ SN÷ N 387 N
4802|jyotiscakre surya yena phire ratri-dine
4803|sapta-dvipambudhi langhi' phire krame krame
4804|SYNONYMS
4805|jyotih-cakre-in the zodiac; surya-of the sun; yena-as;
>|phire-moves; ratri-dine-the day and night; sapta-dvipa-
>|ambudhi-the oceans of the islands; langhi'-crossing; phire-
>|rotates; krame krame-one after another.
4806|TRANSLATION
4807|"The sun moves across the zodiac day and night and crosses
>|the oceans between the seven islands one after the other.
4808|Madhya 20.388
4809|TEXT 388
4810|TEXT
4811|õþ±¿S-¿ðÃNd ýÃÃlþ ø¸¿(c)†ðÃG-ó¿õþ÷±í h
4812|¿îduýÃÃ¦Ú rÃlþúî 'óh' î±õþ ÷±d N 388 N
4813|ratri-dine haya sasti-danda-parimana
4814|tina-sahasra chaya-sata 'pala' tara mana
4815|SYNONYMS
4816|ratri-dine-during the whole day and night; haya-there is;
>|sasti-danda-of sixty dandas (a measure of time); parimana-
>|duration; tina-sahasra-three thousand; chaya-sata-six
>|hundred; pala-palas; tara-of that; mana-measurement.
4817|TRANSLATION
4818|"According to Vedic astronomical calculations, the rotation
>|of the sun consists of sixty dandas, and it is divided into
>|thirty-six hundred palas.
4819|Madhya 20.389
4820|TEXT 389
4821|TEXT
4822|uÓNlS±ðÃlþ ÆýÃÃNî ø¸¿(c)†óh-SN÷±ðÃlþ h
4823|Îuý×Ãà ÛLÁ ðÃG, Õ(c)† ðÃNG '›¶ýÃõþ' ýÃÃlþ N 389 N
4824|suryodaya haite sasti-pala-kramodaya
4825|sei eka danda, asta dande 'prahara' haya
4826|SYNONYMS
4827|surya-udaya haite-beginning from the sunrise; sasti-pala-
>|sixty palas; krama-udaya-gradually rising higher and higher;
>| sei-that; eka danda-one danda; asta dande-in eight dandas;
>|prahara haya-there is a prahara.
4828|TRANSLATION
4829|"The sun rises in steps consisting of sixty palas. Sixty
>|palas equal one danda, and eight dandas comprise one
>|prahara.
4830|Madhya 20.390
4831|TEXT 390
4832|TEXT
4833|ÛLÁ-ðRÃý×ÃÃ-¿îd-a±¿õþ ›¶ýÃÃNõþ Õ(tm)¦ ýÃÃlþ h
4834|a±¿õþÃÛ¶ýÃõþ õþ±¿S ÎáNh óRdÐ uÓNlS±ðÃlþ N 390 N
4835|eka-dui-tina-cari prahare asta haya
4836|cari-prahara ratri gele punah suryodaya
4837|SYNONYMS
4838|eka-dui-tina-cari-one, two, three, four; prahare-in
>|praharas; asta haya-the sun sets in the evening; cari-
>|prahara-generally after four praharas; ratri-the night;
>|gele-when it passes; punah-again; suryodaya-the sun rises.
4839|TRANSLATION
4840|"The day and the night are divided into eight praharas-
>|four belonging to the day and four belonging to the night.
>|After eight praharas, the sun rises again.
4841|Madhya 20.391
4842|TEXT 391
4843|TEXT
4844|UNrà LÔÁNøžõþ hNh±-÷Gh ÎaÂNV÷i¤(tm)LNõþ h
4845|õrpÁ±G÷Gh õI±¿ó' SN÷ SN÷ ¿ôÂNõþ N 391 N
4846|aiche krsnera lila-mandala caudda-manvantare
4847|brahmanda-mandala vyapi' krame krame phire
4848|SYNONYMS
4849|aiche-in the same way; krsnera-of Lord Krsna; lila-mandala-
>|groups of different pastimes; caudda-manvantare-in the
>|duration of fourteen Manus; brahmanda-mandala-all of the
>|universes; vyapi'-spreading through; krame krame-gradually;
>|phire-return.
4850|TRANSLATION
4851|"Just as there is an orbit of the sun, there is an orbit
>|of Krsna's pastimes, which are manifested one after the
>|other. During the lifetime of fourteen Manus, this orbit
>|expands through all the universes, and gradually it returns.
>| Thus Krsna moves with His pastimes through all the
>|universes, one after another.
4852|Madhya 20.392
4853|TEXT 392
4854|TEXT
4855|uÝlþ±úî õRuõþ LÔÁNøžõþ ›¶LÁiÂ-›¶LÁ±ú h
4856|î±ýÃñ ÆlNrà õræÃ-óRNõþ LÁ¿õþh± ¿õh±u N 392 N
4857|saoyasata vatsara krsnera prakata-prakasa
4858|taha yaiche vraja-pure karila vilasa
4859|SYNONYMS
4860|saoyasata-125; vatsara-years; krsnera-of Lord Krsna;
>|prakata-prakasa-manifestation of the appearance; taha-that;
>|yaiche-like; vraja-pure-in Vrndavana and Dvaraka; karila
>|vilasa-enjoys the pastimes.
4861|TRANSLATION
4862|"Krsna remains within a universe for 125 years, and He
>|enjoys His pastimes both in Vrndavana and Dvaraka.
4863|Madhya 20.393
4864|TEXT 393
4865|TEXT
4866|Õh±îÂaÂS›¶±lþ Îuý×Ãà hNh±aÂS ¿ôÂNõþ h
4867|uõ hNh± uõ õrpÁ±NG SN÷ nÂ×ðÃlþ LÁNõþ N 393 N
4868|alata-cakra-praya sei lila-cakra phire
4869|saba lila saba brahmande krame udaya kare
4870|SYNONYMS
4871|alata-cakra-praya-exactly like a wheel of fire; sei-that;
>|lila-cakra-the cycle of Krsna's pastimes; phire-turns; saba
>|lila-all these pastimes; saba brahmande-in all the
>|universes; krame-one after another; udaya kare-are
>|manifested.
4872|TRANSLATION
4873|"The cycle of His pastimes turns like a wheel of fire. Thus
>|Krsna exhibits His pastimes one after the other in every
>|universe.
4874|Madhya 20.394
4875|TEXT 394
4876|TEXT
4877|æÃij, õ±hI, ÎóNáG, ÆLÁNú±õþ ›¶LÁ±ú h
4878|óÓîd±-õs±¿ðà LÁ¿õþ' Î÷Nø¸h±(tm)L ¿õh±u N 394 N
4879|janma, balya, pauganda, kaisora prakasa
4880|putana-vadhadi kari' mausalanta vilasa
4881|SYNONYMS
4882|janma-birth; balya-childhood; pauganda-boyhood; kaisora-pre-
>|youth; prakasa-manifestation; putana-vadha-adi-killing the
>|demons, beginning from Putana; kari'-manifesting;
>|mausala-anta-until the end of the mausala pastimes;
>|vilasa-pastimes.
4883|TRANSLATION
4884|"Krsna's pastimes-appearance, childhood, boyhood and youth-
>|are all manifested, beginning with the killing of Putana
>|and extending to the end of the mausala-lila, the
>|annihilation of the Yadu dynasty. All of these pastimes are
>|rotating in every universe.
4885|Madhya 20.395
4886|TEXT 395
4887|TEXT
4888|ÎLÁ±d õrpÁ±NG ÎLÁ±d hNh±õþ ýÃÃlþ Õõ¦š±d h
4889|î±Nî hNh± '¿dîÂI' LÁNýÃà ձá÷-óRõþ±í N 395 N
4890|kona brahmande kona lilara haya avasthana
4891|tate lila 'nitya' kahe agama-purana
4892|SYNONYMS
4893|kona brahmande-in some universe; kona lilara-some pastimes;
>|haya-there is; avasthana-the presence; tate-therefore; lila-
>|pastimes; nitya-eternal; kahe-explains; agama-purana-the
>|Vedas and Puranas.
4894|TRANSLATION
4895|"Since all Krsna's pastimes are taking place continuously,
>|at every moment some pastime is existing in one universe or
>|another. Consequently these pastimes are called eternal by
>|the Vedas and Puranas.
4896|Madhya 20.396
4897|TEXT 396
4898|TEXT
4899|Îá±Nh±LÁ, Îá±LRÁh-s±÷–'¿õtRÂ' LÔÁøžu÷ h
4900|LÔÁNøž26ñlþ õrpÁ±GáNí î±ýÃñõþ uSS÷ N 396 N
4901|goloka, gokula-dhama-'vibhu' krsna-sama
4902|krsnecchaya brahmanda-gane tahara sankrama
4903|SYNONYMS
4904|goloka-the planet known as Goloka; gokula-dhama-the
>|spiritual land, the pasturing fields for the surabhi cows;
>|vibhu-opulent and powerful; krsna-sama-as much as Krsna;
>|krsna-icchaya-by the supreme will of Krsna; brahmanda-gane-
>|in each of the universes; tahara-of the Goloka and Gokula
>|dhamas; sankrama-appearance.
4905|TRANSLATION
4906|"The spiritual abode known as Goloka, which is a pasturing
>|land for surabhi cows, is as powerful and opulent as Krsna.
>|By the will of Krsna, the original Goloka and Gokula dhamas
>|are manifested with Him in all the universes.
4907|Madhya 20.397
4908|TEXT 397
4909|TEXT
4910|ÕîÂÛõ Îá±Nh±LÁ¦š±Nd ¿dîÂI ¿õýÃñõþ h
4911|õrpÁ±GáNí SN÷ ›¶±LÁiÂI î±ýÃñõþ N 397 N
4912|ataeva goloka-sthane nitya vihara
4913|brahmanda-gane krame prakatya tahara
4914|SYNONYMS
4915|ataeva-therefore; goloka-sthane-in the original Goloka
>|Vrndavana planet; nitya vihara-eternal pastimes; brahmanda-
>|gane-within the material universes; krame-gradually;
>|prakatya-manifestation; tahara-of them.
4916|TRANSLATION
4917|"The eternal pastimes of Krsna are continuously taking
>|place in the original Goloka Vrndavana planet. These same
>|pastimes are gradually manifested within the material world,
>| in each and every brahmanda.
4918|PURPORT
4919|Srila Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Thakura elucidates this
>|complicated explanation of Krsna's pastimes. Krsna's
>|pastimes are always present in the material world in one of
>|the many universes. These pastimes appear in the universes
>|one after the other, just as the sun moves across the sky
>|and measures the time. Krsna's appearance may be manifested
>|in this universe at one moment, and immediately after His
>|birth, this pastime is manifested in the next universe.
>|After His killing of Putana is manifested in this universe,
>|it is next manifested in another universe. Thus all the
>|pastimes of Krsna are eternally existing both in the
>|original Goloka Vrndavana planet and in the material
>|universes. The 125 years calculated in our solar system to
>|be Krsna's lifetime equal one moment for Krsna. One moment
>|these pastimes are manifested in one universe, and the next
>|moment they are manifested in the next universe. There are
>|unlimited universes, and Krsna's pastimes are manifested
>|one moment after the other in all of them. This rotation is
>|explained through the example of the sun's moving across
>|the sky. Krsna appears and disappears in innumerable
>|universes, just as the sun appears and disappears during
>|the day. Although the sun appears to rise and set, it is
>|continuously shining somewhere on the earth. Similarly,
>|although Krsna's pastimes seem to appear and disappear,
>|they are continuously existing in one brahmanda (universe)
>|or another. Thus all of Krsna's lilas are present
>|simultaneously throughout the innumerable universes. By our
>|limited senses we cannot appreciate this; therefore Krsna's
>|eternal pastimes are very difficult for us to understand.
>|One should try to understand how they are taking place by
>|understanding the example of the sun. Although the Lord is
>|appearing constantly in the material universes, His
>|pastimes are eternally present in the original Goloka
>|Vrndavana. Therefore these pastimes are called nitya-lila (
>|eternally present pastimes). Because we cannot see what is
>|going on in other universes, it is a little difficult for
>|us to understand how Krsna is eternally manifesting His
>|pastimes. There are fourteen Manus in one day of Brahma,
>|and this time calculation is also taking place in other
>|universes. Krsna's pastimes are manifested before fourteen
>|Manus expire. Although it is a little difficult to
>|understand the eternal pastimes of Krsna in this way, we
>|must accept the verdict of the Vedic literatures.
4920|There are two types of devotees-the sadhaka, who is
>|preparing for perfection, and the siddha, who is already
>|perfect. As far as those who are already perfect are
>|concerned, Lord Krsna says in the Bhagavad-gita (4.9),
>|tyaktva deham punar janma naiti mam eti so 'rjuna: "After
>|giving up this material body, such a devotee comes to Me."
>|After leaving the material body, the perfect devotee takes
>|birth from the womb of a gopi on a planet where Krsna's
>|pastimes are going on. This may be in this universe or
>|another universe. This statement is found in the Ujjvala-
>|nilamani, which is commented upon by Visvanatha Cakravarti
>|Thakura. When a devotee becomes perfect, he is transferred
>|to the universe where Krsna's pastimes are taking place.
>|Krsna's eternal associates go wherever Krsna manifests His
>|pastimes. As stated before, first the father and mother of
>|Krsna appear, then the other associates. Quitting his
>|material body, the perfect devotee also goes to associate
>|with Krsna and His other associates.
4921|Madhya 20.398
4922|TEXT 398
4923|TEXT
4924|õrNæà LÔÁøž–uÍõS«lS›¶LÁ±Nú 'óÓíSîÂ÷' h
4925|óRõþNZNlþ, óõþNõI±N÷–'óÓíSîõþ,' 'óÓíS' N 398 N
4926|vraje krsna-sarvaisvarya-prakase 'purnatama'
4927|puri-dvaye, paravyome-'purnatara', 'purna'
4928|SYNONYMS
4929|vraje-in Vrndavana; krsna-Lord Krsna; sarva-aisvarya-
>|prakase-manifestation of His full opulence; purna-tama-most
>|complete; puri-dvaye-in Dvaraka and Mathura; para-vyome-and
>|in the spiritual world; purna-tara-more complete; purna-
>|complete.
4930|TRANSLATION
4931|"Krsna is complete in the spiritual sky [Vaikuntha], He is
>|more complete in Mathura and Dvaraka, and He is most
>|complete in Vrndavana, Vraja, due to His manifesting all
>|His opulences.
4932|PURPORT
4933|This is confirmed in the following three verses from the
>|Bhakti-rasamrta-sindhu (2.1.221–223).
4934|Madhya 20.399
4935|TEXT 399
4936|TEXT
4937|ýÃÿõþÐ óÓíSîÂ÷Ð óÓíSîõþÐ óÓíS ý×Ãÿî ¿Ss± h
4938|Î|‡Â÷sI±¿ðÿtÂÐ úÍsd±SNiÂI lÐ ó¿õþóêÂINî N 399 N
4939|harih purnatamah purna-
4940| tarah purna iti tridha
4941|srestha-madhyadibhih sabdair
4942| natye yah paripathyate
4943|SYNONYMS
4944|harih-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; purna-tamah-most
>|complete; purna-tarah-more complete; purnah-complete; iti-
>|thus; tridha -three stages; srestha-best; madhya-
>|adibhih-middle, etc.; sabdaih-by the words; natye-in books
>|on dramatics; yah-who; paripathyate-is proclaimed.
4945|TRANSLATION
4946|"'This is stated in the dramatic literatures as "perfect,"
>|"more perfect " and "most perfect." Thus Lord Krsna
>|manifests Himself in three ways-perfect, more perfect and
>|most perfect.
4947|Madhya 20.400
4948|TEXT 400
4949|TEXT
4950|›¶LÁ±¿úmh&íÐ ¦œÔîÂÐ óÓíSîÂN÷± õRÍsÐ h
4951|ÕuõSõI?LÁÐ óÓíSîõþÐ óÓNíS±•ÃŠðÃúSLÁÐ N 400 N
4952|prakasitakhila-gunah
4953| smrtah purnatamo budhaih
4954|asarva-vyanjakah purna-
4955| tarah purno 'lpa-darsakah
4956|SYNONYMS
4957|prakasita-akhila-gunah-having all transcendental qualities
>|manifested; smrtah-is understood; purna-tamah-most perfect;
>|budhaih-by learned scholars; asarva-vyanjakah-having
>|qualities not fully manifested; purna-tarah-more perfect;
>|purnah-perfect; alpa-darsakah-still less fully manifested.
4958|TRANSLATION
4959|"'When the Supreme Personality of Godhead does not
>|manifest all His transcendental qualities, He is called
>|complete. When all the qualities are manifested, but not
>|fully, He is called more complete. When He manifests all
>|His qualities in fullness, He is called most complete. This
>|is the version of all learned scholars in the devotional
>|science.
4960|Madhya 20.401
4961|TEXT 401
4962|TEXT
4963|LÔÁøžuI óÓíSîÂ÷î± õIMñtÓÂðAÃNá±LRÁh±(tm)LNõþ h
4964|óÓíSî± óÓíSîõþî± Z±õþLÁ±-÷nRõþ±¿ðÃø¸R N 401 N
4965|krsnasya purnatamata
4966| vyaktabhud gokulantare
4967|purnata purnatarata
4968| dvaraka-mathuradisu
4969|SYNONYMS
4970|krsnasya-of Lord Krsna; purna-tamata-being most perfect;
>|vyakta-manifested; abhut-became; gokula-antare-in the
>|domain of Gokula Vrndavana; purnata-completeness; purna-
>|tarata-more completeness; dvaraka-in Dvaraka; mathura-adisu-
>|and Mathura, and so on.
4971|TRANSLATION
4972|"'The most complete qualities of Krsna are manifested
>|within Vrndavana, and His complete and more complete
>|qualities are manifested in Dvaraka and Mathura.'
4973|Madhya 20.402
4974|TEXT 402
4975|TEXT
4976|Ûý×Ãà LÔÁøž–õrNæà 'óÓíSîÂ÷' tÂáõ±dA h
4977|Õ±õþ uõ ¦¤õþ+ó–'óÓíSîõþ' 'óÓíS' d±÷ N 402 N
4978|ei krsna-vraje 'purnatama' bhagavan
4979|ara saba svarupa-'purnatara' 'purna' nama
4980|SYNONYMS
4981|ei krsna-the same Krsna; vraje-Vrndavana; purna-tama
>|bhagavan-the most complete manifestation of the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead; ara-other; saba-all; svarupa -
>|forms; purna-tara-more complete; purna-complete; nama-named.
4982|TRANSLATION
4983|"Lord Krsna is the most complete Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead in Vrndavana. Elsewhere all His expansions are
>|either complete or more complete.
4984|Madhya 20.403
4985|TEXT 403
4986|TEXT
4987|uSNŽÂNó LÁ¿ýÃÃhRD LÔÁNøžõþ ¦¤õþ+ó-¿õa±õþ h
4988|'Õd(tm)L' LÁ¿ýÃÃNî d±Nõþ ý×ÃÃýÃñõþ ¿õ(tm)¦±õþ N 403 N
4989|sanksepe kahilun krsnera svarupa-vicara
4990|'ananta' kahite nare ihara vistara
4991|SYNONYMS
4992|sanksepe-in brief; kahilun-I have described; krsnera-of
>|Lord Krsna; svarupa-vicara-consideration of His different
>|forms and features; ananta-Lord Ananta; kahite nare-not
>|able to describe; ihara-of this; vistara-the expanse.
4993|TRANSLATION
4994|"Thus I have briefly described Krsna's manifestation of
>|transcendental forms. This subject matter is so large that
>|even Lord Ananta cannot describe it fully.
4995|Madhya 20.404
4996|TEXT 404
4997|TEXT
4998|Õd(tm)L ¦¤õþ+ó LÔÁNøžõþ d±¿ýÃÃLÁ áíd h
4999|ú±m±-aÂf-dI±Nlþ LÁ¿õþ ¿ðáAÃðÃõþúd N 404 N
5000|ananta svarupa krsnera nahika ganana
5001|sakha-candra-nyaye kari dig-darasana
5002|SYNONYMS
5003|ananta-unlimited; svarupa-forms; krsnera-of Lord Krsna;
>|nahika ganana-there is no counting; sakha-candra-nyaye-by
>|the logic of showing the moon through the branches of a
>|tree; kari-I do; dik-darasana-only partial showing.
5004|TRANSLATION
5005|"In this way Krsna's transcendental forms are expanded
>|unlimitedly. No one can count them. Whatever I have
>|explained is simply a little glimpse. It is like showing
>|the moon through the branches of a tree."
5006|Madhya 20.405
5007|TEXT 405
5008|TEXT
5009|ý×ÃÃýÃñ Îlý×Ãà qNd, óNnÂl, Îuý×Ãà t±áIõ±dA h
5010|LÔÁNøžõþ ¦¤õþ+óîÂNNõþ ýÃÃlþ ¿LÁrRà :±d N 405 N
5011|iha yei sune, pade, sei bhagyavan
5012|krsnera svarupa-tattvera haya kichu jnana
5013|SYNONYMS
5014|iha-this narration; yei sune-anyone who hears; pade-or
>|reads; sei-such a person; bhagyavan-is most fortunate;
>|krsnera-of Lord Krsna; svarupa-tattvera-of personal bodily
>|features; haya-there is; kichu-something; jnana-knowledge.
5015|TRANSLATION
5016|Whoever hears or recites these descriptions of the
>|expansions of Krsna's body is certainly a very fortunate
>|man. Although this is very difficult to understand, one can
>|nonetheless acquire some knowledge about the different
>|features of Krsna's body.
5017|Madhya 20.406
5018|TEXT 406
5019|TEXT
5020|Mõþ+ó- õþâRd±n- óNðà l±õþ Õ±ú h
5021|ÆaÂîdIa¿õþî±÷Ôî LÁNýÃà LÔÁøžðñu N 406 N
5022|sri-rupa-raghunatha-pade yara asa
5023|caitanya-caritamrta kahe krsnadasa
5024|SYNONYMS
5025|sri-rupa-Srila Rupa Gosvami; raghunatha-Srila Raghunatha
>|dasa Gosvami; pade-at the lotus feet; yara-whose; asa-
>|expectation; Caitanya-caritamrta-the book named Caitanya-
>|caritamrta; kahe-describes; krsnadasa-Srila Krsnadasa
>|Kaviraja Gosvami.
5026|TRANSLATION
5027|Praying at the lotus feet of Sri Rupa and Sri Raghunatha,
>|always desiring their mercy, I, Krsnadasa, narrate Sri
>|Caitanya-caritamrta, following in their footsteps.
5028|Thus end the Bhaktivedanta purports to Sri Caitanya-
>|caritamrta, Madhya-lila, Twentieth Chapter, describing how
>|Sanatana Gosvami met the Lord at Varanasi and received
>|knowledge of the Absolute Truth.
5029|